Airiness shaped indoors brings the inhabitant calm, peace and tranquility as it creates and extraordinary breathable, awe-inspiring state often pursued by the individual. This splendid ambiance is often conjured in interior designs through the extensive use of stark white and light in the pursuit of serendipity.
In the attempt to change your indoor ambiance though pattern whilst using white you can use white painted wood, withered wood, tiles and custom 3D wall options that ought to remap the surface with a certain design motif, white brick walls are also a common option in industrial design.
A collection of white brick walls have been curated in the attempt to help one in the pursuit of this airy ambiance through the use of a pattern that provides rhythm,texture and depth alike : white bricks. These could be installed white directly or they can be painted but for the latter one ought to keep in mind that this effect is not reversible.
White Brick Walls Shaping Airiness Follow
A brick wall can bring forward a gallery offering it a supporting texture.
Source Unknown
The white brick can be considered a design component itself greatly contributing to simply decorated spaces with a neutral almost deaf coziness.
The wooden texture can become a focal point in both color and texture, use it to create that warm point of interest without distressing that neutral white ambiance that supports it with a contrast of coldness and stillness.
The brick texture creates the feeling of a whole chimney despite the lack of volume, the lower shelf, and the above chimney mantel thus shaping the extraordinarily elegant package with very few elements.
The texture here creatures contrasts with the mirror finish of the teal furnishing, the latter contradicts it in flatness and color alike creating a very powerful indirect contrast. The blanket on the couch and sculptural glass items on a side table in front support the strong position of the furnishings thus creating balance in the interior with little color effort.
The dream-like dimension brought by a brick wall encourages the inhabitant to happy simplicity; notice how natural and elegant a simple mattress looks placed directly on the concrete floor above. The bedding rightfully respects the dialogue between concrete and the white wall and contributes to the scenery with the right chromatic.
via urbanoutfitters.com
Stainless steel and leather may look overwhelmed, and subdued in the presence of a strong texture with which no connection is created.
An extensive wooden surface can function with a brick wall in white and give the right balance; here the proposed wood contributes with texture only, and the color fades out.
Source Unknown
The contrast of a wooden texture with white and black can always win the game, brick simply spices up the game.
To create the illusion of time and memory and a freshly built building white brick walls can be used successfully.
via Pinterest
Balance ought to be pursued in any setting regardless of the design expression chosen.
www.revedecor.com
In an open plan kitchen-dining-living room space the feeling of airiness can be built easier through sufficient light and white to bounce it throughout. The concrete floor grounds the interior space with a slight contrast that simply elevates the vertical planes here conveniently in white.
www.ideasforinterior.com
The intricate detailing of the texture brings coziness in small settings.
via Pinterest
Balanced and airy setting in a modern setting embracing neutral tones.
Source Unknown
Stark white throughout anchors settings in the realm of fairy tales, the simple awe-inspiring ambiance is often pursued but rarely materialized.
Wooden tones with memory contribute with a time fingerprint in a simple setting that sustains this dimension through the white brick wall that does not challenge the interior in chromatics.
via decorcology.com
Elegance can be brought in through different means, notice the intricate pattern on the floor that diminishes the brick`s importance and creates great depth as here the surface is shattered and occasionally has breaks in rhythm that might be generated by stone inserts. The sculptural mineral presence in black and the uniquely shaped sink come forward despite the immense amount of detail in an intense-extraordinarily beautiful setting.
Source Unknown
A simple impeccable setting is obtained through a perfect balance between wood and white in a setting flooded by light.
The intense dynamic of the interior above is uncertain; the pillar in white disrupts the white-purple brick surface thus creating a great unbalance. The sculptural black chair and glass dining table also have an odd connection with the floor. Elements are missing and there is no balance between the interior`s components. How do you see this interior?
The geometric playfulness with cozy wooden textures complements the frozen stillness of the brick wall behind in both color and rhythm through dynamic alike.
The option to create withered bricks, somewhere between their natural look and the white state is common as the unfinished look describes a setting with great identity with little to no effort; the result is also closer to the industrial look of a natural brick that can enrich an interior with coziness.
Source Unknown
Wood is always a beautiful supporting texture, here in contrast.
Source Unknown
Three elements in a space with two textures shape something unique. Authenticity in equilibrium.
Emphasizing a wall with memory with light and greenery is always a good idea.
Source Unknown
The mirror emphasizes the feeling of space in an airy setting aided by white brick walls.
Source Unknown
Withered aged wood, greenery, and walls that stand the age of time and recorded their part of history holding an industrial frame towards the exterior medium. This space shelters memory in an extraordinary frozen state of calm.
A blue intricate rug with naturalness in pattern grounds the neutral interior design composition above, which has the individual as the main element around which all gravitates.
Source Unknown
Ethereal ambiance with stark white throughout, grounded with white-wooden floors.
Source Unknown
by Elk Studios
Notice how the brick wall has been painted in the bedroom only to enlarge that particular space.
by Travis Dubreuil
How do you see the spaces above and the role of white brick walls in interior design? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below.
There are different types of angle grinder discs, such as diamond-tipped, serrated blades, etc., which can be used for tile cutting. However, choosing the right one for the purpose will mainly depend on the tile material.
Picture this: you need to resize a few tiles for your DIY kitchen or bathroom renovation, but buying a wet saw is too expensive an option. You ask a friend for help, who hands you an angle grinder. Sounds weird, right?
But angle grinders can help you with tile cutting, provided you have the right disc attachment for the tile material. And in the following sections, we will tell you all about how to choose it.
What Is An Angle Grinder After All?
An angle grinder is a power tool that can be either corded or cordless (battery-powered), typically used for cutting, smoothing rough edges, grinding, and finishing metals. It’s equipped with a rotating abrasive disc, which performs all these tasks.
And as you may have already figured out, there are different types of discs, depending on the type of material you want to work with. We will talk about them in a later section.
Used for both residential and commercial purposes, angle grinders come in handy for different tasks, including:
Sharpening gardening mower and shear blades
Deburring steel frames
Cutting protruding metal pieces
Cutting ceramic, natural stone, and porcelain tiles
Which Angle Grinder Should You Use For Cutting Tiles?
Although angle grinders may not be the perfect tool for cutting tiles, the good news is they do the job pretty well. Moreover, there are different discs available for the job, which we’ve listed below.
1. Stone Cutting Disc
Stone discs or blades are the most affordable choice, suitable for users who don’t really need a lot of precision while cutting tiles. These discs make thick cuts and generate a lot of dust, so you should always use them outdoors and wear proper protective gear to protect your eyes and nose.
Another thing to note is that a stone grinding disc isn’t very durable either, so you need to constantly keep an eye on it. The moment you notice the blade chipping, replace it with a new one.
2. Steel Disc
A steel disc is undoubtedly one of the most reliable options to achieve satisfactorily clean cuts, thanks to the diamond coating on it. In other words, a steel blade is essentially a diamond-tipped blade that can take on heavy-duty tile cutting.
These discs make it easier to make both curved and straight cuts on tiles without straining your nerves too much. Although they are more durable than their stone counterparts, their lifespan will ultimately depend on the intensity and frequency of the cutting.
3. Continuous Dry Cutting Discs
Another option in the diamond-tipped category is the continuous dry-cutting disc, which is a solid disc best suited for edging the tiles with straight cutting. A pro tip- wet the tile with a spray gun from time to time to help the blade cool down and prevent it from overworking.
4. Diamond Tile Saw Blades
As the name may have already suggested, diamond saw blades can cut through tiles made from glass, ceramic, natural stone, porcelain, granite, etc. In fact, the best diamond tile saw blades are extremely sharp to provide the smoothest of cuts without chipping.
Many users who use angle grinders for cutting ceramic tiles (or any other type, for that matter) consider these blades to be the best, as they can cut even the toughest tile. But these high-power blades tend to be more expensive than the other types.
Furthermore, diamond saw blades can be categorized into dry and wet blades. While the former can work on dry surfaces, the latter will require the surface to be sprayed down with water at regular intervals. This helps to cool their core, making them perform longer without any significant issues when used properly.
5. Serrated Blades
If you aren’t particularly looking for a smooth cut on your tiles, then a serrated blade is a good option to go for. But that’s not the only advantage it provides, as serrated blades are extremely helpful when it comes to cutting concrete tiles.
Likewise, they are a preferred choice for cutting tiles made of materials like natural stone, which are harder than their ceramic counterparts.
6. Carbide-Tipped Blades
These blades offer you a decent mix of price and performance, as they generate satisfactory cutting power without burning a hole in your pocket.
7. Abrasive Wheels
Abrasive wheels are perhaps the cheapest option out there; however, the low price comes at the cost of low durability. But one benefit of these blades is they are compatible with most materials.
Best Angle Grinder Discs On The Market Right Now
Now that you have a fair idea about the different types of angle grinder discs, let us quickly take you through some of the best models on the market. You will see that all of them come under the diamond blade category, as most professionals recommend this type for cutting ceramic tile with the best results.
1. Adust 4.5-Inch Diamond Tile Blade
First up is the Adust 4.5-inch diamond tile blade, which is a preferred choice for cutting porcelain tiles. However, it also works well for ceramic, slate, marble, and other types of natural stone tiles. With a super thin turbo mesh rim and X-tooth design, it can provide faster and cleaner cuts with minimal chipping for your bathroom or kitchen tiles.
Moreover, it weighs a little more than 12 ounces, so you can rest assured that it won’t add much to the overall weight of your angle grinder. It’s also one of the most durable options on the market today for both professionals and DIYers.
2. Casaverde 4.5-Inch Super Thin Blade
Yet another angle grinder blade that’s worth considering is this unit from Casaverde, which offers chip-free cuts even on the toughest tiles. It facilitates dry and wet cutting alike, and a special heat-treat function keeps the temperature down when dry cutting for longer periods.
Users have liked how this unit is compatible with different materials like reinforced concrete and metals without compromising on a smooth finish. And if you’re wondering what angle grinder disc for woodwill work best, then this unit can be a suitable answer to that, too.
3. Rok 4 ½-Inch Diamond Saw Blade Set
For people who may want to get their hands on a cost-effective blade set, Rok has got the perfect solution. According to the brand, this pack of 3 blades is suitable for making straight as well as angle cuts on varied materials, including granite, marble, ceramics, and concrete.
Each unit is equipped with a 1-inch turbo cutting rim that takes care of speed and precision, no matter if it’s a wet or dry cutting job. However, some users complain that the blades may not be very effective for longer cutting tasks.
Some Other Tips To Choose The Right Tile Cutting Blade
1. Size
Aside from the type of blade, you should consider the size (diameter) of the blade, as a bigger blade will easily cut more surface in one go.
2. Shape
Grinder blades come in different shapes, with square, rectangle, and segmented variants being the most commonly used ones. And each one brings different benefits and some drawbacks. For instance, squared-shaped tiles make it easier to perform straight cuts, but they may not be very useful for making curved cuts.
Rectangular blades, on the other hand, can be the perfect bet to make long, uninterrupted cuts, thanks to their larger surface area. However, they don’t score very high in terms of precision.
How To Use An Angle Grinder For Cutting Tiles?
The Preparation
Before starting with the job, ensure that you have the right tool and blade for the purpose.
For the unversed, angle grinders come in different variations, but the electric-powered ones are more popular, especially for standard DIY tile cutting and similar tasks. This is mainly because they can cover a larger area without requiring too much effort from the user.
Electric angle grinders are further divided into corded and cordless models, and you can choose one according to your needs and budget.
As for the tile cutter blade, it should be picked according to the material you will be working with. While a diamond-tipped blade with a smooth edge is considered most suitable to cut ceramic tiles, you can achieve cleaner cuts with notched blades for porcelain tiles.
After this is done, the next important thing is to wear adequate safety gear like work gloves, safety goggles, and a dust mask. Otherwise, you will expose yourself to injuries from the moving blade and flying debris from the tiles.
You can also use a pair of earplugs, as tile cutting generally produces a lot of noise, irrespective of the material. And now that the preparation is over, it’s time to get down to business!
Step 1
Start by securing the ceramic or porcelain tile to the work surface using clamps so that it doesn’t move through the cutting process. Dedicate adequate time to this step; otherwise, you will invariably risk injuring yourself, damaging the workspace, and messing up the cut itself.
Step 2
Once you’re sure that the tile is properly secured on the work surface, draw an outline of the cut on the tile. And if you haven't measured the area where the tile is to be set, this is the time to do it, as you need to cut the tile according to that measurement.
Depending on your needs, the cut outline can be of any shape, but always ensure that its perimeter is protected with mask tape to prevent chipping from the edges.
Step 3
Begin cutting the tile by holding the grinder at an angle most suitable for the cut. Straight cuts are better achieved by keeping the blade straight while making curves will require you to hold the tool at an angle. In fact, an angle grinder can perform better than a wet saw when it comes to angled cuts.
Keeping the blade vertically along the marked area will help you cut directly into the surface of the tile. On the other hand, a horizontal blade movement that’s kept flush with the outline facilitates making rounded cuts with better precision. In hindsight, you shape the tile by cutting away smaller bits at one go rather than cutting into the surface directly.
Similarly, the pressure applied for the cut will largely depend on the thickness of the material. Thicker materials will obviously need more pressure, which is not the case with thinner materials.
We’d suggest starting with moderate pressure, as you can increase it gradually. Too much force from the get-go can mess up the cut, and you won’t get the chance to rectify it.
Continue cutting until the tile has the desired shape and size.
Angle Grinder Disc For Tiles Conclusion
So, which is the best angle grinder blade for cutting tiles?
Well, the answer to that will depend on the type of tile you're working with. And if you’re still unsure, refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the blades.
With that, it’s time for us to say goodbye, but not without a final pro tip: some tiles are prone to chipping and breakage from the vibration of the blade. So, use the angle grinder tools to tighten the blade properly, thereby minimizing the vibration.
If you want to know more about angle grinders, refer to our other read on ” See you again!
Isn’t a lush green turf just a sight to behold in rains and sunshine alike? Not only do these look and feel absolutely amazing, but these also contribute to the natural process of earth’s restoration by doing their bit at the “grass-root level.”
An elaborate St. Augustine grass lawn could undeniably give you one of the most beautiful turfs. It is very popular in Florida and the Gulf states for its ethereal bluish-green dense beauty!
But as turf breeders would know, growing a St. Augustine could be a daunting task, especially from grass seed.
And, if you’re on the lookout for substantial information on how to get the process of growing St. Augustine just right, then you, my friend, have stumbled upon just the ideal comprehensive read for the purpose!
Simply read on to know more on this subject!
Good St. Augustine Grass Seeds & How to Grow Them
Growing a St. Augustine’s lawn using sods
The St. Augustine’s grass lawn has a considerable tolerance to humidity and heat. The bluish-green blades develop quickly to form plush, dense turfs, and it’s adjustability to significantly saline soils, make it a perfect choice for coastal yards.
One of the easiest ways to get the process of growing a St. Augustine’s lawn done is to plant the plugs from the established turf.
The plugs are the rooted sod pieces, and when you plant them, they grow up to gradually fill in the spaces between them, giving you a full, luxuriant lawn.
Even though you can also buy St. Augustine’s sod, it will be a bit expensive than most other grass sods.
Planting a St. Augustine’s lawn from seeds
It can be considerably difficult to grow a St. Augustine’s lawn from seeds as it’s infamously bad at proliferating this way.
This is one of the primary reasons why we don’t get its seeds for sale that easily in the stores.
This is also why the St. Augustine’s sod farmers usually leave strips of the turf behind for a new St. Augustine’s to grow from instead of completely harvesting the previously.
However, some farmers who do breed and grow St. Augustine grasses for seed during their development and breeding cycles, do so by using “quantities of seed which is often selected and blended,” and planted in these exact quantities to procure a few other new
kinds of grass for different selections.
How to plant a St. Augustine’s lawn?
Estimate your lawn area
Measure the dimensions of your lawn and the kind of areas that you want to plant. Purchase as much sod as you would require to fill in that area. Getting a tray of around 18 plugs will be sufficient to cover an area of approximately 32 sq.ft.
Prepare the area for planting
Remove all old sods and weeds using a sod cutter, if you’re planning to regrow an existing lawn. Apply a “non-selective herbicide” for about 2 weeks before you plant, to kill all weeds and ensure no residual is left behind to harm the new saplings.
Apply fertilizer
Do treat the soil using a natural or organic fertilizer and use a biological restorative agent to nourish it back to health. Since St. Augustine’s requires considerably fertile soil to grow, it’s not a good idea to skip this step. This will also help the sod fill in faster.
Water the area
Make sure to thoroughly water the ground before planting, as it makes the soil more pliable and accommodating to the roots of the plug, providing immediate moisture to them. However, do remember that the water should soak in thoroughly and not stagnate on the surface.
Dig in
Start by digging the holes in a diagonal planting pattern, so that each group creates a diamond. Space these holes 12 inches apart from each other ( the holes across the center of each diamond should be 15 inches apart). Dig each hole a bit larger, but of the same depth as the plug’s root ball.
Plant the plugs
Push the plug firmly into the hole ensuring that it’s level with the surrounding ground. If you think that the holes are a bit deep, use a little fertile soil to fill in the extra space.
Continue watering
Water the plugs daily until you see them firmly rooted and gradually spreading. It usually takes about 7-14 days for the roots to settle. After this, water every week unless there’s sufficient rainfall to do away with manual watering.
Screen for critters and diseases
A newly planted and gradually establishing St. Augustine’s lawn can fall prey to pests bugs and plant diseases, which can affect both its roots and turf. If you notice mildew or any brown spot beginning to manifest, do contact your local extension agency for treatment options.
Where and when to plant the St. Augustine seeds?
The St. Augustine grass grows and proliferates best in warm springs and summers when temperatures are normally between 80-100 degrees Fahrenheit. It develops full colors at approximately 10 degrees lower than the temperature which discolors and fades Bermuda grass.
It can tolerate some shaded places during hotter summers but can develop thin and spindly turf in densely shaded regions.
The grass can be grown in most soil types as long as it has proper drainage facilities and is fertile. The pH range for growing the St. Augustine grass should preferably fall between 5.0 to 7.5, but at higher levels than that, it could develop a chlorotic appearance.
St. Augustine's has a tolerance for a salinity level of up to 6 mhos, unlike Bermuda grass which has only slight tolerance for high salinity.
If you’re planting the plugs or sods in the full sun, make sure to give it a minimum of 90 days “before your region’s first estimated fall frost” for the grass to develop. Since this grass develops rather quickly, it won’t be necessary to go over frequent checks and estimations.
Maintaining the lawn
When the new lawn begins to fill in, and the blades reach a “mowable” height, cut them with the mower. Make sure that the mower is set at 3-4 inches. Once the leaves start to turn bluish-green, water them regularly and add any organic lawn food every 6-8 weeks to feed the grass until they have filled in.
How to Grow Augustine's Grass Conclusion
So, this was all about how to grow a beautiful, flourishing St. Augustine’s grass lawn and maintain it thereafter.
Winter is fun till splitting logs for the fireplace makes your back cry for help!
That’s why a lot of homeowners have opted to buy a log splitter for regular residential use. But there’s one problem, most of them don’t come cheap. And if you’re a first-timer, it may be even more challenging to get the right model according to your needs.
So, what can you do? It’s rather simple-rent a log splitter! That way, you have first-hand experience without spending a lot of money. And if you don’t split logs regularly, that’s all the more reason to rent one. Once you’re comfortable with the operation, decide if you’d buy one.
On that note, we’ve listed down the top 13 places to rent a log splitter from. So, let’s begin!
Places To Rent A Log Splitter
Home Depot
Numero uno on our list is Home Depot. It boasts a professional-grade and well-stocked inventory that has a solution for almost all your equipment requirements, be it for indoor or outdoor use. We love the log splitter that’s powered by a Subaru EX27 engine and has a 14-seconds cycle time.
Just specify your location, and you will have the details regarding their nearby stores (from over 1,200 stores) and competitive prices. However, you may need to pay a deposit fee upfront. What’s more, you might also avail same day pickup. Home Depot offers its rental services to users above 18 years of age, so ensure that you carry a valid ID card to the store.
Rental HQ
Although not a rental service per se, Rental HQ is a director-based intuitive website connecting users to rental companies. In this case, you need to enter the equipment you’re looking for and the desired location, after which it will fetch information about nearby rental stores. Select the most convenient option from their exhaustive drop-down list.
Additionally, the website houses articles on various DIY projects, and how-to-use guides for first-time users. So, that’s a bonus!
Sunbelt Rentals
A South Carolina-based company, Sunbelt Rentals is a subsidiary of the Ashtead Group and America’s second-largest rental service. With more than 700 locations, it offers both pickup and delivery services.
We tried our hands on the 26-ton log splitter with 14 seconds cycle time that’s powered by a robust 270cc Honda GX engine. Besides, it has multiple noteworthy features like steel fenders and E to Z lift hinges.
Apart from log splitters, you will also find a host of other equipment for residential, DIY, commercial, and industrial purposes. They also have a 24x7 emergency delivery system consisting of vehicles, dispatchers, and mechanics, who are available on call. The three-decade-long years of operation are a testimony to their quality service.
Herc Rentals
Keeping client convenience in mind, Herc Rentals offers daily, weekly, and monthly rates for their log splitter. The website features a Barreto 920LS 25-inch log splitter that runs on an 8.7 hp gasoline engine. Beyond that, torsion axle suspension reduces bounce, enhances tracking, and improves the low-towing ability of the unit.
While the rubber bump stop shields the splitter during the transition from vertical to horizontal, the two-handed control system takes care of accessibility. And with the cushioned log cradle and spring-loaded cleaning wedge, safety is hardly an issue. It’s the ideal choice for landscaping or tree removal; just enter the location for specific price quotes.
United Rentals
If you’re looking for a hydraulic splitter fuelled by gas without spending a ton of money, then United Rentals will come to the rescue. The website houses a heavy-duty hydraulic splitter, and you can specify the period for which you need it. Not only that, but it also allows you to set the quantity.
That said, the price will depend on the location, and if its location is not serviceable, they advise you to get in touch with their customer service via call.
A Tool Shed Equipment Rentals
A Tool Shed Equipment has a 20-ton vertical log splitter that’s powered by a Honda 8.7hp GX270 engine and has a 20-second long cycle time. Moreover, you can rent the unit on an hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly basis without paying any sales charge. Depending on the location, prices usually start from $30 per hour and go up to $1,050 for a month.
You may also opt for an equipment protection plan that has separate charges. Plus, the monthly rates are levied for a minimum of 28 days or a maximum of 160 hours.
Koopman Lumber
Similar to Rental HQ, Koopman Lumber is a directory-based service that matches users with rental services for various locations across the country. They generally provide information about three main models, namely; the Cadet LS25, Cub Cadet LS27, and Oregon 22-Ton. Each of them is sturdy and offers plenty of power for regular residential wood splitting, be it for a fireplace or renovation purposes.
Simplex Equipment Rental
Simplex is a Quebec-based family business in operation since 1907. It provides a Wallenstein 24-inch gasoline-powered log splitter that has both horizontal and vertical orientation. Their web prices include daily, weekly, and monthly categories. Besides, a 7.9% waiver fee is applicable upon placing the order, and special weekend rates may be available on request.
Rent Equip
As we near the end of the list, Rent Equip finds a deserving mention. It has a 700-ton, 270cc Honda engine, and a hydraulic system-operated heavy-duty wood splitter with a 12-second cycle time. Unfortunately, we couldn’t find a lot of details about the rates, but you should be able to get them for at least 24 hours.
Handy Rents
True to its brand name, this rental service rents out equipment and full-line tools for your different needs. The log splitter on offer is again a 700-ton, 12-second cycle time, and 270cc Honda GX powered model. You can rent it on an hourly, weekly, or monthly basis, but you must have it for a minimum of 4 hours ($64). The monthly prices can reach up to $834.
An exciting thing about this site is the rental reward program, which gives you a 3% discount on every order. You can accumulate the points and use them within 6 months. Furthermore, new users are automatically enrolled in this program!
Battlefield Equipment Rentals
Despite being a Canada-based service, Battlefield Equipment Rentals provide its services in different parts of America. It comprises a directory that can be used to locate log splitter rental services in your location. Moreover, the prices depend on the location and period of use, be it daily, weekly, or monthly requirement.
Rental Village
The rental village offers pocket-friendly prices for those looking to rent log splitters for a few hours as the rate starts from about $45 per hour. However, for monthly requirements, the prices may shoot up to $1,080.
Complete Rent-Alls Orillia
Depending on how long you need to use it, this rental service provides a 20-ton log splitter that can be rented for a few hours, days, or weeks. The prices will mostly depend on the period of use.
For instance, those who plan to rent it for four hours may have to shell out about $45. Similarly, the daily rates hover around $60, and the weekend rates may have to pay up to $90.
Final Words
So, there you have it - our top 13 recommendations for renting a log splitter.
Interestingly, most of our suggested services don’t stop at log splitter renting. Not only do they offer a wide range of indoor and outdoor pools, but they may also provide tents, chairs, tables, etc., for outdoor events. So, go ahead and check them all!
With that, it's time for us to wrap up the guide. But before we do, allow us to stress two important factors. First, make it a point to carefully go through all the terms and conditions of use. The last thing you’d want is to pay extra money for any accidental damage.
Also, we’d suggest going for a service that has quick and responsive customer service. You never when you may run into problems during operation, so it’s better to have professional help easily accessible.
A snow blower should ideally start within the third pull of its starter rope. So, how can you troubleshoot it when it refuses to start? Let's find out.
There can be nothing worse than getting ready to clear snow only to hear the disappointing whirr of a snow blower refusing to start. Well, just like any machinery, a snow blower requires periodic maintenance to operate. If you haven't used it in a while, it may give trouble when you initially try to start it up.
First of all, there is no reason to panic. Gas-powered snow blowers require regular maintenance and may take some time to warm up. But if you simply cannot start it, it is time for some good old troubleshooting. We will tell you precisely how to do this in our guide.
Let's get started!
How To Troubleshoot A Snow Blower That Won't Start
Check All The Switches And Valves
The latest snow blowers have a plethora of switches and valves which need to be set in their correct positions. Of course, it can get very confusing for a first-time user to understand it all. This is why we recommend pulling out your owner's manual (or checking a copy of it online) and getting acquainted with the different parts.
Every machine will be different and might require different switches to be turned 'on' or 'off.' Some snow blowers might require you to set the throttle on 'high' and the choke on 'full' before you can turn the switch 'on.'
Your snow blower refusing to start can be as simple of an issue as not having all the switches in the correct positions.
Check The Fuel
Unless you experience snowfall throughout the year, it is likely that your snow blower will be sitting idle for several months at a stretch every year. More often than not, this causes the fuel to become old and gummy. Old fuel can also cause issues with the carburetor.
To fix this, you need to siphon out all the old fuel from the tank using a small siphon pump. You may clean the tank if you wish to, but it is not always necessary to do this. Drain the old fuel and replace it with new fuel to get your snow blower started once again.
Sometimes, there is too little fuel in the tank for the machine to run. If this is the case, you can top off the tank with the additional fuel it requires and start the engine.
Add Fuel Stabilizer
The next thing you should do is add a fuel stabilizer to your tank. Essentially, this helps the fuel stay fresh and prevents it from becoming gummy and sticking to the carburetor. Moreover, the old fuel you drained out may have sticky residue that is clinging on to the carburetor and making it difficult to start the machine.
Adding a fuel stabilizer dissolves this sticky fuel by liquefying the residue. Pull the starter cord repeatedly to enable the stabilizer to spread through the fuel tank. If you see that the snow blower is still reluctant to start, you can try waiting for an hour or two before trying again. This additional time will allow the stabilizer to dissolve more gummy fuel and enable the machine to start.
Prime The Engine
Gas-powered engines can be troublesome during cold weather. Not only do you need to maintain the machinery properly, but you also need to use the choke and throttle appropriately in order to get the fuel running without flooding the engine.
To prime, the engine, press the flexible primer bulb (a small silicone bulb located near the carburetor) about three to four times. Doing this forces a small amount of fuel into the carburetor. This enables the engine to ignite more quickly, especially if it has not been running for a few months.
That being said, priming the engine during the winter may cause it to flood. To prevent this, put your choke on 'full' and put the throttle at ¾ speed (or higher). You may need to do this a couple of times for the engine to ignite finally.
Spark Plugs
The next thing that the engine requires is a spark. Without this, the engine cannot ignite. It is possible that you may need to clean or completely replace the spark plugs.
Using a socket wrench and spark plug socket, carefully remove the plugs from their place. Inspect the porcelain surface and look for any cracks or damages. If there are none, continue to clean the spark plugs and put them back in their proper place. However, if you notice cracks or damage, you may need to replace the plugs entirely.
Using a carburetor cleaner and a thin wire brush, clean up any built-up carbon deposit from the ends of the spark plugs. After drying the plugs thoroughly, place them back in their original positions.
The Fuel Line
Next up, you need to scrutinize the fuel line. This is a flexible and pliable line that runs from the carburetor to the gas tank. However, over time these fuel lines can harden and cause fuel to leak. This leak can prevent fuel from reaching the carburetor.
Check the fuel line carefully for cracks, kinks, or if it has hardened. If you notice any of these signs, it may be time to replace the fuel line with a new one.
Clean The Carburetor
It may so happen that you have followed all of the steps above, and your snow blower still refuses to start. In this case, you may need to take a more aggressive approach.
The carburetor is located under the air filter, so in order to access it, you will have to first remove the air filter cover, the air filter, and then have access to the carburetor itself. This piece of machinery has a vital job - it combines fuel and air in a very precise ratio for efficient combustion.
So obviously, if the carburetor is clogged, it cannot function efficiently. In order to clean the carburetor, you can use a carb cleaner (a solvent that typically comes in an aerosol spray can with a straw attached to its nozzle). This handy spray can deliver a high-pressure shot of spray that efficiently dissolves any gunk attached to the carburetor.
Next, spray this solvent in the air-intake valve as well. This is a cylindrical valve connected to the carburetor. Once you've completed these steps, replace the air filter and air filter cover, and try to start the snow blower again.
If The Engine Starts But Continually Stops
Great, so you got the engine running, and you can finally start using the snow blower. But next thing you know, the engine keeps stalling or turning off. What does this mean?
Well, it could be something as simple as a carburetor issue. With continual use, the carburetor collects some amount of dust, grime, oils, and other residues that can choke air as well as fuel flow. As we mentioned in our previous step, you can clean the carburetor thoroughly, and your machine should run smoothly.
However, if this still doesn't work, you likely need to replace the old carburetor with a new one. Fortunately, this piece of machinery is relatively inexpensive and not too much of a hassle to replace!
We should mention that checking the fuel cap vent is another important step that many people often forget. The air that enters the tank makes up for all the fuel that is being continually used. However, if the vent is clogged with residue or grime, it can cause issues with starting.
To check this, try running the snow blower with a slightly loosened fuel cap vent. If you notice issues with the air vent, you may need to replace it with a new vent cap.
Call A Professional
If all else fails, we recommend calling a professional for the job. The snow blower may likely need to be completely disassembled and checked thoroughly, which is a job best done by an expert.
If your snow blower is still under its warranty period, you can get it repaired for free. Otherwise, you can visit any engine repair shop and get the machine looked into by a professional.
Conclusion
As you have probably realized from our guide, a reluctant snow blower isn't a reason to instantly shell out money for a new one.
More often than not, simple troubleshooting can help you fix the machine in no time. Of course, if you are unable to do it yourself, you can ask a professional to look into the matter. It is important to remember that most gas-powered snow blowers require regular maintenance.
If you use your snow blower just once in a few months, the reason for it not starting is relatively simple and easy to fix. We hope our guide helped you in understanding the simple mechanism of troubleshooting a snow blower.
There’s no dearth of different tankless water heaters in the market. But that’s where the problem lies!
Choosing a model from a wide range of options, which ensures the endless flow of hot water to your home, may seem simple but isn’t. This is because hot water demands differ from one household to another.
That said, we understand that selecting a model that best meets your requirements can be a daunting and time-consuming task. Several factors need to be considered before the installation process - size being the most crucial.
We’ve carefully created this comprehensive guide to help you find a suitable tankless water heater. Through this article, we’ll be addressing a critical question - “what size tankless water heater do I need?” Furthermore, you can go through our FAQs and examples provided in each section to gain all the relevant information on the topic.
So, without further ado, let’s get going!
Guide To The Ideal Size Of A Tankless Water Heater
When you want to choose a water heater for your home, it’s important to consider its size before going ahead with your purchase. Ideally, traditional water heaters can be selected based on the size of your family, but determining the size of a tankless model isn’t that simple.
Factors such as GPM or flow rate, and types of fixtures come into play while selecting a unit that supplies the required amount of hot water to your home. That being said...
In this section, we’ll be taking you through an in-depth guide to help you find the tankless water heater that’s perfect for your home. We’ve explained a few crucial points and calculations that need to be considered during the selection process. So, let’s dive right in, shall we?
The Size Of Your House
With tankless water heaters varying in sizes, choosing a model that meets your requirements should be a priority. Although almost all modern units can easily steam the entire water supply of your home irrespective of its size, opting for a smaller model can be inefficient if you own a big house with more than one bathroom.
It may only allow you to heat water flowing into specific bathrooms in your home. This is why it’s crucial to consider the size of your house and determine the output required to fill all your spa and shower rooms.
Calculating The Water Flow or GPM
Unlike regular water heaters, tankless models steam water as it runs into your home. In other words, the flow rate offered by your water heater helps in determining the water output of your taps.
This is why you need to consider the GPM of the appliance to make sure it allows you to run more than one tap or shower simultaneously with the same flow rate. There’s a simple calculation that can help you determine the maximum required GPM for the tankless water heater.
All you need to do is add up the flow rates of each water fixture in your home that supports the flow of hot water. You can refer to user manuals to find the specific values of the individual fixtures or simply search their model numbers online.
Don’t have the original paperwork or model number? Well, there’s no need to worry; you can use generic GPM numbers depending on the water fixture type. Estimate charts are readily available on the internet for you to find the required information. However, you can also consider the following list of flow rates:
(a) Bathroom faucet: 0.5 GPM - 1.0 GPM
(b) Dishwasher:1.5 GPM - 2.5 GPM
(c) Showerhead: 1.5 GPM - 2.0 GPM
(d) Laundry washer: 2.5 GPM - 3.5 GPM
(e) Kitchen faucet: 2.0 GPM - 6.0 GPM
Now, we come to the basic formula to help calculate the GPM for your water heater:
Required GPM = Sum of all the flow rates for individual hot water fixtures which run simultaneously
Consider the following example for a better understanding - suppose two showers with the usual water flow rate of 1.8 gallons per minute each run at the same time. You can calculate the required tankless water heater GPM by adding the rate of both fixtures, i.e.
Now that you’re done calculating the required flow rate, it’s time you determined the amount of heat your heater needs to generate to sufficiently warm water.
For this, you’ll need to calculate the temperature rise; rather, the amount of heat needed to increase the temperature of groundwater to the desired level. It’s therefore important to know the temperature of water flowing into your home, and that of the water you wish to obtain from your faucets or shower fixtures.
Finding your region’s groundwater temperature is easy provided you use a ground temperature map, offering temperature listings over broader areas or specific values for smaller areas. Once you know the groundwater temperature, simply follow the given formula to determine the required temperature rise.
Required temperature rise = desired water temperature - groundwater temperature
For example, let’s assume the preferred hot water temperature is 105 degrees F, while your home’s incoming groundwater temperature is 45 degrees F. So, the required temperature rise will be 60 degrees F.
To sum up, if your shower flows at a rate of 1.8 gallons per minute, your heater must be able to heat 1.8 gallons of water by 60-degree F every minute to deliver the desired hot water temperature.
Knowing The Power Source
Next up, you’ll need to consider the power source for your tankless water heater to determine the required size. Ideally, gas water heaters are less expensive and more powerful than their electric counterparts as they can easily heat 5 gallons of water up to 70 degrees F in a minute.
On the other hand, electric tankless heaters are more affordable and simple to install. They can only heat 2 gallons of water up to 70 degrees F within the same duration. Hence, they’re more suited for homes with higher incoming groundwater temperatures and smaller heating requirements.
Before going ahead with your purchase, consider the availability of the power source. Does your home have the power access for a gas or an electric water heater? Once you’re convinced with the price and power source of the unit, you may check out the features offered by the model.
The Size Of Your Household
Without a doubt, this is one of the most crucial factors to take note of before buying a tankless water heater for your home. It should be able to handle the hot water usage of individual faucets without compromising their flow rate.
The frequency and total volume of hot water consumption are dependent on the number of members in your family. It’s quite obvious that a family with four members will use more hot water than a couple living in a condo, even though they might not use heated water at all times.
However, you must also consider scenarios in which the water usage may peak, like when guests are over, or when you’re planning a wedding. And choose the size accordingly to avoid running out of water on such occasions.
This is why it’s important to add up the flow rate of each fixture. It will enable you to determine the maximum GPM required for the tankless water heater, depending on the simultaneous activities of the different users and members of the family.
Let’s take a look at a few examples to help you understand the concept better.
(a) What Size Tankless Water Heater Will A Couple Need?
A couple living in a condo will obviously have a single bathroom and no on-site dishwasher or laundry. Hence, the hot water requirements and usage would be substantially lower than larger families with four to five members.
Suppose after adding up the flow rates of their individual water fixtures; the maximum required water heater flow rate is just 5 GPM. To raise the temperature from the average 68 degrees F to the desired 110 degrees F, the couple will need a water heater capable of heating 5 gallons of water by 42 degrees F per minute.
(b) What Size Tankless Water Heater Will A Family Of Four Need?
A family of four will have to consider how many people at their average-sized home might run hot water at the same time. Let’s assume the family might have to run a dishwasher (2 GPM), kitchen faucet (3 GPM), and up to two showers (1.5 GPM each) simultaneously.
Considering all the appliances run efficiently, the maximum required water heater flow rate would be 8 GPM. And if they’re living in Hawaii, for all that matters, they might need a heater capable of raising the average groundwater temperature of 77 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
In other words, the family of four will require a tankless water heater capable of heating 8 gallons of water by 43 degrees F in a minute.
(c) What Size Tankless Water Heater Will A Family Of Five Need?
A family of five can always opt for a gas tankless water heater as it’s not only cost-effective, but it’s also powerful enough to fulfill their hot water requirements.
That said, consider five of them living in a home with the same appliances as our previous example. To this list, we’ll add an extra bathroom with an additional 1.5 GPM bathroom faucet. It’s quite obvious that they would be running two showers at the same time, along with a dishwasher and washing machine.
Adding the individual flow rates of each fixture, the maximum required water heater flow rate reaches 9.5 GPM approximately. Now, assuming their home is located in Oklahoma, we’ll take the average groundwater temperature as 57 degrees F.
With the family preferring their hot water output to be 120 degrees F, they’ll need a water heater capable of heating 9.5 gallons of water by 63 degrees F per minute.
FAQs Related To Tankless Water Heater Size
Can a tankless water heater fill your tub?
A smaller tankless water heater will take longer to fill a large tub, so if you want to get it done within no time, opt for a unit with a substantially higher flow rate.
Can a tankless water heater be too big for a family?
There’s nothing as too big when it comes to tankless water heaters. Opting for a unit with a capacity smaller than what’s required will not provide sufficient hot water to meet your requirements. You’ll eventually run out of hot water.
On the other hand, you may consider going for a water heater with a larger capacity than required, provided you don’t mind overpaying. This is why proper sizing is crucial before making a purchase.
Final Words
Tankless water heaters are designed to save more space compared to traditional geysers. That’s not all; an efficient model can help readily supply hot water to your household without compromising the water flow rates of your individual faucets and fixtures.
However, to ensure this, you’ll need to choose a water heater size depending on your household size and overall water usage. Simply follow the two primary steps - firstly, calculate the maximum required flow rate of the unit. And secondly, find the temperature rise based on the desired output and incoming groundwater temperature.
Once you’ve determined your requirement, all that’s left to do is select a suitable power source. With this, we now come to the end of our informative and comprehensive guide.
Here’s hoping you were able to gain the required insight on the topic. On that note, we’ll take your leave.
The length of a water volleyball court should range from three to six meters and two to five meters in width. As for the net, it should run across the width while being centered along the length to provide players with an equal amount of court.
When planning to create a water volleyball court, volleyball pool nets, and mounting hardware are usually the first things people think about.
But they often forget one of the most important things– deciding on the size of the swimming pool. Determining the ideal pool size depends upon several factors, such as the number of players and the size of teams.
And the pool size, in turn, will determine the size of the volleyball net.
The Optimal Size For A Volleyball Pool
A volleyball pool should be at least three meters long but can go up to six meters. Additionally, it should be at least two meters to a maximum of five meters wide. While these are the standard dimensions, some players, especially new ones, may find it challenging to play in larger pools. In such cases, it is better to go with a smaller size pool with a smaller net.
Now, you must be wondering how to build a pool volleyball net- right?This can be done using PVC pipes and bungee cords or straps, which should run across the breadth of the pool and be centered along its length.
Most pools have shallow and deep ends, and placing the net close to the deep end will make the game fun and exciting. It will ensure that both sides have an equal amount of space to play in.
Tip
While volleyball courts on lakes are built with standard dimensions, residential ones can be built according to custom specifications. Therefore, it’s wise to seek advice from a professional player for the best results.
The Difference Between Pool Volleyball And Other Types Of Volleyball
Several differences exist between pool volleyball and other types of volleyball. For instance, indoor volleyball requires a heavy ball that can move faster in a larger space. On the contrary, the ball used in pool volleyball must be large, waterproof, and tear-resistant.
Another key difference is that the court size is smaller in the case of water volleyball compared to other types of volleyball. The reason is that it is quite difficult to run in a pool compared to running in an indoor court.
What Size Pool for Volleyball Final Thoughts
With that, this guide explaining what size pool for volleyball is best has come to an end. Generally, you can purchase pool volleyball kits according to the size of your pool, but in some cases, you may have to take the DIY route.
You can also have an electric awning constructed over your volleyball pool, but make sure to check how to manually retract electric awning before doing so. Also, take proper measurements and use the highest-quality materials.
That’s all for today. Until next time!
Choosing the correct type of humidifier for your house can bring a drastic improvement in air quality.
There are different sizes of humidifiers available that are suited to cover a certain square footage. Matching a suitable model with its corresponding square feet is vital to get the most benefits out of it.
While there are whole-house humidifiers available, using one unit for a single room has its own benefits as well. Saving on power consumption and controlling which rooms are ventilated - just to name a few.
With so many considerations and factors that affect the efficiency of a humidifier, what is the best size for your home? We will go over this and a few quality models to choose from in our comprehensive guide.
Without further ado, let us get into it!
What Size Humidifiers Do I Need?
Humidifiers - Mist Temperature
Humidifiers are available in two options of what temperature mist they release. You can go with either a cool mist or a warm mist humidifier.
Going with either temperature variant has its own unique benefits to add moisture back into the air. After all, regulating the moisture output and humidity of a space can help cut down on respiratory allergens.
A. Cool Mist Humidifier
Cool mist humidifiers are used widely for their coverage and health benefits. In homes with young children and pets, the cool mist given off by the humidifier can limit the number of fire hazards in a room.
Additionally, cold mist humidifiers are versatile in that they purify the air besides maintaining the humidity level of a space. The number of square feet that a cool-mist humidifier covers are more than that of its warm mist counterpart.
In essence, a cool-mist humidifier is a two-in-one unit that does it all with more energy efficiency than a warm mist model. It does this by turning the warm air cold with the cool mist droplets.
However, they come at a higher price tag as compared to a warm mist model. Additionally, the cool mist generated requires an internal fan to maintain the temperature as the mist is released. As such, the noise levels can be high when working in higher settings.
It is a great investment if a cool temperature and additional health and safety benefits are what you are looking for.
Types of Cool Mist Humidifiers
There are two types of cool mist humidifiers available - classified depending on the method of distribution of the water particles into the air. These come in either an evaporative or an ultrasonic unit.
In evaporative cool mist humidifiers there is a wick filter within the unit that absorbs the water from the tank. This water is then evaporated and spread throughout the room by a fan blowing air through this wick filter. The resulting output is a fine cool mist spread throughout the room
The second cool mist humidifier type is known as an ultrasonic humidifier. These units use ultrasonic vibrations to generate the ultra-fine mist. What's more, they are usually quieter in operation as compared to the evaporative models.
Features Of A Cool Mist Humidifier
Using a cool mist humidifier can bring about a change in the air quality and temperature in the room. As the unit does not require any heating, there is a considerably lower power draw, saving you a bit on the electric bill.
Additionally, these models are safe for use around children and pets as there are no potential accidents due to hot water. The cool mist adds a refreshing feeling to any room's humidity levels.
Using a cool mist humidifier does have a few drawbacks such as the higher noise level. Furthermore, the colder mist can make a room feel slightly colder. If you live in cold climates, you may want to reconsider before spreading cold moisture throughout your rooms.
B. Warm Mist Humidifier
Warm mist humidifiers are widely used as they are able to remove bacteria by heating up the water in the tank. Before the steam and warm mist are released into the air, mold spores and bacteria are killed off.
As the mist has been heated, it is able to have a higher concentration in the air. This can be especially beneficial in acting as a heating element in colder rooms.
What's more, warm mist humidifiers ensure minimal noise levels during operation. And the internal fan that is necessary for the cool mist model is not required in this humidifier.
Features Of A Warm Mist Humidifier
Using a humidifier that utilizes warm mist to regulate humidity levels in a room can bring additional health benefits. By heating up the water to a boiling point within the tank, any bacteria and mold is killed off right away.
Furthermore, the warm mist humidifier works silently as there is no internal fans required for its operation. This makes using them in areas where noise is a factor such as nurseries and offices more plausible.
However, warm mist types of humidifiers are not as efficient in terms of their coverage. The warm mist takes time to travel and is limited to the immediate area around the humidifier. As the mist is evaporative, by the time the droplets travel away from the system, they have cooled down and dissipated.
What's more, the price of buying one of these machines tends to be more than the cool mist counterpart. Although, it is beneficial in doubling as a heating element and potentially save some energy spent on heating.
What Is The Ideal Humidifier Size?
If an air humidifier is not a centralized unit, it is typically portable to some extent. These smaller-sized units are used to control the humidity level of a single room at a time.
Classifying the types of humidifiers according to their size can be done based on their water tank size, how many square feet they cover, and their water output.
A. Small Size Humidifier
On one end of the spectrum, there are small 1/4-liter humidifiers that can be powered with a USB cord. These models are not as effective as a larger-sized model.
When it comes to efficiency and effectiveness of these types of humidifiers, they are more suited for smaller rooms and areas. The moisture output is not sufficient to have an effect on the overall humidity of a room.
Due to their compact design and limited effective area, they are ideal for use in cars and small office spaces. In fact, controlling the humidity is much easier when the area to be covered is small.
B. Large Size Humidifier
On the other side, we have large industrial models that are heavy-duty performers—effectively covering more square feet along with more moisture output.
These humidifiers are capable of covering 3,600 square feet, so regardless of the room size, they will be sure to maintain the humidity level in the air easily. With such extensive coverage, these large models can be essentially used as whole-house humidifiers.
Larger humidifiers typically have a larger water reservoir to store the gallons of water needed for the steam and mist. On average, they can store up to six gallons of water while having an output of 12 gallons. It is easy to see how quickly dry air becomes hydrated and healthier to breathe.
When choosing an air humidifier model, keep in mind the quoted capacity on the packaging refers to the tank capacity, not the moisture output. On average, the volume of moisture output is more than that of the water tank. And a larger water tank volume will benefit in cutting down on frequent refills.
However, a large-size humidifier should be used only in rooms that are capable of taking full advantage of its coverage. A misplaced large humidifier in a small room size can cause mold and bacteria to form. Moreover, the humidity level will saturate the entire room to the point of excess, compromising the safety of your respiratory system.
Taking proper measurements of the square footage of a room is essential to match it with a compatible humidifier size. The relative humidity given off by a compatible unit can determine how beneficial it is in improving air quality in the room.
A safe choice of an adequately sized humidifier is one that can cover 700 square feet. These models are able to cover most bedrooms and a living room easily without compromising on safety. However, to guarantee a large-sized humidifier is the right choice for you, it is recommended to use one only in rooms with an open layout.
A quiet humidifier from Honeywell, this model can gently release cool moisture back into the air. It has an incredibly easy refill design from either the top of the humidifier or by removing the tank entirely and refilling at a faucet. By being able to remove the tank, maintenance is also an easy process with this model.
There are no filters involved in this cool mist humidifier, so you won't have to buy a replacement filter eventually. Instead, a nebulizer is vibrated at an ultrasonic frequency then released by a directional mist outlet. Using this unit can cut down on dry air and dust that can irritate the respiratory system.
Pros
1.25-gallon tank capacity can be used for 36 hours
Everlasting Comfort has an ultrasonic humidifier that is rated to humidify rooms up to 500 square feet. With such a wide operation range, it can be easily used in almost any room of the house. What makes it unique is the essential oil tray that spreads a fresh aroma throughout the entire room.
Additionally, this humidifier has a filter-less design, saving you on further costs to replace the filter. Although this is a cool mist model, it operates silently thanks to the ultrasonic technology to dissipate the mist.
Perfect for colder climates, this humidifier doubles as a diffuser for essential oils and can relieve symptoms like dry skin. With a smart connectivity feature, the humidity in a room can be regulated easily.
This model is perfect for nurseries as the noise levels while in operation are minimal. Additionally, there is a sleep mode to keep the control lighting off or dimmed.
Pros
Automatic shut off when empty
1.05 gallon tank can run for 40 hours
360-degree nozzle for full coverage
Three mist control settings
Cons
Bottom refill design can be challenging to access tank
Why Purchase A Humidifier?
Placing a humidifier in rooms can not only control the humidity of the house, but save you from certain side effects of respiratory irritants. The mist that the system gives out is effective in cutting down on germs and white dust.
Taking into account all the benefits of a humidifier, there is not many things to consider. The benefits of using an air humidifier system outweighs any potential drawbacks.
Some common side effects due to dry air include sore throats, cracked lips, itchy skin and bloody noses. In some extreme cases it is possible to have respiratory ailments and an irritated sinus passage. All these side effects can be minimized or removed completely simply placing a humidifier in your rooms.
Beyond just personal health benefits, a humidifier can preserve the wooden elements in your house. Everything from furniture to the flooring and structural integrity will become more durable and less susceptible to damage. By putting moisture back into the air, the amount of damage due to drying out is minimized.
Additionally, plants can also benefit from having a humidifier in the same rooms they are in. The unit acts as a regulator to humidify the room and remove any dry air. As a result, white dust is kept to a minimum while the water level in the air is kept at an ideal level.
Conclusion
With the benefits of using a humidifier in your house, it is clear to see how this investment pays off in the long run.
Any of the three portable models listed above can function efficiently regardless of what room size you have. Placing humidifiers in each of your rooms can significantly cut down on white dust and improve air quality.
So, to sum up, investing in air humidifiers is worth the price tag they come with. Your house as well as your respiratory system will thank you, and be that much healthier.
You’ve finally revamped your room by adding that baseboard you had been eyeing for a while. But now you are faced with another predicament - finishing nails!
Finishing nails can make or break your baseboards as they are the primary determiners of durability and strength. Using the right nail is extremely crucial and this usually depends on the kind of project they are required for and the material of the baseboard itself.
Let’s give you some worst-case scenarios which could happen due to using the wrong size of finishing nails in your baseboard. The board could split open, or worse, you could end up penetrating an unknown pipe! We don’t want that, now, do we?
So, what we have done here is compiled an exhaustive guide for you, outlining some factors that you must keep in mind before making a selection.
Let’s get started, shall we?
Right Gauge Size
The important rule of thumb to remember is that, the larger the gauge number, the smaller the diameter of the nail it shoots. The largest nails are usually employed by finish nailers and these range between 15 to 16 gauges, which denote smaller nails. These are ideal for a smoother finish as they leave no space or holes, thus reducing the need for fillings.
Baseboards require nails with smaller diameters. Thick nails have chances of splitting the wood, while the longer ones may go right through surfaces and/or pipes, causing damage that’s difficult to repair.
Using the right gauge size also proves useful while painting the house. As part of your interior wall, baseboards are generally of the same color as your wall. So, in order to minimize sanding or putty to cover up spaces left behind, it is best to carefully consider the size of the finishing nail.
In the case of unpainted baseboards, we would advise you to sink the stained hole and then use putty. Not only does this offer a finish to the board but it also camouflages the nail. Thankfully, there is no chance of any structural inconvenience here, as baseboards simply have a decorative or protective function.
Long story short, the nail you use must be long enough to secure the baseboard firmly to the wall. That is the primary function of a finishing nail. The reason why we insist on the correct size is so that even the most minor damage can be averted. This brings us to the next factor that you must consider - the material.
Baseboard Material
This is quite the no-brainer. Baseboards come in a variety of construction materials as they cater to the decorative requirements of the house. Design aesthetics, therefore, are influential in deciding the material of the baseboard.
This, in turn, becomes important while choosing finishing nails for the board. Nailers shoot in the nails with considerable force and being strong and sharp themselves, the nails can potentially cause immense damage. This is why the right size and material go hand-in-hand while it comes to selecting the ideal finishing nail.
In addition to that, it is important to take into account the climatic conditions of your location. A large variety of wood tends to shrink or expand, depending on the temperature and humidity. This inadvertently has an impact on what kind and size of finishing nail is then suitable for use on that particular baseboard.
To avoid this, we recommend that you leave the baseboards inside your house for 24 to 48 hours before nailing them in. By then, they will have grown accustomed to the temperature conditions indoors.
Using a Punch
This is a very specific but essential part of the trimming process where the baseboard has not been painted. In that case, as we mentioned above, it would be advisable to first sink the hole and then use putty or filling. Now, while there are other ways of doing this, we would suggest using a punch in order to prevent the slightest damage.
Punches are widely available in the market at any hardware or machinery store. Not only do punches ensure that the nails are driven smoothly through the boards, but the sharp tips on the top of the punches also make the process much easier.
8d finish nails are simply a type of finish nails, where the ‘d’ stands for ‘penny’. This is an indicator of the length of the nail according to a system that dates back to the time of the Romans!
The strength of the nail depends on its length and diameter. If it is of the precise length, then there will be no problem in driving the nail far enough into the wood in order to secure it.
The diameter determines the strength as well, in the sense that it directly affects the quantity of wood fibers that come in contact with the nail. A wider nail has the capacity to bear a larger quantity of wood fibers, which results in a stronger link.
Conclusion
We hope we have been able to guide you adequately regarding the right nail size for baseboards. Gauge size and material are the two key points while using a punch and bearing in mind the temperature conditions also result in a smoother experience. So go ahead, and install that baseboard.
A 4.5-inch angle grinder is best suited for small-scale projects and tasks that don't require any extensive cutting or grinding. On the contrary, 7-inch grinders are versatile enough for a wide range of professional projects.
Angle grinders come in all shapes and sizes but choosing the best angle grinder for the task can be tricky.
In fact, choosing the right angle grinder for the task doesn’t solely depend on the size since other features play an important role as well. For instance, a power tool like an angle grinder should offer safety features to keep the person safe from unwanted accidents.
So, without further ado, let’s proceed!
Angle Grinder Sizes - Full Guide
When it comes to angle grinders, different brands produce them in different sizes, which makes it hard to choose the right model for the task. However, each size serves a unique purpose. As such, you can not use the same angle grinder for every task. Keeping this in mind, this section will highlight the different angle grinder sizes and their applications.
1. 4-inch Angle Grinder
Out of all the models, this is considered to be the smallest angle grinder a person can purchase. Although it is small in size, this unit still has plenty of features to offer the user. For instance, it usually comes with a 6 AMP motor, which is more than sufficient to take care of small and minor projects.
Apart from that, the motor can deliver a speed of 11,000 RPM without having any loading conditions. This makes it extremely efficient since you don’t have to wait for a long time to start the power tool. In addition, it only weighs around 3.7 lbs, making it extremely portable and lightweight. Ideally, we recommend using this unit for cutting thin pieces of metal and for small grinding tasks.
2. 4.5-Inch Angle Grinder
Just like the previous model we mentioned, a 4.5-inch angle grinder has similar specs. The motor delivers an average speed of 11,000 RPM while drawing an average of 120 Volts from the main power source.
On that note, this model even has similar applications in comparison to the 4-inch unit. Normally, these units are best suited for small jobs in workshops. Hobbyists can also purchase this angle grinder if they don’t have any extensive cutting to perform since this unit can only handle thin metal pieces.
3. 5-Inch Angle Grinder
Unlike the previous two units, this category of angle grinders usually has more powerful motors. The motors come between ranges of 9 AMP and 12 AMP. As such, they can deliver a maximum power of 1440 Watts. However, powerful motors are bulky and heavy, which makes it tough to carry these units everywhere.
Due to their compact sizes and power-efficient motor, these angle grinders are best suited for DIY projects and small-scale projects.
4. 6-Inch Angle Grinder
A 6-inch angle grinder falls under the middle-sized angle grinder category. It usually delivers higher power output since it uses motors that have a range of 10 to 13 AMP. And since it is heavy, the unit has a very low speed of 9000 to 10000 RPM.
Moreover, these angle grinders are rarely used since most people prefer to opt for a 7-inch model or the small ones to get the job done. You can still purchase this unit if you are looking for something powerful while being compact in size.
5. 7-Inch Angle Grinder
Amongst all the different size angle grinders, the 7-inch angle grinder is the most popular unit on the market. It comes with a powerful motor that ranges between 13 to 15 AMP. Thus, the motor is capable of delivering a power output of 1600 to 1800 Watts. Apart from that, it has an average speed of 6500 to 8000 RPM.
When it comes to application, this grinder can be used by a wide range of professionals. For instance, construction workers and metal operators can benefit a lot from using this unit since it can cut a wide range of metal and surfaces. Plus, it can be used for extensive grinding projects and activities.
6. 9-Inch Angle Grinder
Lastly, the 9-inch angle grinder is the largest angle grinder on the list. The specs include a 15 AMP motor which delivers a speed of 6500 RPM. In fact, some 9-inch units require a larger motor since they have a power requirement of 230 Volts.
This angle grinder is mostly popular amongst folks that prefer to work with thick metals. It is also ideal for heavy usages such as cutting concrete stones and thick metal pieces. Welders, contractors, and construction staff use this unit for their work.
What Size Angle Grinder Do I Need?
Now that we have talked about the different angle grinder sizes, we can determine which is the right angle grinder for your task. In general, the 4.5-inch and 7-inch angle grinders are capable of covering 99% of your daily activity. Therefore, you will not need another unit if you have these two powerful tools.
Nevertheless, the applications can differ from one person to another. Keeping this in mind, we have carefully mentioned a few guidelines you can follow while choosing the right angle grinder for the task.
Firstly, small tasks around the house can be completed by using a 4.5-inch angle grinder. You can also use this unit to cut various materials, such as concrete and metal surfaces. But you should avoid using it extensively since it can spoil the disc.
7-inch angle grinders are versatile power tools since they can be used for a wide range of projects. For instance, a 7-inch angle grinder is best suited for a home restoration project.
Finally, a 9-inch angle grinder is ideal for heavy-duty tasks and extensive cutting.
Key Factors To Consider While Buying Angle Grinders
Apart from choosing the right angle size, there are several other factors you should consider if you want to find the best angle grinder.
1. Disc Diameter and Disc Size
One of the most important components of the angle grinder is the disc. As such, an angle grinder with a large disc size is ideal for cutting all types of surfaces irrespective of thickness. Moreover, angle grinders with bigger disc diameters are usually considered powerful since they can handle extensive tasks easily.
Smaller discs usually rotate at a higher speed, but they are not capable of cutting through thick layers of metal. Thus, you should carefully select the disc size according to the type of project you are working on.
2. Wattage
Grinders with higher wattage are well-known for delivering high power output while cutting through tough materials such as thick steel. If you do plan to use the power tool for a long period, make sure to purchase a high-wattage unit.
3. Power Source
When it comes to power sources, angle grinders are available as corded models as well as cordless models.
A. Corded Angle Grinders
Corded angle grinders can generate more power at a consistent rate since they draw power directly from the main power outlet. However, they do have one major drawback, which is that they are limited to a confined physical location. As such, you will need a power cord to reach far places while working.
In addition, a corded model can also cause a tripping hazard if you are not careful while working.
B. Cordless Angle Grinders
Cordless grinders usually deliver less power in comparison to their corded counterparts, but they are ideal for portability purposes. Besides, a cordless angle grinder is dependent on the battery capacity, so a larger battery will provide it with a longer run time.
That said, a cordless angle grinder offers a hassle-free experience since the users can move wherever they want while using the tool.
4. Speed
When it comes to measuring the speed of an angle grinder, we usually measure it by the revolution it makes within a minute (RPM). Most units have a speed ranging between 5000 and 10000 RPM. However, you should keep in mind that these speeds are measured under the “no load” condition. This indicates that speed is calculated while it is running in mid-air without cutting any object.
Once you start using the device for cutting and grinding purposes, the speed reduces significantly. Thus, units with higher speeds are recommended if you want to complete the project faster.
Nowadays, most brands design variable-speed angle grinders that can easily adjust their own speed to serve different purposes. If you plan on working with different surfaces and projects, we recommend using a variable-speed angle grinder.
5. Hand Guard
Another important feature you must keep an eye on while buying an angle grinder is a reliable hand guard. While working with grinders, the chances of getting into an accident are very high. As such, hand guards become a crucial safety measure to keep hands safe.
This safety guard covers half of the disc, which helps to protect your hands while it prevents debris and spark from reaching your body. Apart from this, some models come with movable guards, which can easily be adjusted to provide better protection.
However, if you don’t tighten the guard properly, there is a chance of it falling off, which can trigger an accident. Thus, we highly recommend wearing safety glasses and gear to protect yourself from a serious injury.
6. Soft Start Or Slow Start
Whenever you start an angle grinder, there is a high chance of it recoiling due to the sudden surge of power. This can be risky at times since you can lose your balance while working, which can cause accidents. In fact, heavier and larger angle grinders have a higher tendency to recoil each time you start them.
To tackle this problem, brands use a soft-start or slow-start technology, which reduces the overall power output whenever you start the motor. This feature ensures that the motors don’t cause the angle grinder to recoil during the start-up. It also prevents injuries on the arms and wrists.
Safety Measures While Using An Angle Grinder
Working with an angle grinder is one of the most dangerous jobs since the chances of getting into an accident are very high. Nevertheless, you can reduce the chances of meeting with an accident if you follow these guidelines, which include:
1. Always Keep The Device Switched Off
Before plugging the angle grinder into the main power outlet, you should always make sure to turn it off. If the device is turned on before plugging it in, there is a high chance that it will recoil and injure you in the process.
2. Read The Manual Carefully
Unlike normal home appliances that are easy to set up and use, an angle grinder is a complicated device. As such, you should always read the instruction manual whenever you purchase a new unit. Doing so will help you understand the device better, and you become familiar with all the features.
Similarly, you should always refer to the instruction manual if the unit is malfunctioning or not working efficiently. Fixing the unit by yourself without any technical knowledge can cause accidents and ruin the device completely.
3. Use The Right Clothing And Safety Gear
Most accidents that take place while working with angle grinders are because of not wearing appropriate clothing and safety gear. Whenever you cut metal with an angle grinder, it produces sparks. If you wear cotton and nylon clothes, they can easily catch fire which can cause first-degree and second-degree burns and scars.
Similarly, you should wear the appropriate safety gear and dust mask since angle grinders produce a lot of debris and dust while cutting metal. In some instances, it can even cause harmful fumes, which can make you feel sick while working. Some units generate a lot of noise, so wearing ear defenders can prevent you from losing your hearing ability.
4. Always Stay Focused
Lastly, you should always stay focused while using an angle grinder, even if it offers various safety features. Sometimes accidents can occur no matter how safe the device is; however, you can reduce the chances by paying close attention to small details. Moreover, you should avoid any form of distraction while using these tools.
For instance, if you notice the motor is hot, you should immediately turn off the device. This will prevent it from overloading or getting damaged from extensive work.
Can You Use An Angle Grinder On Wood?
Most people have the common misconception that you can use an angle grinder on wood. However, this is a totally wrong belief since angle grinders are designed to polish and grind concrete, stone, and metal surfaces. As such, if you use them to cut wood, you can get into a serious accident.
Thus, we highly recommend not using an angle grinder for cutting wood since it is not a compatible device for the task. Moreover, you can damage the device while cutting the wood, and this can cost you a lot of money. If the device can’t be repaired, you might have to purchase a new model for a silly mistake.
Can You Use Angle Grinder To Buff Car?
Wondering if you can use an angle grinder to buff the car? Normally, we wouldn’t recommend using an angle grinder to buff the car since it rotates at high speeds and cannot be controlled easily. Moreover, if the angle grinder doesn’t have a dedicated soft switch, you should avoid using it to buff the car since it can cause a lot of damage.
Instead, we recommend using an angle grinder with a variable-speed adjustment feature. In this way, you will be able to adjust the speed to 3000 RPM, which is ideal for buffing cars. Models with soft-start are also recommended since it prevents injuries from recoils.
What Size Angle Grinder Conclusion
With that, we have reached the end of this informative guide. We genuinely hope you found this guide to be informative. When it comes to the construction business, construction workers need to take several factors into consideration while choosing the best angle grinder. Factors such as high speed, disc sizes, paddle switches, surface preparation, and many more can significantly influence the overall performance.
Before signing off, here are a few tips that can help you make a wise decision while choosing the right model.
Firstly, always examine the metal surface before choosing the angle grinder size. Thick pieces of metal will require larger angle grinders, while a small grinder is ideal for thin pieces of metal.
Apart from that, you can always opt for variable-speed grinders if you are planning to work with different surfaces and textures. Cordless angle grinders are more convenient if you don’t have a power source nearby.
Do you want to give your home a fresh new appearance? Then you can consider giving it a fresh new coat of paint.
Painting your home from time to time keeps it looking new. Although there are certain things that you need to keep in mind while undertaking a home painting project, which includes purchasing different paints for your walls and ceiling.
If you’re not a DIYer, you might feel confused with the above statement. The ceiling is just like the other walls in your house. So, what is the difference between regular and ceiling paint anyway?
Well, for starters, ceiling paint is thicker than wall paint, and its composition is slightly different. But there are more differences besides these, which is what we have addressed in this brief guide. So, if you are suddenly feeling curious about it, then allow us to satisfy that curiosity.
Let’s get going, then!
What Is Ceiling Paint?
When we were conducting our own research on this topic, one of the first questions that popped into our minds was this one. And that’s why we have discussed a little about ceiling paint first in this section. Once we are done, we can get to addressing the differences between the two paints.
If we were to answer the above question simply - ceiling paint is a special type of paint that is best suited for painting your ceiling. Well, obviously, the name makes that clear enough, so you could make it out on your own. But there’s more to it than just that; allow us to elaborate further.
Ceiling paint is a type of paint that is highly viscous and dense so that it doesn’t drip from the ceiling. Typically, ceiling paint is made from latex resins, which are responsible for its thickness and viscosity.
What’s more, it is designed to give your ceiling a flat paint sheen. Its texture and chemical composition can resist staining and discoloration when exposed to dirt, dust, or smoke. Furthermore, it can resist stains and water patches caused by roof leaks. And as a bonus, a good quality ceiling pain will prevent the growth of mold and mildew.
On the flip side, you do not get too many ceiling paint color options. So, if you want to apply a fresh coat, then be advised - you’ll get only a handful of shades to choose from.
How Is Ceiling Paint Different From Regular Wall Paint?
Now that you know what ceiling paint is, it’s time to address the main question. In this regard, there are quite a few points of difference between the two paints, which have been described below.
1. Composition
There are some obvious differences between the composition of ceiling paint and wall paint or interior paint. For starters, ceiling paint is usually latex-based, while conventional wall paint is acrylic.
Ceiling paint uses water as a solvent, which gives it a dense texture, similar to latex resins. On the other hand, due to most wall paints being acrylic, they use different chemical solvents and thinners.
There are some instances where wall paints are water-based. But even in such cases, they do not have the density and texture of ceiling paint.
2. Viscosity
The most obvious point of difference between these two paints is their viscosities. Ceiling paint is highly viscous, while typical wall paint is thinner and less viscous in comparison.
This can be explained in light of the previous point of difference. Due to the water-based nature of ceiling paint, it is thicker, which, in turn, makes it more viscous. In contrast, the presence of thinning solvents makes regular wall paint more fluid.
Because of its high viscosity, it does not drip as much as wall paint. But, it is comparatively less elastic than wall paint, which means it does not contract or expand as easily.
3. Finish
If you have painted your home before, then you know that regular wall paints come in a variety of finishes. You have satin wall paint that has a subtle shiny finish. Then there is the eggshell finish, which is slightly less polished compared to the satin paint finish. It has an appearance that is similar to an eggshell, hence the name.
You also have semi-gloss paint that is comparatively shinier than satin paint. And if you want a higher gloss, you can opt for high gloss paints for your walls, which will give them a shiny finish. Or, simply go with matte finish paint if you don’t prefer shiny walls.
On the contrary, ceiling paints are only available in a flat finish. If you are wondering why that is, then the answer is simple. Flat paints are non-reflective, which helps them conceal stains and imperfections better. Besides, the flat appearance of this paint helps minimize the reflection of natural light, as a reflective ceiling may be too bright to look at. It's important to note that while textured wall paints might offer minor acoustical benefits, ceiling paint does not provide such improvements. If sound reduction is a concern, you should consider exploring alternative soundproofing materials and strategies.
4. Durability
Ceiling paint can be considered to be durable, as it does not become stained or discolored as easily. And since it is thicker, it is less prone to flaking or chipping.
Wall paint is comparatively not as long-lasting, especially if it has a glossy finish. In fact, as the paint gets glossier, it becomes less durable. The polished surface of such paint is not so great at preventing stains and discolorations. And they are more prone to chip off from the walls.
5. Coverage
Ceiling paint has a considerably greater coverage than wall paint. Usually, when using ceiling paint, one coat is enough to give you a uniform color. However, with conventional wall paint, you need to apply two or three coats to get uniform coverage.
6. Color Choices
Another point of difference between these two paint types is the color choices. With wall paint, you get a relatively diverse selection of colors but the same cannot be said for ceiling paint. This paint generally is available in a flat white color, with some occasional lighter shades.
Can You Use Wall Paint On A Ceiling?
So, now you know what makes ceiling paint different from conventional wall paint. The question that now arises is - can you use regular wall paint for painting ceilings? The answer is yes, you can, but there are some limitations to it.
First off, you will have a lot of drip spots on your ceiling if you use wall paint on it. On top of that, the paint will spatter all over your room, which can create quite a mess. As a result, the cleanup after you are done will be a major headache.
However, there are ways by which you can manage these problems. If you use a paint sprayer instead of a brush or roller, there will be fewer drips. It will also eliminate the issue of paint splattering all over your room. But using a sprayer can be a lot slower and more inconsistent than a roller or a brush.
Conversely, you could minimize the mess by undertaking extensive prep work. Start by covering the whole room with a drop cloth to protect it from drips and spattering. Or, you could clear out the room by removing all of the furniture and fittings before starting the paint job.
On that note, the above steps will make the work significantly more inconvenient and time-consuming. So, it is simpler just to use ceiling paint instead.
Can You Use Ceiling Paint On Walls?
As a counter to the above question, you may now ask - can ceiling paint be used for painting walls? Simply put, you can definitely use ceiling paint on your walls. It might even be advantageous in some cases, thanks to the viscosity and thickness of ceiling paint.
Moreover, if you use it to paint walls, your paint job will be a lot less messy than using regular wall paint. That’s because you will have considerably fewer drip spots on your wall.
Also, it is far easier to fix noticeable drip spots with ceiling paint. All you have to do is roll over these drips once, and the thickness of the paint will take care of the rest.
However, there is one downside to using ceiling paint for your walls. You will not have a lot of color options to choose from. And due to its finish, all of your walls will have a flat sheen. So, if you are fine with that, then, by all means, go ahead and use it.
Otherwise, use ceiling paint as a primer to get most of its benefits without being limited to a few colors and finishes.
What Are The Best Scenarios To Use Ceiling Paint?
There are certain scenarios where using ceiling paint is more favorable than using wall paint. These include areas that are more vulnerable to dust and stains, such as basements, stairwells, and closets. Here’s where you can color both the ceiling and the walls with the same ceiling paint.
It can also be used when you want a uniform look for your entire room. In that case, your walls and ceiling will have the same sheen and coloration.
Can You Mix Ceiling Paint With Wall Paint?
There is no rule against mixing these two paints together. So, if you want to experiment a little bit, you can do so. But be advised - the resultant paint mixture might not be as consistent or uniform as its constituents.
For instance, if you mix glossy wall paint with flat ceiling paint, the paint that you get might have a peculiar finish. Moreover, the difference in composition of these two paints may not create a very stable mixture.
The best method to mix these two paints together is to apply them separately. You can use ceiling paint as an undercoat or a primer and apply a topcoat of wall paint as the finishing. This indirect method of mixing may give you better results than blending them both directly.
Is Flat White Paint The Same As Ceiling Paint?
Based on our previous discussions, you may think that ceiling paint is the same as flat white paint. However, that is not the case, as there are some obvious differences between them.
Yes, most ceiling paints are white, but that doesn’t apply to all of them. You do get a few color choices, even though they are pretty limited. Besides, flat white paint is not as viscous as ceiling paint, which is further proof that they are not the same.
That said, there are certain similarities between them. For starters, both of them have a flat appearance, and they are good at concealing or covering up stains and other imperfections. But those are the only similarities, and since they are not that significant, it is safe to say that these two paints are different.
Difference Between Ceiling Paint And Regular Paint Final Words
That’s all we have to say about the differences between ceiling paint and regular paint. While in some cases, they can be used interchangeably, for the most part, they are two distinctive types of paint.
So, keep these differences in mind the next time you want to paint your home. It will help you decide better on which paints to buy for your interior walls and your ceiling. And it will make the paint job a whole lot more convenient.
It is time for us to wrap up this guide. In the meantime, check out our other article on ceiling paint vs wall paint for more head on comparisons. We will be back with more informative guides in the future.
Until then, we bid you farewell!
If you are a DIY enthusiast, then the term “resin” should not seem like a foreign concept, considering how commonly it is used.
One of the main reasons it is used for DIY projects is that it is easy to mold and set. While it may look like plastic, it is actually much stronger. Additionally, with resin, it is easy to replicate stone or metal looks which are not possible with traditional plastic.
Resin is naturally occurring and can also be made synthetically. The best part is that most natural and synthetic versions aren’t that different in properties and benefits. So, if you are looking for more information on resin, this is the guide for you.
After careful research on all things resin, we have put together this guide to help you understand this compound a little better. Hopefully, it will clear things up for you.
Now, without further ado, let’s get into some details.
Resin - What Exactly Is It?
Let’s get technical for a second. Resin comes from a mix of unique chemical compounds and, as mentioned earlier, is naturally occurring. To use it for everyday projects, resin can be bought from the store in liquid form along with a hardener which turns it into a stronger (and often reusable) resin. Additionally, it can be modified or synthetically created for commercial use.
Some common examples of resin are amber, frankincense, and even hashish. Interestingly, resin is not just derived from plants but also insects. A prominent example of insect-derived resin is shellac.
Uses Through the Ages
The history of resin is quite fascinating, but we will not bore you with too many facts. However, you might find it pretty interesting to know that resins have been around for centuries.
As there were no synthetic resins for jewelry and art back in the day, everything came from nature. Amber was a very popular naturally occurring resin among many cultures as it could be used in beverages and as a kind of drug (similar to cannabis). In Greek culture, specifically, amber was seen as a source of electricity as rubbing it together produced an electric charge.
As you can tell, resins are not a thing of the modern world as they were discovered and used centuries before we existed. However, the modern world has allowed us to explore and even create resins.
Resin Types And Modern Usage
While there are multiple types of resin found and created, all of them can be divided into two categories - thermoset and thermoplastic. While the former is a type that sets once it is cured, the latter includes resins that can be remelted and reused.
In the current market, there are around 12 types of resin that are commonly used. These are made out of different chemical components and are used for varied reasons. Let's explore some of these reasons below.
1. Epoxy
Epoxy resin is quite common among DIY enthusiasts as it has excellent adhesion properties. Additionally, it is resistant to heat and chemicals, making it the perfect choice for coatings, lining, adhesives, and laminates. This type of resin is non-recyclable (thermoset) and, once cured, cannot be remelted for further use.
2. Silicone
The next popular type of resin with DIYers is silicone resin. This is a non-naturally occurring resin and is made by man as a better alternative to rubber. One of its best qualities is that it's flexible, resistant to water, and quite stable when put under extreme temperatures.
When used on any surface, it coats it properly and forms a hard shell over this. This is why it is a popular resin as laminates and coating and has the potential to make any surface more durable.
3. Polyurethane
Polyurethane resins, as the name suggests, are made with two different components. This makes it highly versatile and open to being combined with other resins. Furthermore, by combining it, it only becomes better as it can increase elasticity and adhesion. For this reason, it is mainly used as clothes liners, adhesives, and insulation.
4. Polyester
If you are looking for a low-cost resin with excellent properties, this is the one to use. Polyester resins are usually resistant to pretty much everything - heat, water, and chemicals. Since it is not as expensive as the others, it is pretty standard in multiple industries.
Apart from DIYers using it for decorating purposes, it is used commercially as well. Many construction companies and repair companies use it.
5. Acrylic
Unlike Epoxy resin, acrylic resin can be melted and reused even after it is cured. An added advantage is that acrylic resin can handle a lot of pressure and is UV resistant. For these reasons, it is ideal to be used as coatings, adhesives, and even for decorative purposes.
6. Polyamide
Another great reusable type of resin is Polyamide. Polyamide resins can be reused multiple times, and the best part is that it does not shed any of its defining properties. One of the advantages is that it is a high-density resin with excellent heat resistance.
It is also quite strong, meaning it does not damage easily. This makes it a strong choice during manufacturing tires and gears.
7. Polypropylene
Even the medical industry needs good quality resins, and this is where polypropylene resins come into the picture. Primarily used to make medical equipment, this type of resin is resistant to chemicals. Additionally, it has no color or taste and is free from BPA. Other than medical equipment, it is used to make toys, electricals, and coatings.
8. Polystyrene
Polystyrene resins, much like acrylics, are low cost and hence, quite popular for various purposes. Apart from affordability, it is highly resistant to acid and salts makes it even more appealing. Additionally, it is pretty flexible and is widely used for insulation and to use on dashboards.
9. Polyethylene
Another very common resin is polyethylene which is mass-produced everywhere. Because it is flexible and resistant to chemicals and moisture, many industries choose to use this type of resin. The most common use is packaging, so bags, films, and sheets are manufactured using this resin.
10. Phenolic
Phenolic is a type of non-reusable resin, just like Epoxy. One of the reasons it cannot be used more than once is because it sets permanently after being cured. Once set, it is resistant to heat and impact, making it ideal for heavy-duty work. It is also chemical and moisture resistant, making it suitable for cement work.
11. Alkyd
Alkyd resins have been in the market for many years as they have eye-catching properties. This type of resin has excellent resistance to chemicals as well as thermal and electrical properties. First made in the 1920s, this type of resin was widely popular as surface coatings. Now, it is still used in paint, but it can also be used for electrical insulation.
What’s The Big Deal About Resin?
Based on the previous section, it is evident that resin can be used for multiple reasons. It is evident that its properties appeal to everyone, causing them to try out different types of resins for commercial and personal use. Here are some of the reasons people turn towards resins:
Flexibility
One of the biggest reasons is that, despite density, it remains pretty flexible. This is why it can be used for multiple reasons like making jewelry, medical equipment, electrical components, coatings, etc. Moreover, even bigger furniture and trash bins can be made using resins since it can adapt to any situation.
Affordable Alternative
Procuring certain materials, especially metals when making jewelry, can be expensive. This is the main reason why people turn to resins, as it can replicate the look and feel of these metals without costing anyone a fortune.
And the same goes for other materials such as rocks, gemstones, or color glass. It is much easier to use resin since the production cost is low, and it can look like any material.
Low Maintenance
Apart from being low cost, it is also low maintenance. One of the most significant selling points of resin is that there is no need for regular maintenance (compared to precious stones and metals). Resin-based products are pretty durable and do not get stained quickly.
Moreover, most resins are water, heat, and impact resistant. Hence, the material can protect itself with little to no help.
Resin For 3D Printing And Casting
One of the more modern uses of resins is using it for 3D printing. Since all resins come from polymers, they react under UV light. Moreover, most resins are tough, flexible, and reusable, so changing their state and setting it can be effortless with suitable machines.
Another method of creation is casting. Used widely in the medical industry, resin casting is nothing but putting resin in a cast and letting it set in the shape of the cast. Once fully set, it will easily slip off the mold.
Resin FAQ’s
Are Resins As Strong As Wood?
This entirely depends on the resin and wood in question. In general, resin is known to be stronger since it is impact-resistant, making it much more durable. Thus, most DIYers tend to coat wooden projects with resin for added protection.
How Is Resin Different From Plastic?
Although it may seem like they are similar materials, resin and plastic are quite different - right from their chemical makeup. Moreover, since resins are derived mainly from plants, it is more natural than plastic.
To Sum It Up
That’s all, folks! We finally come to the end of this guide on resins and how they are used. We have tried to keep it simple to help you understand the world of resins better.
Before signing off, we want to reiterate that resin is quite versatile. It has been used through the ages for multiple purposes and is still used in almost every industry. The fact that it is lightweight, flexible, and affordable makes it quite appealing for commercial and personal use.
On that note, we shall sign off now. We will back with many more informative guides like this one.
In the world of digital painting and concept artwork, there are a lot of techniques and methods that can speed up your workflow while simultaneously providing you with outstanding results.
In practice, these tricks and techniques differentiate the medium from the traditional pen and paper counterpart.
Today, in this guide we are going to discuss a similar unique method that makes digital painting more productive and convenient, and it is called Photobashing.
So, let’s dive deeper into the subject and find out what you can do with it!
Photobashing is a unique technique in which you can use real images and 3D assets as a framework to create original artworks.
In short, an artist can use real assets and pictures that match with their concept and place them around in a canvas and use that as a base of their finished product.
Of course, this technique sounds a bit like cheating, similar to using butter paper for tracing, but this technique actually takes a good understanding of lighting and how you can realistically merge assets into a piece of work.
Creators usually use this technique to increase their workflow and make their artworks get a more realistic look.
More importantly, it can help them get and add many details that usually get neglected while working from scratch.
But we’ll discuss the feasibility of Photobashing and the particular use-case that fits Photobashing the best in the next section.
Why and When Do You Use Photobashing?
We have already discussed why most artists use Photobashing in their workflow. But we also need to understand when we should use it to avoid wasting our time trying to use this technique when it’s actually not necessary.
One of the most popular examples where artists like to use Photobashing is in concept artworks. For example, if you want to create a dystopian or alternate-universe picture of a real-life landscape, you’d prefer to use real scenery for reference.
Another great example is if you have to work with character design. Let’s say that you want to create a character and depending upon his/her attributes you want them to pose or look a certain way in the concept art.
In that case, you can simply use a stock model photo that looks similar to the way you have imagined and begin your work from there.
All and all, there are many ways you can use Photobashing to enhance your work but the ideal situation is where you can use most of the elements in the original picture or you can get the skeletal framework from somewhere else.
Photo Courtesy of Adam Wong
Wait, Isn’t It Photoshopping Rather Than Photobashing?
To be honest, there’s a grey thin line between the two techniques. In Photoshop, the artist usually alters the original image to a point where there’s no resemblance to the original picture.
But in Photobashing, you enhance the original image rather than change it beyond recognition.
As you might have already guessed it, this creates a grey area where one can’t decide upon the legitimacy of the artwork created through Photobashing.
And unfortunately, this is an ongoing debate in the community. Many established institutes and communities don’t even admit artworks that have a hint of Photobashing.
Many artists like to use software like Blender to create their own 3D assets and work on it after that to work around this argument.
But overall, that’s not for us to discuss. Even though, we personally believe that if it’s original, even if it is worked on other assets, then it’s legitimate.
What Should I Use to Photobash?
Some of you might have already guessed it, but the answer to this question is Photoshop. From our experience, there’s no better software to Photobash than Photoshop even though there’s a bit of a hefty fee attached with it.
The main reason for our choice is the sheer control the software gives you on your artwork. Photobashing needs you to do a lot of lighting and color manipulation to make it look seamless. And the tools that Photoshop provides, are splendid for the job.
Some of the tools that you should get a good grip of before you start Photobashing are brushes, clone brushes, layer manipulation, blending options and filters.
There are many more tools and honestly, we believe that no one can truly get done with photoshop in a countable number of sittings.
If you are not willing to shell up for the expensive price tag of Photoshop, there are other tools that can help you Photobash. The ones that come to our mind are GIMP and Krita.
Out of the two, we’d like to recommend Krita because it’s a lot easier to learn. It’s less complicated and the community is much more fleshed out to feed your niched puzzles.
There are some skills that you need to master to make sure you can do Photobashing with ease. These individual techniques are quite important in other types of work as well but the lack of them will severely defect your Photobashing skills.
1. Picking up the right images
Before you do anything, you need to get savvier with the world of stock images. You need to know of all the paid and free websites that can give you the most ideal images for working on your artworks.
The usefulness of a reserve is seriously subjective, so, we highly recommend you to talk with your friends and family members who work in the similar genre of digital painting and ask them where they collect their assets.
Some of our recommendations include Unsplash, Freepik, Pixabay, Pexels and even Pinterest.
Sites like Unsplash, Pixabay, and Pexels have more photographic images than digital artworks. One of the main reasons we love these sites is because of their free license system and the high-resolution images you can get there.
But you might have to settle for less than ideal images for your artwork because these sites are designed more for photographers than digital artists.
Freepik is an awesome website that has loads of free assets, images, and illustrations. Many of our professional designers love to pick up reference items from this website, so, we thought it deserves a spot here.
And don’t judge us for Pinterest. It has the potential to give you whatever you may dream but you just have to make sure that you can use it - it’s all about the license.
Of course, you can’t just put a border on the stock image and use it as your own. You need to process the image ideally to get the things you need.
This includes separating the individual elements and manipulating it, so that, you can work on it.
One of the most important tools that most beginners tend to overlook is the famous Pen tool of Photoshop. You need to get good with it!
Not only it will help you draw custom shapes better but it’s super important for selection, and if it hasn’t hit you already, being good with selection tool is crucial for isolating the elements perfectly.
Another tool we’d like you to get acquainted with before you start Photobashing is the Blending Options that you have on each layer.
There are a plethora of actions in that dialog box and you must get handy with almost all of them! The most important of those is the shadow tool.
The most unique and crucial feature of Photoshop is its extremely fleshed out layer system. The layer system is heaven-sent in photoshop and digital artists who have tried working on other software understand its importance.
In Photoshop, the layers can be easily manipulated and moved around. You can mess with the layer’s colors, masking properties, blending options, filters, black levels, etc.
To truly understand the creativity of Photobashing and execute it perfectly, you need to get used to manipulating layers in Photoshop. And yes, that does need you to master the shortcuts as well!
So, What Should I Do Now?
To be honest, this article can’t encompass the magnitude of exploration you need to do for Photobashing.
Apart from mastering the skills we have mentioned above, you’d have to venture on your own to find the right way to do Photobashing.
But don’t worry because there are loads of free tutorials and videos on YouTube that can teach you Photobashing.
We’d recommend you to pick up your own project and learn on YouTube how you can do that. That way you can learn in the most natural way and you’ll also learn fast.
Conclusion
With that, we are done with this piece.
We hope you found this article helpful and that it got you started with Photobashing.
Keeping a small bedroom clean and tidy isn’t easy. Right?
Well, in our opinion, it’s almost next to impossible. With no extra space for furniture or to store essential items, the compact area is bound to get cluttered and messy.
But this can be avoided. How? It’s really simple! Instead of cramping up your room with cupboards and cabinets, just opt for an ottoman bed. It will solve all your problems related to space and clutter within no time whatsoever, thanks to its built-in storage system and compact design.
Seeing its popularity and functionality, we decided to take you through an in-depth analysis of an ottoman bed. For this reason, we’ve come forward with this informative and comprehensive guide, where we address two primary questions to know whether it ticks all the right boxes.
Firstly, what is an ottoman bed? And secondly, how to use them?
So, without further ado, let’s get straight to the deets.
What Is An Ottoman Bed?
We’ll begin our informative guide by answering the most crucial question - “what exactly is an ottoman bed?” Well, it’s a bed that comes with a built-in hidden storage system beneath the mattress. You can access this storage space using the hydraulic lift system, which allows you to lift the top of the bed, either from the foot-end or side.
Unlike regular bed frames, ottoman beds have no empty space underneath them. Instead, their attractive bases feature seamless finishes to enhance the modern aesthetics of your room. What’s more? The built-in storage space helps in decluttering your compact bedroom.
Origin Of Ottoman Beds
Now that you’ve understood the basic concept and design of an ottoman bed, it makes sense to know more about its origin. That being said...
It’s interesting to note that the modern-day ottoman bed that’s available in a variety of styles has come a long way since its inception in Turkey. In fact, the term “ottoman” itself was derived from its place of origin - the Ottoman Empire. This was a ruling power founded during the thirteenth century.
By the end of the eighteenth century, the distinctive design of ottoman furniture comprising footstools, wooden chests, and beds became immensely popular. And since then, manufacturers have been customizing upholstery, finishes, colors, and storage spaces to create standout statement pieces to suit modern and traditional tastes.
Opening Of An Ottoman Bed
As mentioned earlier, ottoman beds utilize a gas hydraulic lift system, allowing you to easily open or close the top of the bed for accessing its built-in storage. In this section, we’ll be discussing the two primary opening mechanisms of this type of bed.
Foot-End Opening
The foot-end opening ottoman usually opens from the end of the bed’s base. That being said, there are two types of ottoman beds based on their foot-end opening mechanism.
Full Ottoman
A full ottoman is hinged from the headboard. So, when you open the storage space, it raises the foot of your mattress to the ceiling.
Half Ottoman
Unlike the previous type, a half ottoman is hinged in the middle of your bed, opening only halfway. You may install drawers in the unopened section to maximize storage in a room with a slanting ceiling.
Side-Opening
These Ottomans open from the side, instead of the foot-end of the bed, allowing you to access the entire storage space from one side. You may consider opting for these beds depending on the placement of the bed and the area around it.
How To Use An Ottoman Bed?
Just like any other bed, ottomans are constructed with lightweight frames and robust fittings to ensure maximum comfort and support to your body. But that’s not all it’s used for. There are a ton of benefits of an ottoman bed, provided you utilize its functions to the fullest.
In this section, we’ll be discussing how you should use an ottoman bed. So, without further delay, let’s get going!
A Comfortable & Supportive Bed
First things first, it’s imperative to use an ottoman bed how it’s intended to be used, i.e., as a comfortable and supportive bed. The frame itself plays a vital role in determining the overall comfort level, but like any other bed, an ottoman needs a mattress for the purpose.
You’ll need to consider certain factors while choosing the right mattress for your ottoman bed, such as the level of firmness, material, or if you want to go for latex or allergen-free variants. That said, it’s advisable to choose a lightweight option to make sure the gas hydraulic system works smoothly.
Traditional metal-sprung variants tend to be heavier, restricting the opening mechanism. But even then, if you’re set on going for this mattress, we’d suggest looking for a slightly thinner one.
For Decluttering Your Room
The built-in storage space of an ottoman bed plays a significant role in changing the appearance and feel of your bedroom. It gives you the opportunity of decluttering the room with minimal effort.
You can use the bed to keep all your essential items, including towels, beddings, and linens such as sheets, pillows, and duvets inside its storage space. That’s not all. It also enables you to store away seasonal and occasionally used items like blankets and curtains.
Being contained within a closed space, you won’t have to worry about them gathering dust. In fact, all your valuables will remain clean, even if enclosed for over a year, while you get to unwind in a calm and tidy space of your own. You won’t even have to bother pulling out boxes from under the bed for regular cleaning.
Use It In Smaller Rooms
Extra storage space always comes to our rescue at the time of need. However, modern apartments and homes are being made to meet smaller specifications, leading to a shortage of sufficient space.
To overcome this, you should use the space underneath ottoman beds, especially in smaller rooms and apartments. They serve as excellent space-savers, allowing you to store all your essential items.
You may not have additional space for extra furniture in a guest room, loft room, or even a box room. Ottoman beds are perfect for these areas of your home as they help reduce the reliance on extra storage.
To Enhance Home Decor
Ottomans aren’t just clever built-in storage systems in a bed frame. Available in a variety of styles and finishes, you can use them to add a touch of elegance and sophistication to your overall home decor. The standout bed can also be customized to meet your personal style requirements.
Final Words
Ottoman beds come with sturdy construction that offers greater weight load and storage capacities than most storage beds, such as divans. It requires minimal space and can be used to declutter compact bedrooms.
Furthermore, the bed frame is capable of delivering optimal support and comfort. However, you’ll need to invest in a good quality and lightweight mattress if you wish to enjoy restful sleep in a calm and tidy environment.
To sum up, there’s no doubt that ottomans are comfortable to sleep in. But you can also use this highly functional bed to ensure several other benefits. On that note, we now come to the end of our informative guide.
A storyboard is where the ideas conceived by the artist is given its actual visual form and expression which is then developed into a single action-strip in a comic book or an animated motion-picture or film.
A storyboard artist is, thus, the creator and director of any animated film, comic book or TV show. The storyboard artist’s job actually goes beyond what we might think is only putting down a particular scene on to the paper or electronic pad, nowadays.
This is because not only the artist conceives and gives a visual structure to an idea, they are responsible for developing the myriad of emotions that an absolutely fictional, animated character exhibits, forming an unbelievably beautiful relationship with its audience.
So if you’re interested in visual story-telling and knowing more about what a storyboard artist actually does, keep reading the following extensive guide that bares all about the profession of animation and the genius behind the screen!
What is a Storyboard Artist & Ultimate Guide for Beginners
First of all, how should one describe a storyboard and its artist?
Every sequence or clip in an animated movie that you see is formed by delicately weaving numerous panels together. Visual story-telling for animation finds expression on the artist's table where he creates and composes these snippets of scenes that relay an incident.
And the very layout on which these panels are created and arranged to form a scene is known as the artist’s “storyboard.”
In short, this is where the real magic for all animation movies begin!
Now, apart from just character sketches and situations or actions unfolding, storyboard panels also consist of sequences dealing with numerous reactions, movements, and locomotions, which are developed painstakingly by storyboard artists. These include everything from body language, the movement of limbs, the effects that each tiny movement has, and most importantly, each and every tiny facial expression of each and every character in the story.
These expressions are what relays the state of mind and thought processes of a character to us. These are what portrays the personal and ulterior motives and intentions of a character onto the screen and makes its virtual, imaginary “existence” believable to us.
If you think about it, the expressions of an animated character could make or break the illusion of his existence that we love to believe in and form a relationship with.
And this is where the genius of a storyboard artist lies.
So, how does a storyboard artist develop a visual sequence from just an idea?
A storyboard artist is the one who creates a visual story out of just a mere concept and or a script containing the idea, making it “real” for the world to see.
A storyboard artist is in complete control of how others might perceive a character and the entire project, for that matter. The storyboards serve as a critical reference point for all of the members of production and development, no matter which sub-department they belong to. Hence, the clarity of every storyboard for the entire project is a crucial requirement for all.
Thus, it is required for a storyboard artist to be absolutely confident, crisp and precise in all of his depictions of the plot so that it is absolutely clear and comprehensible to every member of the team even if joins midway or is responsible for undertaking just a segment of the story. This decides the vital “energy” of the panels which motivates and drives an entire production house.
As has been previously mentioned, a storyboard artist is responsible for the clearly depicting literally each and every tiny aspect of every scene and character in the story, including emotions, reactions, and gestures (subtle or otherwise).
Now, the critical point over here is to develop these actions with minimal or no words (dialogues) at all. The entire plot should be strong enough to not depend on any spoken word as such and should be able to hold its structure without scripted context. This tests the strength and depth of a visual story-sequence and is the ultimate parameter for judging the mettle of an artist or a beginner in the field.
This is the reason why each storyboard artist is a great visual communicator for every field that deals with virtual reality such as animated movies, TV shows, video games, and a great many forms of story-telling!
How does a storyboard artist handle visual story-telling?
The primary job of any storyboard artist is to sketch scenes that explain the story. They seldom require any word or dialogic to convey the story. The process and the methods that the storyboarders employ vary from one artist to the other. Often, it so happens that the rest of the production or development team also influences a storyboarder’s methods and style.
If there happens to be more than one artist at the storyboard, then one artist can also mimic the style of another. This is to ensure the uniformity of the storyboards to help maintain the clarity of the vision and comprehensibility of the plot.
Also, in the case of movie projects, a director’s personal style at handling a particular storyboard could influence the way another storyboarder creates scenes. This is a pretty beneficial way to ensure great flexibility in a team that also helps obtain the maximum benefits of an artist's personal style. However, the clarity of a storyboard shouldn't be compromised in any way no matter how many artists are working at a particular storyboard.
In certain ways, storyboard artists could like sketching a comic-book strip of a movie or video game. This is because, apart from visualizing scenes, an artist at the storyboard will have to describe the movement of the camera.
Based on your preference, you can realize the scenes on the computer screen or manually. A digital depiction and rendering of the scenes make it easier to exhibit and share. However, for traditionalists at the art, nothing beats the incredible appeal of pen on paper.
What are the specific things that a storyboard artist has to work upon?
Even though a significant portion of a storyboarder’s work involves drawing the fundamental structure for the characters and sketching in the details, there definitely remains a fair bit of room for text as well owing to the requirement of technical description. These go in their respective slots in the panels.
Since the clarity of a storyboard is the essential and utmost requirement of the production procedures, it is understandable that visual representations may at times fall short in conveying a clear message, especially if someone is starting out from the middle of the story or handling a part of it.
In such circumstances, using text often becomes a necessity to explain the specifics in greater detail, or even for listing the details from a technical standpoint.
On projects like that of video games, storyboard artists are often responsible for developing on so many other fronts than just visualizing scenes. Sometimes they have to work on various levels within the game or on the constituent elements of character design. They are responsible for developing and maintaining the “visual continuity” of a story.
According to celebrated game design artist, Lauren Walsh, a storyboard could be essentially termed as a sketch of the finished product, that lets a storyboard artist unleash their creativity without any sort of boundaries, restraints or limitations.
This crucial “sketch phase” allows an artist to freely explore several different themes, concepts, environments as well as vital story-telling tools as different means of communicating their ideas to the team. It is way easier and cost-effective to make simple changes to a storyboard before devoting precious time and resources to a concept or an idea that way.
How does “pitching” a storyboard works for an artist and the rest of the unit?
Storyboard artists are essentially responsible for “pitching” their art panels and boards to the director of a film or to the creative head of a development team. If you’ve got the knowledge and the talent of how things work in the storyboard department, then, this is how you can make your work have a substantial impact on a unit.
Once you have taken a concept or a script and woven a rough visual representation from it, your “pitch” is what is going to become the deciding factor for you.
It is because your “pitch” is the point where you perfect your visual representation, instilling life into it. This is where you provide the director or immediate mentor with an extensive walkthrough your entire story, narrating and describing your panels and boards.
These could include sound effects (better start polishing those explosion and spaceship sounds right away!). However, it is fundamentally your drawings that will decide the impact, speaking for themselves.
What you need to at this point is to take the recipient of your pitch into your world and keep them intrigued enough for them to stay there. Remember that like any other “sales-pitch,” here too, it is required for you to focus on selling your visual interpretation. This is why any pacing, sound, or rhythm will hold the power to make a drastic impact on your pitch.
And if your pitch makes a spectacular impact on the viewer, the script itself could be adjusted to include all those vital parts of your storyboard that has influenced the storyline so much!
This is because your visual representation of a concept not only serves to entertain, but they inspire other creative minds to create in turn!
How can one become a storyboard artist?
So, now, to answer the million-dollar-question of how does one become a storyboard artist, we would like to tell you that there are a number of ways to go about achieving that feat.
For starters, there are several tools available online that can help you out with your aim. A substantial portion of all of it goes into creating an ideal storyboard, so, it’s better if you tested your knowledge of the field and skills out for before you go ahead with the application procedures. This way, you can know for yourself if you are equipped for the job or not.
Some of the best storyboard software out there right now include:
To excel at storyboarding, you require great drawing skills. This is a crucial point of the work. Your storyboards do need to relay the scene clearly to their audience, and this is why you will be required to illustrate the emotions and gestures of your character correctly and prominently on your panels on the board. You will also have to render the setting for the scene as cleanly as you can.
All in all, you would have to draw pretty much all of the time to create your boards well. If this sounds appealing to you now, then do remember that jobs like these are some of the most viciously competitive ones that you’ll ever come across.
There is always going to be someone better than you at the job or more talented, but this doesn’t mean that you can’t reach their levels or go beyond it by perfecting your craft. With real patience and dedication, you could become the next best thing at your work that everybody looks up to. And this case, all you have to do is draw every day, for the majority of the time until you get the perfect circle!
No wonder people working at Pixar talks about staying up all night drawing and practicing. They mention working “48 hour days!”
Tips and tricks to practice better!
One of the most exciting and fun ways to practice drawing and get better at it is to do a “draw every day” challenge. This way, you can capture (and you should), whatever is happening around you and to you during the day or an incredible dream that you might have had last night and create your panels out of these memories and concepts!
This will build your interest in the task as well as strengthen your skills of visually representing a though.
Knowing a bit of cinematography will help you immensely with getting the fundamental dimensions of the picture right. This is because you would be required to draw whatever the “camera” sees, and that would be very different from what your own eyes would see. This is why you have to learn the difference between physical and cinematographic perspectives when it comes to defining perspective angles on the storyboard
Although video games and animated films aren’t filmed with a camera, they still have different perspectives.
Limitations of concepts such as that of the 180 degrees rule
The 180 degrees rule ensures that the viewers are absolutely oriented in the scene. Fundamentally, when you set your scene up, you get a straight line running through the middle of it. Now, for every shot in the scene, your camera perspective requires to be on the same side of that line.
The Warburton Labs offers a pretty helpful comic that correctly and accurately illustrates this concept. You could get the second part of the comic right here. It also discusses several other essential concepts that are closely related to storyboarding specifically.
To hone your skills, you could take art and theatre courses as well as various courses in photography and cinematography. Every part of this field, no matter which department it is, will contribute substantially to your growth and development as a storyboard artist.
How to apply for the job and be successful at it?
The first thing that you should do if you’re looking to bag a storyboard project is to search for internships, while you’re in art school. Try applying in bigger studios and smaller ones alike. As you achieve more and more reps, your chances of getting noticed at bigger studios such as Pixar and of the likes, get higher.
And if you’re looking for an entry-level job that doesn’t require much of a formal collegiate education, then do work hard and extensively on your portfolio as that needs to be pitch-perfect for these openings. Various workshops and classes can help you learn the technical parts of the art and assist you in honing your skills.
In all circumstances, you should focus on concentrate on constructing a portfolio that displays your deft skills as an artist as well as visually relay your story to the viewer in the perfect way.
Remember: draw all the time!
Now for the most challenging part: learn to prepare yourself for a lot of “no”s. Like any other job in the industry, this too will test your patience, perseverance, and positivity in the most brutal ways.
But, be assured, that with a strong portfolio and a persistent approach towards cracking the code will definitely get you to your goal eventually, if not fast enough.
A simple way to make it even more motivational and fun for you is to chalk it down to a “PSP” (not the Sony one, though), formula which stands for “Persistence, Strong Portfolio.” This is bound to get you closer to your destination by the day.
However, at bigger studios, it’s more than likely that you won’t find entry positions for storyboard artists. So, if you have already had some experience of working at a storyboard, then chances are that you may be hired directly for the spot.
Whereas smaller studios will often depend on their animators for helping with the storyboards. With smaller projects or indie ones, the pressure could be high, but these would provide you with all the scope to develop substantially on your skills and personal style and help you prepare for applying at bigger studios.
Skills and Education
Knowing how a film and animation differ from each other and their basic constituent elements are intrinsic parts of storyboarding.
You will be expected to have profound knowledge and in-depth understanding of acting, staging. Devote time in learning about cutting, which is the process of splicing scenes together as well as the language of a film.
Since your primary responsibility would always be that of communicating the story clearly through visuals, developing strong draftsmanship should be your top priority. Strengthen your skills as an artist as studios will always look for well-drawn storyboards with panels that can communicate tiny, tricky, and subtle details such as gestures and expressions with ease and clarity.
When you're dealing with portraying expressions and emotions, try covering as much as you can on them. Stories consist of a myriad of emotions. If you choose to depict only a singular emotion, for instance, humor in your panels, then a lot of questions about the plot and the characters would be left unanswered for the reviewer of your portfolio.
Make sure that you include emotionally-charged scenes, thrilling action panels or such that contain multiple emotions.
Based on requirements, you’d often have to be a collaborator or sub, especially if you’re looking to work in a studio. Working closely with the members of a team will spell bliss for learning the specifications and technicalities of the work.
However, if it’s specifically a solo or personal project or even for any indie game you want to design, then you need not require to collaborate with others as such if you aren’t really looking to.
A few potential challenges for a storyboard artist
One of the things that you would have to learn to accept is that not all ideas that you have would be perfect or enough to impress. Be prepared to take scathing criticisms and absorb all the precious feedback thrown your way. Not all panels you draw will bring in favorable judgments or remarks from your fellow team-mates.
But the best part about it is the incredible opportunity it will provide for you to improve your work. As long as you’re ready to turn a brutal criticism into a positive result for your work, things would pan out for you just fine!
Often it may happen that you’d be asked to rework your scenes over and over and in the process, combine different elements of the iteration until you’re able to create the very thing the team is looking for. You will have to be very flexible that way in order to tackle the struggles of creating perfection on the storyboard.
There could also be a lot of pressure when it comes to pitching as storyboard pitches could involve executive producers, backers, and several other decision-makers. Pleasing all at the same time could be the most challenging feat to win in this field. However, with a positive attitude and mindset towards it, all will get you where you want to be!
The Industry Advices!
One of the most influential figures at Pixar studios itself is that of Ted Mathot, who is the story supervisor and the creator and artist for comic books. He had posted his “story advice” where he talks about creating the ideal portfolio for you to be able to apply at studios like Pixar on Tumblr three years ago. It is available even today.
He talks about some of the vital things to keep in mind such as the length of your portfolio, which, according to Mathot, should be limited within 15-20 pages worth of boards.
Avoid cramming these as many panels as you want. Trying to keep everything clear and legible enough: this is of utmost importance. Mathot recommends about 6-9 panels per page.
Always put up your best works as no one would have the time to go through all that you may have created in the past 15 years.
Your best works on panels should convince the reviewer or interviewer of your skills, reflecting clearly and precisely whatever it is that you specialize in. This way you’d be showing value for their time.
And for the subject matter, Mathot is of the view that a little depth and personality could be just the thing that could impress the reviewer. Apart from the conventional character or setting, bringing in scenes from real life (such as coffee shops, airports, etc.) could spell a breath of fresh air, defining a unique character and tell its story.
In this context, keeping a notebook or journal at hand could indeed be a wise call, so that the next time something interesting happens in your surroundings or you visit a place that inspires a story, you’ll be able to record it. And according to Mathot, this sort of work is exactly what could make a vital difference.
He clearly states that “communicative single image story-telling” provides very personal insight into the artist’s mind as well as his style.
So now you know what to do and how to do it all!
Conclusion
This was it for our ultimate guide to storyboarding for beginners! We hope we were able to provide you with an insight into what exactly storyboarding is supposed to be and how the industry works.
And we sincerely hope you liked our effort!
Take care and keep drawing the smiley!
See you soon!
If you need to know more about sheds or you are simply wondering what is a shed, you`ve come to the right place ! Sheds have been used for a very long time globally and having multiple uses; it is a very convenient utility option for people who own gardens, backyard, or even limited spacing. Typically single story, these structures are versatile and easily modified to fit the needs of the individual, they're commonly structures which have a roof and four walls, situated outside the house. A shed could vary from a couple of square meters in size to a dozen depending on how they are utilized, whether it is for gardening purposes or industrial usage, sheds play a major role in storage.
Sheds Defined, Structure Types, Advantages and Disadvantages
What are the different types of sheds?
Sheds, as mentioned above, come in all shapes of sizes as well as dozens of materials. The most common presence in the domestic setup is built in wood yet nowadays vinyl and plastic variants start to gain ground as they are less expensive and a tad easier on maintenance compared to their wooden competitors.
As sheds grow in sizes complex wooden structures and professional carpenters come into the picture when it comes to wood, alternatively iron and a professional welder could achieve brilliant results too when it comes to medium and large sheds.
via bhg
Domestic sheds
Yes, you could even DIY a shed! Did you know that?
A very interesting choice indeed, sheds could be available in the DIY form, and by using simple methods, they could be constructed according to our needs. A simple tool like a screwdriver can help you in assembling a shed, whether it is plastic, wood or metal. These sheds are versatile and their uses range from gardening storage to chemicals and equipment storage or home workshops, people often store in them items which otherwise could not be stored inside the house.
Shed kits could be the horizontal, vertical or corner type with modifications inside the shed to meet your needs! They could be apex, pent or reverse apex roofed. Pent shaped roofs are for places which have heavy downpours or even snow, it is sloping downwards and helps in water run-off. An apex type roof is basically like an inverted V, often common to houses too. The reverse apex roof, on the other hand, has a side door, not a front. This facilitates the door to open in the largest and widest section of the shed rather than the narrowest, aiding in better visibility and room.
A little heavier on the pocket, larger sheds are used for domestic purpose too and while their footprint is larger, they have better ventilation and can also be used for purposes other than gardening or typical tool work. Often such sheds can also be transformed into a cozy outdoor office, a photo studio or library, they are often hobby related and they enjoy a better build quality overall.
People often see these as small retreats, comfort dwellings within reach.
Sheds which have more specific usage
From being used in the mall for parking to university, restaurants and other commercial spaces, sheds are a major contribution towards protecting vehicles both two-wheeled and four-wheeled vehicles. We encounter bike sheds and carports everywhere, both type of sheds that protect and safeguard our belongings with a basic design.
An ever more particular usage would be boat sheds or, structures envisioned for rowing and drying materials.
Agricultural sheds
Farmers use a lot of agricultural sheds, again for storage and protection of farm equipment and produce. Depending on the production, these could be from small to large and are largely modifiable according to requirements. This also includes shearing sheds in which cattle are kept.
Raw Materials
The most common type of materials which are used to build the framework of a shed depends again on its usage, but most often it is PVC, metal or wood. They could also be vinyl-sided sheds, everything depends on the owner and their requirements.
via pinterest
Metal Sheds
Metal rooftop, framework, and galvanized aluminum sheets are used to build sheds. They tend to rust with time, and their durability is weaker than wooden sheds when maintenance is overlooked, they also tend to dent faster. Metal sheds have the advantage of being strong and termite resistant. For this reason, corrugated metal sheds are preferred as they are stronger than their counterparts. Financing into an anchoring kit for a metal shed makes sense as they could be susceptible to weather-related damages.
Plastic and PVC sheds are also quite popular and are the least expensive type. Also, they are easier to maintain than the metal ones. Plastic sheds are very lightweight in comparison to metal or wood and are also UV protective, rot-proof, and termite free. They could be modified with extensions like plugs, boards, shelves, skylights, etc.
Wooden Sheds
The classiest of them all, wooden sheds are classics and therefore, more expensive. The maintenance of wooden sheds is higher than vinyl or plastic, but they are excellent when it comes to durability. It would be recommendable to research well before investing in wooden sheds as proper varnish and good quality wood last for a very long time. Cedar wood is pretty much water-resistant. There are typically two ways by which wood could be treated, dip or pressure treatment. Pressure-treated sheds last longer and don't need additional preservatives, whereas dip-treated ones will again throw you into the maintenance game every few years.
via nzhouseandgarden.co.nz
Vinyl and Asbestos Sheds
Vinyl, as well as asbestos sheds, are also popular and good alternatives to plastic or wood, even though the major framework would probably still be wooden or metal. They are stronger than metal or plastic sheds and are also easy on the pocket. There are many color options that could suit your aesthetic appeal.
All these types of sheds are available in kit form and could be DIY too.
Organizing your shed
One should do all in his power to organize a shed clutter-free in an attempt to maximize its storage. A simple trick would be to utilize the vertical wall space to build new shelves and cabinets, one could also use rods to suspend organizers and possibly mount oddly shaped items that he does not use often under the pitched roof. It is highly recommended to reuse and recycle, anything can be of use in your shed, plastic bottles split in half can rapidly become nail organizers for example, creativity is key!
At all times, keep in mind that a clutter-free shed is a happy shed, seek solutions that help you keep the space clean in the long run and everything will be far easier, maintenance included.
The advantages and disadvantages of sheds
Whether someone owns a big area in their garden or backyard, or whether it is tiny and cluttered- a shed could solve a lot of your organizational problems. They sure are affordable and come in a varied range of prices for everyone out there. Sheds could also be innovated into dainty personal spaces which could be used in various ways apart from storage.
Sticking to the basic idea of having a shed, as a storage unit, there are certain pros and cons to them, and it would be advisable to discuss a few.
via findinghomefarms.com
Advantages
Storage
The most important advantage and usage of a shed is obviously storage. They act as huge storage spaces and occupy very little space overall. Whether it is for domestic purposes, or for commercial needs, sheds are extremely important storage units. This makes your backyard clutter free, giving you more space inside and outside the house.
Organization
Sheds account for very good organization spaces, and since it can store a lot of objects and materials under one roof, it is easy to organize them according to our needs. This makes work much easier and of course faster.
Budget-friendly
Since sheds come in various sizes as well as quality and type, they are quietly affordable. Sometimes investing in huge-scale storage could be difficult for some people, under such circumstances, making the perfect use of limited space, sheds make a great choice. For commercial purposes, like train goods, or parking, sheds help in keeping things organized in one area in a friendly.
Protection and safety
Sheds actually could be installed with very good protective measures. This ensures that the goods/vehicles/valuables are kept safe and away from burglars. Vehicle sheds require more attention, and so do private homes. Sheds could be installed and modified with specialized locking devices which make sure that there is no unnecessary theft.
Easy Peasy
One could express his creative side by redesigning his shed through paint, coloring it towards happiness. Shed kits are usually DIY, and this means that anyone could follow a set of simple instructions and assemble their shed with very basic tools present in the house.
Anything You Want
Depending on the need and location of the shed, any raw material, starting from wood to metal and vinyl to asbestos can be used, one can choose from many options in the market. They could make their shed colorful and at the same time productive.
Maintenance
A very important factor to consider when buying a shed is what type of material is used. Certain materials like PVC, plastic, and certain metals are very easy to maintain and thus save a lot of hassle as well as maintenance costs. Find out what suits your requirements the best and invest in the most suitable shed for yourself.
Durable
One of the important factors to consider is the longevity and durability of the product we invest in. Depending on the material, sheds come with a manufacturing warrant. Plastic sheds are durable and so is steel. The classics, wooden sheds are a tad more expensive and a little bit high maintenance yet their expression sends an entirely different message.
Temperature control
Plastic sheds and wooden sheds are usually quiet temperatures friendly. Even in extreme climates, there is a moderate temperature that could be maintained inside these sheds, and this makes them more user-friendly. Also, one should consider hazard protocols. Wooden sheds have more susceptibility to catching fire than metal, and thus it should be kept in mind. Everything depends on the owner, the location, and the type of storage they want to make.
via poppytalk.com
Disadvantage of sheds
Hectic Maintenance
Some of the problems which are faced when having any shed are maintenance related, especially if the quality is sub-par. Wood is usually prone to catch fungus, termites, foul smells as well as various pests. Unless it is a superior manufactured shed which a have all precautionary measurements like varnish paint, wooden sheds could be hard to maintain. Metal sheds are prone to get dented, even though they don't get damaged otherwise. Paint too tends to chip off and peel easily and thus requires additional investment.
via statesmanjournal.com
Expensive
Even though, otherwise budget-friendly, wooden sheds could be quite expensive. They tend to be the most durable too, but it depends from person to person on what quality of wood they would invest into. It is always advisable to spend a few bucks extra to get the best deal quality-wise.
Immobile
Except for certain kinds of sheds, most of them are immobile and cannot be moved easily. These sheds thus have to be lodged in one area permanently. This is the most applicable for wooden sheds as they are heavy and bulky and almost impossible to move.
via bhg.com
Too many pests
Again, if not maintained well, sheds could be a hub of unwanted pests, bugs, and eventually diseases. This is especially if they are unused for a very long period. So ensure that when there is a routine cleaning of your home, the shed to is a part of it.
Noise
Sheds are nowhere near as soundproofed as garages, their low mass especially on plastic and thin wooden sheds is not sufficient to break down sounds, their main objective being storage. If you are planning to use power tools in the shed occasionally for woodworking or any other hobby that might generate noise do research soundproofing costs and options that will help you maintain the peace in the household.
Conclusion
Sheds are a smart choice and their popularity is a testament to their greatness, simply ensure that you pick something that fits your needs and requirements and prepare yourself for an awesome experience with your next structure!
A screen printing machine is used to print designs on items like clothing that are meant to be sold. But such machines are also used in several other industries for creating artwork, posters, medical devices, electronics, etc.
If you’re thinking of starting a screen printing business, you may be searching for the best screen printing machine. But finding the right screen printing machine isn’t an easy task since there are several units on the market.
You need to have proper knowledge about how they function to find the most suitable one. That’s why I’ve shared this guide explaining all about screen printing machines here to help you out.
Screen Printing - What Is It And Why Is It Used?
Screen printing is a printing process where ink is pressed through a mesh onto a substrate to create a printed design. This printing process is used in many industries, including clothing, art, electronics, and even for manufacturing medical devices. But its most popular use is for creating custom clothing products, like printed t-shirts.
Also known as serigraphy, screen printing has multiple forms, such as spot color screen printing, grayscale printing, halftone printing, and more. Another common name for the process is silk screen printing since silk was traditionally used for creating the screen used in the printing process.
The primary reason why screen printing is so popular is that the designs are printed in very vivid colors. Additionally, the ink is applied to the surface in multiple layers, which makes the item tactile and pleasant to touch.
With screen printing, it is even possible to print the same design several times using the same stencil. This means that creating multiple copies of the accessory or clothing is easy, and large batches of products can be manufactured efficiently.
Screen printing further allows the creation of highly detailed designs, though this limits the number of colors that can be used despite the color combinations being intense.
Origin And History
It is an ancient technique that was first used in China around 950 AD for printing designs on fabrics. But the technique was later adopted by Japanese artisans for transferring patterns onto paper with the help of a hard brush. Moreover, the pigment was pressed through a screen that was made using human hair.
In the 18th Century, screen printing arrived in Europe, though it did not become very popular immediately because silk was very expensive at the time. As silk became easier to import, thanks to the Silk Road, its cost went down, which led to screen printing becoming more widespread.
Then, photo-sensitive emulsions began to be manufactured by the early 20th Century, and these made the process of creating detailed stencils easier. During the 1930s, screen printing became popular as a medium for art, and was referred as serigraphy.
Thus, screen printing was used as a form of fine art, and artists like Andy Warhol and Eduardo Paolozzi utilized it for their work during the 1960s. Often called pop art, this method was used to create multiple copies of the same image. And Andy Warhol’s Marilyn Diptych is one of the most famous examples of this art form.
In modern times, screen printing is used both as an art form and for commercial printing purposes, perfectly suited for producing large batches of custom clothing.
Other Uses Of Screen Printing
Being much more versatile than most other printing techniques, screen printing can be used for different purposes. It also does not require pressure to be applied for printing, as in lithography and etching, while the surface does not need to be completely plain.
What’s more, screen printing can be done with different inks and on various materials, including ceramics, glass, paper, wood, metal, and textiles. That is why it is used across many industries for manufacturing items like balloons, medical devices, decals, clothing, displays, signs, and electronics.
Screen printing is also used in the manufacture of wafer-based solar photovoltaic (PV) cells, where the silver buses and mesh have to be printed. In printing electronics like solar cells, screen printing becomes indispensable because it allows you to control how thick the print should be.
Additionally, the size of solar wafers is increasing while their thickness is getting reduced. This means the printing process has to be carried out carefully to minimize breakage, which is possible with this printing method.
The Process Of Screen Printing
In its most basic form, screen printing involves the creation of a stencil on a mesh screen through which ink is pressed onto the surface underneath. While the screen printing process remains the same in most cases, the creation of the stencil can vary.
Common methods used for preparing stencils include applying vinyl or masking tape to cover selected parts, screen blockers like lacquer or glue, or a light-sensitive emulsion. The mesh is usually made of polyester, though stainless steel and nylon ones are also available.
Selecting the right mesh depends upon the texture of the surface, the complexity of the design, and the size of the mesh. Once the mesh is selected, it is coated with a light-sensitive emulsion on which the design is placed.
When exposed to light, parts covered by the print design remain liquid, while the uncovered parts solidify. After exposing the stencil for a predetermined amount of time, the emulsion is washed, and the screen is dried before being placed on the screen printing machine.
The piece of clothing to be printed is placed below the screen after which the screen is then lowered, and ink is added for printing. Most businesses use an automatic rotary carousel printer, whereby multiple screens can be used simultaneously. This also allows them to apply different colors quickly.
For multicolored designs, multiple screens are used, as only one color can be printed at a time. After the printing process is complete, the screen is washed to remove the emulsion so it can be used again with new stencils.
Screen printing machines usually have a squeegee or blade that moves across the surface of the mesh screen. This pushes the ink through the mesh, after which the blade movement is reversed to allow the screen to touch the surface material.
Generally, in an automatic screen printing machine, there is an electric or pneumatic center, around which the printing stations are arranged similar to the spokes of a bicycle wheel. Then the clothing on which the design has to be printed is placed on rotating platens, also called print pallets. These rotate around the machine allowing each piece of clothing to be colored.
Individual print stations are represented by the spokes, and the number of print stations and screens determines the type of printing machine. For instance, a screen printing press with 4 stations and 6 screens is referred to as a 6/4 press.
One thing to understand here is that a screen printing machine will always print fewer colors than it should be able to. The reason is that the process requires the use of flashing and cooling stations. Flashing stations allow the clothing to be cured, improving the printing quality, while cooling stations let them cool before the next round of printing.
Several types and sizes of screen printing machines are used for printing different items, but they can generally be classified into automatic and manual screen printing presses. In a manual screen printing press, a worker has to move the squeegee for printing while there is no need for manual labor in automatic screen printers.
Usually, businesses involved in screen printing begin with manual machines and shift to automatic ones as they grow and expand.
Screen Printing Equipment
To be able to use a screen printing machine most effectively, it is important to learn about the various pieces of equipment and their functions.
1. Screen Printing Press
A screen printing press can make the printing process more efficient by printing multiple items easily. The purpose of the press is to hold the screen during the printing process so that the operator can replace the items to be printed.
3 types of printing presses are used for screen printing; automatic, semi-automatic, and manual. As the name indicates, an automatic screen printing press does not require manual input, while semi-automatic ones require limited human input. And manual presses need to be operated by hand.
When large quantities of items need to be printed, fully or semi-automatic presses are most suitable. These presses minimize errors, help speed up the process, and make printing more efficient. On the other hand, a company that operates on a smaller scale can rely on a tabletop or hand bench press.
2. Inks
Inks or pigments are used to press against the mesh screen so that the stencil design gets printed onto the t shirt or other item. But selecting the right inks is not as simple because different types of inks create various effects.
Some common inks that can be used include puff inks, texturized inks, or glittery inks each resulting in a unique appearance. Also, you need to consider the fabric type on which the design is to be printed since certain inks work better on particular materials.
In the case of clothing items, machine washable ink that has undergone heat treatment is generally used. This results in designs that can be used multiple times without fading away.
3. Screen
Screen printing requires a mesh screen that has a wooden or metal frame on which a mesh fabric is spread out. Modern screens use polyester fabrics instead of silk, which deliver similar results but are much more affordable.
But the thread count and thickness of the mesh depends on the texture of the material that has to be printed. As a rule, threads that have smaller spaces in between result in more detailed prints.
After coating the screen in emulsion and exposing it to light, it can be used as a stencil. And the emulsion can be washed off afterward so that the screen is ready for printing another design.
4. Squeegee
The squeegee is a rubber blade that is attached to a long handle made from plastic, metal, or wood. Its purpose is to press the ink through the screen onto the material which has to be printed. The size of the squeegee depends on the size of the frame of the mesh, as this ensures proper coverage.
Apart from the squeegee size, the firmness of the rubber blade can vary, and a firmer blade is more suitable for printing highly detailed designs. It can ensure that even the tiniest openings on the stencil get a uniform layer of pigment.
Meanwhile, a squeegee with a softer blade is generally used for painting fabrics or a less intricate design.
5. Washing Station
After they have been used, mesh screens need to be washed properly to remove the emulsion coating. In the case of large printworks, huge tubs of acid or cleaning fluid may be used to clean the mesh. Alternatively, a power hose, sink, or trough can be used to remove the emulsion.
Comparison Of Screen Printing With Other Printing Methods
1. Screen Printing Vs Digital Printing
DTG, or Direct To Garment printing, is a digital printing method used for fabrics and requires a specialized printer, similar to an inkjet computer printer. This prints the image directly onto the fabric or other surface.
The biggest advantage of this printing method is that multiple colors can be printed simultaneously without layering since there is no use of a stencil. Because of this, DTG printing is perfect for printing very colorful or detailed designs.
Moreover, DTG printing does not require a complicated setup as in screen printing, so it is more cost-effective and can even be used to print single items or small batches. It uses a computerized image, which produces highly detailed and even photographic images.
The only downside to this printing method is the colors are applied using CMYK-style dots instead of solid ink blocks. So, the completed image does not offer as intense colors as screen printing.
Also, it is not possible to create textured prints using a digital printer.
2. Screen Printing Vs Heat Transfer
Heat transfer printing utilizes heat to print a design on any surface. In this method, the design is printed onto a material that has a heat-reactive adhesive coating applied to it. This is called sublimation or transfer paper, and when a heat press is applied to it, the adhesive sticks to the material underneath, creating a design.
Unlike screen printing, heat transfer is good for small orders, proves more cost-effective, and is much easier to use. It can print detailed designs on different items, such as footwear, bags, and hats.
Heat transfer printing can also be used with digital printing methods, and this process is known as digital heat transfer printing. In this, the design to be printed is created on the computer and printed onto a white transfer paper. Then, a plotter is used to cut it out along its digital outline for accuracy.
Once the transfer is complete, it is placed on the clothing item or other material, and heat treatment is done to make it stick to the fabric. With heat transfer printing, it is important to keep in mind that the quality of the printed item will depend on the quality of the materials used.
In recent times, this method has acquired a poor reputation because printers often use low-quality materials for the process. That is why proper techniques and good-quality materials are crucial for the best results.
3. Screen Printing Vs Laser Printing
When it comes to screen printing vs laser printing, both are among the most common industrial printing methods in use today. But while screen printing involves applying ink or pigment to the printing surface, laser printing uses a laser beam that removes or oxidizes selected areas of the surface material.
Being a more modern technique, laser printing results in greater efficiency and allows very precise printing. It is also better for the environment since less waste material is produced. But laser printing only allows the use of limited colors compared to screen printing and is more expensive, at least initially.
Most importantly, this printing method can only be used on select materials.
Why Should You Use A Screen Printing Machine?
The screen printing industry is growing rapidly, and the trend is expected to continue for several years. One of the reasons for this is that screen printing is versatile and finds use in many other industries.
Governments, educational institutions, electronics manufacturers, and technological industries are all now relying on screen printing. Additionally, with more and more online stores selling goods like custom clothing, on-demand printing has made this printing method an extremely lucrative venture.
At the same time, manual printing methods are becoming obsolete with the easier availability of automatic screen printing machines. Such machines have not only made the process faster and more efficient but have also led to a reduction in problems like workers suffering from carpal tunnel syndrome.
Because of these reasons, many people are looking to start a screen printing venture, and a screen printing machine can be an excellent investment.
Choosing A Screen Printing Machine
A screen printing machine is a huge investment, and you may need to spend thousands of dollars to get a complete setup. That is why planning carefully before using such a machine is crucial.
You also need to opt for the best brand, which can be a bit challenging since there are numerous options to choose from. Moreover, a screen printing business needs additional equipment, such as:
1. Heat Press Or Dryer
When printing with a screen printer, a dryer is used to cure the ink applied to the fabric by exposing it to a temperature of 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Printing On Transparent Films
A printer that can print on transparent films is required for screen burning, which is the process of coating the screen with emulsion and exposing it to UV light.
3. Flash Curing Unit
This is used to cure the fabric when multiple colors have to be printed.
4. Exposure Unit Or Light Box
The light box is used to expose the mesh screen to UV light for hardening the emulsion.
5. Mesh Screen
Investing in a good-quality screen is vital to ensure that the completed fabric is of good quality.
6. Software
You need the right software for screen printing as they make it easy to create and sell the artwork. Several manufacturers offer starter kits that contain everything you need, but it should be kept in mind that entering the screen printing business can be quite expensive in the beginning.
And for those unfamiliar with screen printing, relying on a local printing shop may be a better choice.
What Is A Screen Printing Machine Used For Final Thoughts
Several printing methods are available, and many of them, such as laser printing and DTG printing, offer certain advantages over screen printing. But despite that, screen printing is still the most popular method, especially for creating custom goods like shirts, posters, and accessories.
The versatility of screen printing machines allows them to be used for various purposes. So, if you’re thinking of entering this business, this may be the perfect time to do so. Just make sure to consider factors like automatic or manual functionality, machine and screen size, multicolor support, and your budget when getting a screen printing machine.
Tip
Investing in a manual or semi-automatic printing machine is a good idea when just starting out, as more resources need to be conserved. Such machines are more affordable than fully automatic ones.
A pergola is not often defined despite its huge popularity, what is a pergola is common in landscaping and more importantly how is a pergola different from an arbor or car park one might find itself wondering. If you look for a fast answer, a pergola is a custom outdoor frame structure most commonly realized out of wood or metal. The structure beautifully emerging in your future landscape is based on posts covered with a roof or arch, it is envisioned to support vines. The top, roofing grid of the pergola can be left open or used as cover to shelter the individual from the elements. Built to add privacy and shade like a natural extension of the home with an outdoor sitting area, the pergola is most commonly attached to the home but it can be often found freestanding on open field, as a focal point in landscaping. The pergola offers privacy, obstructs unwanted views thanks to trellises and sculptural vines that shape the ensemble in pure beauty.
The pergola pronunciation is intuitive and simple : per`go`la . The origin of the word dates back to 1645-55 from the Italian, Latin word "pergula" - projecting roof, arbor.
Wooden pergola design painted in dark green nestling iron and marble dinning set, all emphasized by Wisteria vines.
The regular pergola is often confused with the following structures, these are terms that define either similar structures or relevant components to a pergola ensemble reason for which in the following rows their similarities and difference will be explained to avoid future misunderstandings and misuses of the terms. The terms in discussion are:
Arbors
Gazebos
Trellises
Lattice also known as “latticework”
Carports
Differences and similarities- Arbors and Pergolas
The most common misunderstanding is found between arbors and pergolas, two highly similar outdoor structures that are often confused. Arbors are commonly used structures that can be found in public parks and private gardens alike, these are often realized out of materials with high resilience like vinyl or coated metal to avoid their maintenance where pergolas are usually realized from wood. Arbors are freestanding, rare being the cases in which it is attached to a garden fence to serve as a gate, embellished in natural elements. The biggest difference between them is that arbors lack the beautiful architectural design features that define a pergola, moreover they do not serve a leisure role as an outdoor sitting area but as a graphic element that emphasizes the landscape through its presence, as an anchor for beautiful flowers and vines.
In contrast, pergolas are larger structures in all three dimensions and they`re customized to a certain extent to fit the requirements of the individual using it, pergolas can receive masonry columns for a beautiful renaissance monumental aspect and their top is often flat. The pergola dates back to the birth place of the Renaissance, Italy, where the term pergola firstly emerged describing masonry pergolas of great beauty. In contemporaneity the term pergola is often found describing ensambles realized in wood and iron more often then stone. Mixed pergolas with stone and wood, metal and wood can be found as well.
An outdoor extension for the indoor living space is the most common stance of the word pergola, when they`re freestanding, pergolas are used as dinning areas and outdoor enterntaining ensembles nestled between greenery or outdoor enterntaining features like fireplaces, swimming pools, outdoor cooking areas.
Landscape Architect, Cynthia Cash describes the deference between an arbor and a pergola below:
“The primary difference in an ‘arbor’ and a ‘pergola’ is that an arbor is a free-standing structure (also used to support vines), whereas a pergola is a long linear structure over a garden pathway.”
Gazebos and carports compared to pergolas
The beautiful and functional outdoor structure known as "gazebo" is often confused with pergolas as well. Gazebos are enclosed structures, they have a closed roof and unlike pergolas, they usually feature a round shape on a raised floor that protects the users fro, humidity in the rainy season, it is used for outdoor entertaining, usually as a dinning area, a very practical, neat outdoor structure..
The carport is the outdoor structure that resembles the common pergola the most, a high end car port can sometimes be better looking than a normal, common pergola, this happens because both ensembles share the same structure, the difference between them being on function and purpose rather than aspect. The carport is used to offer refuge to car in the alley where pergolas are used for entertainment, relaxation and comfort. The practical values of the carport cannot be compared with the leisure valences of the pergola in which memorable experiences are written in comfort and beauty. Both are commonly constructed out of wood and both serve as anchors for vegetation usually.
Rustic Gazebo ready to shelter an extraordinary dinning experience in complete privacy and full comfort.
trellises, LATTICEWORK,Vines & Pergolas in LANDSCAPING
The purpose of all these structures at the end of the days it to bring vegetation in the vertical plane, greenery that sculpts space and clothes the bare wooden structures transforming them completely. Common vines like Virginia Creeper, Hardy Kiwi, Wisteria, Bougainvillea, Hardy Kiwi, Dutchman`s Pipe are wrapping the structures around the world in sheer beauty, emphasizing their existence and beautifying the ensemble, adding visual comfort in most modern gardens.
The trellis is a small part of these ensembles, a framework that helps climbing roses, vines to grow. Trellises can be made out of wood, vinyl or metal and they`re confused with the word lattice thanks to the looks of the latter. Lattices have a crisscross or check-board pattern that troubles the eye, determining the confusion with trellises. Where trellises are freestanding pieces, lattice and latticework are mounted on the sides of a pergola or arbor, as anchors for the vines, easing the climbing of the plant up to the roof.
Wooden pergola design sheltering a sofa swing, latticework protects the sides from unwanted views.
Modern pergola offering shade by the pool, naturally extending living space outdoors.
Found onTitan Designs
Beautiful Mediterranean Pergola designs offering shade for a sitting area with expansive views.
Pergola ensemble with hammock and extraordinary expansive views.
Olive green pergola design with orange curtains ready to offer privacy to the individuals using it.
Outdoor bar area protected by white pergola design; industrial timeless bar chairs emphasizing the spatiality in which they reside.
Vinyl white pergola design offering a sitting area by the pool, protected and emphasized by greenery.
Living pergola design sculpting space around it, defining the space through greenery.
Custom metal pergola design nestled in greenery.
If a small pergola definition was to be sought the answer would describe the pergola as garden structure that sculpts a shaded sitting area, passageway or walkway used for leisure purposes; the garden structure described would be build by vertical posts and pillars that support cross beams along a constant width. In the ensemble latticework gracefully trains plants, vines to grow into the vertical plant, complementing the vertical layout with organicity, naturalness and sheer beauty, emphasizing the aesthetic values of the landscape and home, redefining the outdoor living spaces and inviting new protagonists, greenery, in a previously undiscovered territory. The comfort of the household is boosted thanks to the privacy added, shade provided and opportunities opened in sublime comfort.
Latticework and pergolas
The common pergola design includes posts, beams and latticework, simple and easy to realize at home with an extra hand. The common footprint measures 10 ft with, 10 ft depth and 8 ft height, the sides are usually covered with latticework, from time to time latticework being placed on the roof top as well. Redwood is used to reduce the maintenance and add longevity to the ensemble. To customize your pergola you can use any paint to either nestle the design in the overall decor or contrast it. Through a simple pergola you can earn shade, privacy and a great deal of comfort.
Columned pergolas
The beautiful mixture between materials has always been much appreciated when realized properly. In pergola designs too materials can be mixed to great results, columned pergolas for example are preserving the roots of the stone pergolas, ensembles that brought a monumental architectural presence into the setting to sculpts space, now beautifully combined with the more modern presence of the word pergola, wood. The instance in which Corinthian or Roman Style columns are tailored with wood are highly fortunate, these are today realized out of polyvinyl chloride, PVC, in which concrete is poured for stability and resilience. Traditional settings, Tuscan homes and various other eclectic scenarios use the visual impact of the column often obtaining great results.
Exemplary pergola design ideas with stone architectural columns and wooden roof top, ensemble wrapped around a superb fireplace, everything embraced by flowers, vines, greenery.
Pergola with Arches
A solution that denies the flat, regular plane on the roof top is the arch pergola. The curve resolved on the top of the posts reshapes space, simulating the sky vault on which flowers will be present. Iron and redwood are used to create the arches but today certain ready arches can be purchased, all weather resistant. With wooden arches you can also obtain a rustic look that adds warmth and an inviting allure.
Sculptural custom made arched pergola sheltering sitting area.
Japanese pergola
The Japanese garden inspires calms and serenity and is often the birth place of garden structures that vary from mini pond bridges to custom pergolas and arbors. Cedar and Redwood is used commonly used, occasionally painted red to serve as a garden centerpiece. Eclectic gardens inspired by the Japanese gardens often adopt pergolas as transitional items between different styled garden zones. Wisteria and rose flowers are the plants of choice in these setups.
CONTEMPORARY pergola designs
In contemporaneity pergolas are often designed with recycled plastics and vinyl as they reduce the maintenance of your ensemble to zero. The new pergola materials do not decay or rot nor do they need any painting like wood. It goes without saying that wood infuses different values in your scenery but if you`re short on time and you find yourself unable to spend it on maintenance, modern solutions are the way to go, they can be quite graphic.
Modern Metal pergola ensembles
A strong solid structure realized in metal can last an eternity. Use metal to you advance, copper will create a patina of green-mint, blue greens that no other material can replicate, metal can be shaped in various shapes and sizes so pick it up for custom setups. Curved or angular garden structures can also be realized with metal. Do not use rebar, it will rust swiftly. Coated metals are superb solutions with extraordinary resilience, they can take extraordinary shapes that will emphasize your garden for decades.
Living materials shaping structures
You can sculpt with living matter, you can use flexible shrubs, trees to sculpt your own structure. Tie and train the branches to embrace the modelling strong and unite them on the top to create a living ensemble. Bamboo is often used to serve as a pillar for the future living posts. This technique requires immense patience and dedication but the result is inexplicable beauty.
design tailored for your needs
Light or heavy, minimal or highly decorated, rustic or formal in design, your solution must require a perfect fit in your scenery. You simple need to realize something that will complete your garden setting at first glance. Plants and flowers must require thought just as much as the building material, the garden paths that lead to your pergola and the furniture enclosed in it. Pay great attention to details and you will obtain a design tailored to your needs that while emphasize your garden and offer you privacy and comfort.
ensure privacy and win comfort
More often than not pergola ensembles and trellises are installed to obtain privacy. The latticework on your pergola includes this statement and will offer privacy and shade through the presence of beautiful vines like wistera, grapes or whatever flamboyant climbers you choose to use. You pergola can lead the way in your design, serving as an example of sheer beauty; it can inspire future arbor and trellises installation beautifully tied by garden paths and flowers. The new setup can be brought by your outdoor fireplace or swimming pool as well, enhancing the entertaining area great deal.
If you choose to build your pergola at home as a do it yourself project, we applaud you, it is a course of action that many individuals take, it leads to great results. Keep in mind that safety comes first if you build at home, use safety equipment, read the instructions for the power tools used and cement mixture alike, nothing should be overlooked.
You`ll also need an extra set of hands, especially in the first part of the project, call a friend and make this project a really fun and constructive hang out.
If you choose to use pergola kits, research well, use kits on which you`ve found positive feedback; some kits might make your job harder than they should.
Take your time and build in your rhythm, you set the pace, you know the design you aim for. Ensure the proper result with patience.
Simple wooden pergola protecting an outdoor bed by the pool.
Found on SNOEI
Complete outdoor festive entertaining suite on terraced ground.
Two toned wooden textures providing an unique sitting area. Notice the metal barrels doubling as coffee tables; notice the pattern on the patio floor. Superb details on simple elements.
Minimalist metal pergola design with clear lines battling vegetation.
Found on Jacqueline Volker
Wooden corner pergola design offering a small refuge in the garden.
A garden, like a home, carries great importance. It helps us relief stress, it shares with us fresh air, privacy, comfort. If you are happy enough to call a small plot your own, make it worth it, enjoy every inch to the fullest, be sure you make the best out of it. We all have different needs, while one will require a swimming pool another might seek a vegetable garden. Meadow, vegetable garden or bachelor outdoor entertaining center, enjoy your garden, love it, appreciate it.
What is a pergola? What do you think? How do you use your garden? We would love to hear your valuable feedback on the subject in the comment section below.
So the other day, my little [might I add naughty as well?] cousin came home for a visit. Being the usual menacing self, he leaped across the house from table to table and chair to chair. And this time, our awesome salt lamp had to pay the price. No, he wasn’t unapologetic, he just stood there, looking at us sheepishly and then got back to jumping around.
Now, to the most crucial part of the whole story – the victim, our salt lamp. What happened when our salt broke? Usually, I’d get a replacement for the lamp immediately, but somehow I got caught up with work and didn’t have enough time to do so. And we had to stay without the lamp for quite a while.
What to Do When Your Himalayan Salt Lamp Breaks
It is a hard time, I've been there; here's how I handled it !
How did the salt lamp help me?
I have always been suffering from dust allergies for years now, and have been heavily dependent on nasal sprays for relief. Even a small amount of dust can also trigger a sneezing spree in me. But ever since I’ve bought a Himalayan salt lamp, my allergies began to be in control, thanks to the air purification and dust filtering role of the salt.
Also, as a writer, my work schedules can be really crazy and stressful. I work at odd times often, and this affected my sleep cycles. And with this salt lamp, I have even noticed that my sleeping patterns have become considerably better over time.
What changes did I see after the lamp was broken?
Once my cousin knocked off the lamp into pieces, I observed that my sneezing bout had been back again, though slowly. Also, I wasn’t able to sleep as peacefully, though it was not glaringly evident. One day, it struck to me that it might be the aftermath of the breaking of my Himalayan salt lamp. Fortunately, I saved the broken pieces aside. And so I immediately looked it up to see what I can do – whether there’s any way to repair it or do something else about it.
Can salt lamps be repaired?
Truth be told, salt lamps are fragile. If yours doesn’t break after a fall or a heavy pressure applied to it, the chances are that its fake. Sometime, these lamps could even develop cracks, and most of them wouldn’t survive a fall, thanks to my cousin for proving this to me. And then there’s the chipping of the salt too, which can happen, but rarely.
Smaller cracks seemed easier to repair with the help of some salt powder, filling in the cracks and spraying water to fix it. But my salt lamp was in pieces. There’s no way that I could repair it and make it look flawless.
Is there actually a way to work around with broken salt lamps?
I was a little disheartened to throw my salt lamp away. But then I remembered something. While researching about the salt lamp before the purchase, I have read that the Himalayan salts are actually edible. That means I can add them to food, and they give a distinct and better flavor to the food than regular table salt. So, I thought why not give it a shot? I ground a few of the broken blocks of salt into a powder. And since it was a little coarse, I decided to season my salads with it, by mixing it up with little olive oil, instead of using it for cooking. I must say, that really gave my salad a peculiar taste, and it was great.
Now I was left with some more salt, and I wondered what else I could do with the broken leftovers of this ingeniously fantastic salt lamp? A little more digging on the internet, I learned that they could be used both as a foot soak or a bath salt. I was pleased. I mean who wouldn’t want to relax their feet or have a calming bath with some amazing salts in it. So I did. I ground the salt block, coarser than before and added them to the water for about 20 minutes, and I had my very own foot spa day along with an unwinding bath at home.
And oh, before I forget, there’s another use for the salt as well. It works wonders in relieving your neck pain and headaches. You might be thinking how? You can make a Himalayan Salt heating and cooling pouch all by yourself with these leftovers, and use it as a compress whenever you’re feeling a little pain. I would have done that as well, but sadly, I didn’t have much salt left. I might probably save it for some other time when my cousin decides to break my replacement lamp as well. Ha-ha!
The Result?
So there, people, from experiencing an accidental fall to ending up in my food and as a foot soak, this is what happened to me when my Himalayan salt lamp broke. All in all, it was a great adventure. Now, what are you thinking of doing with your broken lamp?
You might have seen the term “RSVP” written on many invitations like a cocktail party, birthday party, wedding invitation, or other invitations for an event. Did you actually ever think what the term means? The term “RSVP” is actually an abbreviation of the French phrase “Répondez s'il vous plaît” meaning “Respond please” that has found its place in mainstream English.
If this term is written on an invitation, it means the host asks the guests to inform if they are planning to attend the party or not. It followed in from the etiquette rules followed by most Western cultures to inform the host if you have received a written or formal invitation.
This makes it easy for the host to know the head-count of the guests attending the planned party and order the number of plates or make other arrangements for the party. This term is often confused with “Regrets only” where you only need to respond if you are not attending.
If only RSVP is mentioned, you should always respond to an invitation even if you are going to attend the party. Missing out on not responding to the host within the specified date creates troubles for the host in making the arrangements for the celebration.
Any invitation to RSVP contains instructions on how to inform the host. A wedding invitation or any other formal invitations are enclosed with a response card which the guests can use to convey the message by simply mailing it back. With strict etiquette rules, you must write your reply to a written invitation.
With informal invitations, you can either call or text the host on the phone number provided. Some informal invitations have the option to accept or decline through social media platforms.
In this digital age, the use of electronic RSVP invitations has gained its popularity reducing the chances of any responses getting lost in the mail. They either come with email addresses where you can respond in writing or use links to any site usually social media where you can choose to accept or decline with the use of buttons.
Some hosts send "Save the Date" cards before sending the RSVP invitations to make the guests aware of the place and date of the celebration. Usually, these are sent out when the location of the party is in a distant place to allow the guests make travel plans or the date of the event to be held quite a considerable time in future.
RSVP, Regrets only
With the term "Regrets only", you are supposed to inform the host only if you are unable to attend the party because the host expects you to be present. Make sure to respond to the host as instructed if you are not attending. If you intend to attend the party, it is better not to reply as it might create confusion. You can use other ways to show your enthusiasm to attend the party.
If you are the host, don’t use “RSVP, Regrets only” invitations if you can’t get any refund for guests who have not turned up or if you need an exact headcount to make the party arrangements. Also, it is recommended not to use these invitations if you panic to know who is coming and end up calling or emailing all your guests.
Most importantly, it is a simple courtesy to let the host know who was nice to invite you even if it is to say that you are not coming with regret.
RSVP, Number of Guests
Some invitations come with a mention of the people who can accompany you like couples are often referred to as "together," or at times they can be mentioned as "family" which also includes your children. There are also invitations where you can bring in guests along with you which will include a number written like "+1," and if there is no mention, the invitation is explicitly for you only.
You can also write the number of guests accompanying you in the correct black space. The invitation usually has the details of the total number of guests who can accompany. Just check with the host if the total number of guests exceeds the limitation to see if any arrangements can be made to accommodate more guests. Or you may simply decline the invitation if you are unable to leave them behind.
RSVP Timing
Usually, invitation requesting an RSVP requires the guest to respond within a specified so that the host gets a proper head-count beforehand to make appropriate arrangements for the party. It's always better to let the host know as soon as possible without delay. This helps the host to make arrangements for guests of other invitees or can also invite others who were not on the initial list of invitees.
If you are unsure whether you are going to attend the party or not, it's better to decline before the deadline. It is good to be honest about your situation and explain to the host with regret.
Changing or Canceling RSVP
Without a strong reason, you should not cancel an RSVP as the host had already planned and made arrangements based on your attendance. It creates a bad impression if you cancel an RSVP without a sound reason because it might lead to the host of not inviting you in any future events. Strong reasons to cancel an RSVP are death in the family, serious illness, or any other emergencies.
If you have previously informed the host that you will not be able to make it to the party but later decided to attend, you can check with the host, but you need to understand that in some situations, the host might not be able to alter plans. Make sure to express your understanding in these situations.
No Requested RSVP
Sometimes an invitation does not mention RSVP which does not obligate you to respond. However, it is advisable to check with the host and inform whether you are coming or not, especially if you are bringing guests because it might happen that the host has forgotten to include the RSVP request.
Importance of RSVP
It is very important to RSVP because the host makes the decision based on your response. If you think that you don't want to disappoint the host by saying a no and don't RSVP, you are wrong because this creates more trouble for the host in making the arrangements. If you are unsure of the situation and don't RSVP within the specified date to commit, this also causes difficulty for the host. In these situations, let the host know about this if they can manage some arrangements which are uncertain.
Final Words
The author of etiquette books and American journalist, Judith Martin, who is better known as “Miss Manners” which is the pen name states that “RSVP” is a polite way of reminding people: You should reply whenever you receive an invitation. So, if you receive an invitation next time, just respond to your host promptly.
If you need a specialized nailer that you can use around the house to work on cabinets, trims, and moldings, a brad nailer is an excellent product.
We wanted to work on some DIY projects inside, which required detailed wood applications. With a brad nailer that fired brads efficiently, we were able to bind our wood trims correctly.
It is mainly a smaller type of finish nailer, but unlike the bigger version, this one takes care of more minor work needs. If you use a big device to work on tiny parts or thin surfaces, there is a chance that you will crack it.
With a brad nailer, we felt completely safe while using it for our home projects. Read on to find out about the different purposes it is used for and the benefits it comes with.
What Do You Use a Brad Nailer For?
This device has a remarkable way of providing a strong bond between thin wooden trims without splitting or cracking them. It uses thin 18-gauge brads that measure 2 inches long or smaller. Since they are relatively tinier than most nails, they do not make a big hole. This prevents any unnecessary cracking of a thin surface.
If you are looking for a product for home renovations, this is an excellent device to have in your toolbox. Why, you may ask? Because it makes very detailed trims on wooden surfaces of furniture, cabinets, and even smaller objects like photo frames.
Also, it can be used for coves, baseball shoe remodeling, and railings. If you are into making home furniture, a top-notch brad nailer will provide the peace of mind you deserve!
Safety
A brad nailer is considered to be comparatively safer than finish nailers. This is because of the relatively tinier size of the nails. But again, these could cause injury if proper precautions are not taken. So, it is essential that you wear safety glasses to protect your eyes.
Make sure there is no loose end of clothing hanging from your outfit. Also, use hearing protection in case you are working inside a closed space with a noisy device. Since the machine uses an air compressor, the sound level may go up. But again, it does not use up a lot of compressed air, and the noise can be controlled.
Types of Brad Nails
There are mainly two types of brad nailers, the 18-gauge and the 21-gauge one. The one which is most frequently used is the 18-gauge version. This one is fit for woodwork and will be a better choice to go for in case you need it to bind thin wood films.
Going forward, since you will mostly choose an 18-gauge version for your household work, the next most crucial thing to know is the height of required fasteners. The average nail length that this model uses is between ⅝ inch to 2 inches long.
Before you choose the nail size, remember that the length of these nails must be three times the width or thickness of a wooden block that you are nailing it with. If you are wondering why this is essential, the nails need to be long enough to pierce through the wood surface and then set inside another surface. Only then will it be able to perfectly attach both the planes.
Electric Brad Nailer
A brad nailer can be a superb gadget when you are looking to modify your interiors or work on a DIY project. It helps you go about your work smoothly and come up with brilliant designs.
But if a pneumatic model is not what is desired as you do not want to link it to a compressor whenever you use it, we have a solution! The electric brad nailer is one of the best alternatives available today as it does not use an air compressor or hose to perform.
Instead, it is available in corded and in cordless forms, which are operated with the help of cells. The only requirement is nail strips, and when you have a few, you can begin working and hammering in seconds. They are way easier to get started and work efficiently.
These devices can fire 18-gauge brads with perfection. They operate simply with the electric motor loading an air compressor chamber. As the chamber releases air, the nails start firing. Here we should say that the pneumatic model is more powerful though the electric model can drive 2-inch long nails into a thin wooden trim with ease.
The best part about this product is that since it is not connected to an air compressor, you can take it around easily. So, you can perform a wide range of tasks one after the other, beginning from installing trim on windows and doors to various furniture you have in the room.
Conclusion
It is essential to distinguish between a brad nailer and a finish nailer because both are not the same. A finish nailer can crack or split a thin board if it is used on one while a brad nailer is suitable for thinner surfaces.
One safety tip which we would like to give you here is to not try using a brad nailer too close to the end of the boards. This may result in splitting, so one should use this machine to attach the surfaces leaving a good margin near all the edges.
Also, try making sure that there are no knots in the wooden piece as the nails can easily bend if they come upon a knot. This can lead to the chipping of a side of the wood.
Now that you know everything about a brad nailer, it is time to try using it for yourself. For any additional help, follow one of the numerous tutorial videos available. Let us know about your experience in the comments section below.
But you also need another important thing - a fuel to run the power steering system of the car. This is where the power steering fluid comes in. It is a hydraulic liquid, which allows for the easy transmission of power from the wheel to the steering mechanism of the car.
Another key function of this fluid is to ensure and maintain the smooth working of the mechanism by protecting and lubricating all parts of the system. Long story short, this fluid moves your car.
In its absence, not only does your car face serious operational problems, but the entire steering mechanism is also compromised.
But what color is this fluid? And how do you recognize what it indicates?
If you are left wondering, read on to learn all about the colors of power steering fluid and put your doubts to rest!
What should the ideal color of a power steering fluid be?
As a defining characteristic, color plays a major role in understanding power steering fluids.
They come in a variety of hues that differ greatly from model to model, or brand to brand. You may have a number of questions: is your steering fluid of the color it is supposed to be? Has it changed since the time you bought it?
These are questions that befuddle the consumer while handling a new vehicle. A simplified answer would be: even though the color of the fluid varies from one manufacturer to the next, the most common ones are pink, red, or clear.
However, an important point must be kept in mind in order to avoid problems in the functioning of your car. The color is prone to change, and this is the indication that you must pay attention to.
A change of color from red, pink, or clear to black or brown is a surefire sign of contamination. It means that the fluid may have become dirty and unfit for use. This usually happens due to prolonged use, and it must be replaced immediately to mitigate the damage.
What does a leaking power steering fluid look like?
Leakage in the car is a serious matter and can leave you utterly frustrated and confused. How do you fix a problem if you can’t tell the source? The fluid could be anything: your auto-transmission fluid, or instead, your power steering fluid!
Most manufactured options are dyed pink or red, so as to be distinguishable from other fluids in the vehicle. Others dye it clear, which usually turns yellow upon long-term use. And the former is likely to change into dark brown or black.
So in case you see a yellow, reddish, pink, brown, or black-ish liquid flowing out, there is a high possibility that it is from the power steering system of your car.
Different colors point to different conditions. Knowing the various indications of each color is a smart step towards identifying the underlying issue, and thus, fixing it.
Let’s take a look at the shades.
Light Brown to Black
This particular shade does not mean trouble for your power steering system every time. Such liquids are found even elsewhere in your car. It may be motor oil, which is normally seen around the center of the car. It could also be lube oil if it’s light brown with a stench similar to that of a rotten egg. These leaks are again found in the center or the rear axle.
Light Yellow to Dark Brown
A yellowish fluid is likely to be the brake fluid more than anything else. So while a leaking yellow liquid means all is well with your steering system, you should probably take a good look at your brakes!
However, brown can be super confusing as it could mean any one of the two: brake fluids or motor oil. The trick is to touch and feel the texture. If it’s slippery, it is the brake fluid; motor oil is much thicker.
Whatever its source, a leak is a serious issue especially when it comes to brakes. Not a matter to be taken lightly, a leaking brake system can wreak havoc on your driving and must be addressed immediately.
Red or Reddish
A reddish shade is possibly the surest sign that your power steering fluid is leaking. They are dyed red or pink precisely to stand apart from the other fluids. But how can you be sure?
To correctly identify the problem, first inspect the location of the leak. A leaking power steering fluid is usually to be found under the front portion of the car.
Secondly, in case of leakage, the fluid may also be smeared across the power steering pump, or below the reservoir. If it feels runny and slippery to touch, you may definitively conclude that it is indeed the power steering liquid.
Orange
A leaking orange fluid could be the transmission fluid, one that is likely to be found around the center of your car. The color is between light orange and dark orange, and may also be reddish-brown.
Sometimes, antifreeze leaks mixed with rust may produce a similar color leading to further confusion. However, that mixture is of a thin consistency and does not have a specific location of leakage.
Yellow, Green, or Pink
Bright colors like these are predominantly used in the water-cooling system. Pink can point to both, the power steering fluid as well as a coolant. You can use the location to guide you, as the latter is found around water-pump bearings and the pump gasket.
Your car’s age is an important factor in deciding whether a coolant leak should be a concern or not. An old vehicle is prone to such leakages and it’s only normal. However, if your car is new and faces such problems, then it’s time to consult an expert.
Clear
A clear liquid could be either the power steering fluid or plain water. Excess condensation can lead your air conditioner to expel some amount of water. But this is not something to worry about.
However, if it indeed is the power steering liquid, that could pose problems. To be sure, do the simplest test and touch it. If it does not feel like water but is slightly sticky, it’s a leakage of the power steering fluid.
Top Three Power Steering Fluids
With that, we have covered the essential information on the color of your power steering fluid. And also for your convenience, we have picked out the top three power steering fluids available in the market. Take a look!
Unique friction-free technology for noise-free operation
Advanced formula for exceptional performance and protection in severe work conditions
Excellent low-temperature performance for protection against cavitation
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
What color is the Honda Power Steering Fluid?
Although most power steering fluids are dyed red, pink, or clear, the Honda Power Steering Fluid is of a bright golden hue.
What color should a power steering fluid be?
They vary in color, and have a wide variety of hues ranging from brown and red to pink and clear. Black and dark brown are usually indicators of contaminants.
Are there other ways to detect if the fluid is still clean and safe for use?
Apart from color, the smell is the best indicator. A burnt smell usually means there might be a problem with the fluid.
What color is Maxlife Valvoline Power Steering Fluid?
Most fluids from this brand are dyed an amber hue and are not suitable for Honda vehicles. However, they have a stop-leak feature that prevents leakage from the reservoir.
What color is Dexron II Power Steering Fluid?
Power steering fluids from Dexron also double up as auto transmission fluids and are red in color.
Lastly
Like all the best things in life, a good power steering fluid requires maintenance and care on your part.
To ensure that your car is up and running and that there are no squeaks that go unaccounted for, the power steering fluid must be checked and replaced regularly. Ideally, you should change it every four to five years. Another way would be to switch it up after having driven the car for 50,000 miles.
If you notice a change in color, don’t let it fester. If the fluid turns dirty, brown or black, then it’s probably time to replace it. Keep in mind the brands you use; they make all the difference to efficiency. Reputed brands come with a feature to prevent leakages, thus providing greater safety for both you as well as your car.
Gray is one multifaceted color that is fun to work with.
However, we understand if you're finding it difficult to match colors for the first time. Matching colors to create a harmonious appearance may seem easy at first, but any interior designer can tell you there are several nuances to consider.
When colors don't make sense, the simplest thing to do is fall back on the neutrals. Neutrals do not disappoint, no matter where you place them, and gray is simply the most superior of them all. It's not just us; many experts agree that gray is one of the most versatile choices for creating a timeless, calming atmosphere in any space.
And while gray is just a mixture of black and white, there are tons of gray hues that need care when pairing with any color. A deeper look into the undertones is necessary to get the harmonious color combination you are looking for. Read till the end to find the best color goes with gray.
Colors That Go With Gray
1. Steel Gray With Brown And Yellow
A bedroom with gray, white, warm brown, and honey-yellow colors makes for a soothing combination. While the steel gray will have a hint of blue undertones, it somehow goes well with warmer shades of brown and yellow.
To get the best of this combination, you can use the gray for walls, curtains, carpets, and the head stead of the bed. Then add different gray shades but make sure they lean towards the warmer side of the palette for a gentle contrast. To jazz up further, include lines and texture in the bedding and carpets.
2. Charcoal Gray With Blush Pink
It's a tried and tested combination- gray and pink are superb companions if you select the correct shade. We think that adding charcoal gray to pastel pink creates a cohesive look because it allows the lighter color to pop. The dark and dramatic gray adds cool tones that create a striking contrast with pale pink.
A clever way to improve the warmth in such a room is by adding brass pieces to the decoration. The color schemes might seem unusual at first but surprisingly work well if you put them together.
3. Pale Gray With Classic Crisp White
You can't go wrong with the classic combination of pale gray with bright white. Whether it's the living room, lounge, or bedroom, this combination can easily adapt to any style you select. When it comes to darker grays, proportion, and tone can change the effect entirely.
So, if you are going for a breezy, dreamy look, use clean white furniture, adding a few gray pillows to the mix. If the end result is too simplistic for you, using textures like weaves, marble, wood, and even rugs in fluffy whites will add interest.
4. Neutral Gray With Sage Green
Hues of green are good with gray, but sage green provides by far the most superior gray-green combo that we know of. This collaboration will remind you of earthy features and natural elements and show up as a clean and calming combination.
If you want to maintain a mostly gray room but introduce a secondary accent color, light green will be the ideal choice. Pale gray and light green will blend in together to create a harmonious mix of neutral colors. But if this happens to look too light overall, you can add depth and color by introducing dark brown and wooden textures.
5. Gray With Beige, Red, And Orange
Natural gray and beige is a cozy and subtle pairings that can lighten the mood of any room. But if you want to add a hint of drama or a pop of color, orange and red go surprisingly well with this combo. The intensity of red and orange is up to you.
A subtle addition would look like a few pillows or curtains in warm orange with a background of gray and beige carpets. But if you want to create a statement section, adding red or orange chairs with light shades of gray and beige should do the trick. Navy blue and cobalt blue will also have the same eye-catching effect but will add a cooler tone to the space.
Why Gray Is a Popular Color For Interiors
1. Gray Adds Elegance To Any Interior Style
Gray is the perfect color to add a modern yet classic appeal to interiors. Lighter shades on the walls are used to create a spacious and airy atmosphere. But adding darker gray and its various shades creates a cozier vibe, especially during winter.
The good thing about using gray for interiors is that it allows other elements to shine. Natural wood, velvet, or even leather look great in varying shades of gray. And if you are worried about the room looking dull after selecting gray as the primary color, do not worry.
The final result does not have to be a monochromatic look. Instead, you can add plenty of bold color choices for contrast. Predominantly wooden furniture with gray walls gives a contemporary feel to any kitchen or dining room.
2. Gray Is The Most Versatile Color
When you think of neutrals, gray might be one of the first colors that pop up in your mind. Needless to say, this color is a perfect match for any other neutral color, too. You don't see this kind of flexibility with any other neutral shade.
Since it is neither black nor white, not too dark and not too light, there are endless ways in which you can use gray shades. Combining light gray with beige, cream, or taupe creates a soft palette for the bedroom, giving it an unsurpassed cozy feeling.
3. Gray Is Understated And Minimalist
You could reduce unwanted clutter from your interiors and bring quality pieces for a relaxed, minimalist room. Instead of decorating each aspect with various colors, select one or two and combine them with gray for a Scandinavian-inspired interior. Beige, pink, navy blue, and even orange are great for adding personality and oomph to a clean gray and white room.
4. Gray Allows Natural Elements To Take Center Stage
If you select the correct shade, a gray room can be the most soothing and relaxing corner of your house. And it also pairs beautifully with natural elements so that you can add plenty of natural woods, furniture, and plants with the cool-toned gray background.
Since gray is a neutral color, it complements the rustic elements in the room and helps them appear warmer. If you are looking for a stark contrast, use the same natural elements with a backdrop of coal gray and see the splendid effect.
For example, you could use gray tones on the walls, countertops, and chairs with a lighter wooden dining table. Simply adding plenty of natural light to the mix will create a charming farmhouse look.
5. Gray Combines Perfectly With Bold And Pastels Alike
The gray color palette does not distract from other elements and colors added to the room. This is why it is the perfect background color for bright and muted colors alike. Nowadays, pops of a vibrant color like bright red are popular for living rooms and lounges. We will also discuss how to make a statement with bright colors with tones of gray in this article.
But if pastel colors are your calling, there is no need to change the gray background. Light blue, pink, and green go with gray exceptionally well. Adding accent pillows is a smart way to add texture to gray couches and carpets.
Final Words
In conclusion, we would like to say that gray can be your go-to option for interiors because it goes well with almost any color you can think of. You can create the best possible combination by playing with tones and adding colorful or white shades to gray.
And, if you adore monochromatic looks, don't be afraid to pair gray with gray. We'll admit it's a risky move because the room can easily become dull with an overdose of gray. However, the challenge is to discover contrasts and differences in tones to create harmony within the gray color scheme.
Have fun decorating the space with contrasting and neutral tones to complete the look.
An angle grinder is a handheld power tool that can be used to perform a series of mechanical tasks like cutting, grinding, and polishing. When equipped with a grinding or diamond blade, the tool cuts concrete efficiently.
Do you think that working with concrete is a messy business? If you aren’t very experienced in DIY projects but would like to learn a thing or two about angle grinders, then this guide is for you.
Angle grinders are versatile tools that can be used to do an array of mechanical tasks. Whether you want to cut a concrete block or polish a tile, an angle grinder can do the job perfectly.
Different Attachments For An Angle Grinder
Angle grinders are highly versatile and can be equipped with a variety of discs to suit the task at hand. From grinding to cutting and from sanding to polishing, an angle grinder can be used to do any job.
1. Angle Grinder Discs
Grinding discs are the most common ones and come in different sizes and types. Just like sandpaper, their hardness is measured in terms of grit. A higher grit number indicates less coarse texture, while a disc of a lower grit level is more coarse.
The latter can grind faster, but it produces more sparks while working and gives a rough look to the final product. When our team compared both the types, we noticed that angle grinder cut concrete more efficiently when it was equipped with higher grit disc.
Moving on to its usage, grinding blades can be used to remove excess material from a surface, prep up metal before welding, and clean up cuts. You can use them to sharpen your gardening tools or grind metals before welding.
2. Cut-Off Wheels
As the name suggests, cut-off wheels are used for slicing metal. They are the most dangerous type of angle grinder blades due to their thin build for delivering accurate cuts. They are the best for doing detailed work, but we suggest being extra careful while working with them. In case you abruptly change the position of the grinder, a cutting blade can easily shatter, and the small flying parts can cause serious injuries.
Moreover, you can use cut-off discs for cutting metal tubes, bars, and sheets. They are also good for altering the length of bolts and cutting welds. Just ensure that you are properly geared up while using them.
3. Flap Blades
Moving on, a flap disc is quite similar to a grinding wheel but is primarily used for finishing. It has a smooth texture and can be used to polish ceramic tile, metal, concrete materials, and several other solid materials. Just like grinding blades, flap discs also come in different grit levels. The higher the grit, the smoother the blade will be.
If you are looking for an angle grinder attachment to remove scratches and burrs from your project, then a flap disc is a competent choice. It can also be used to smoothen the edges and polish gouged-up metal.
4. Wire Discs
Wire discs are brush instruments made with wire bristles typically used for cleaning paint and rust. Depending on their texture, wire discs are of two types - crimped and knotted. The former has wavy or twisted filaments and is used for light polishing, while the latter, with metal wire loops, is better suited for heavy brushing.
These attachments are ideal for scraping rust and corrosion, removing waste from metal and concrete surfaces, washing, surface painting, mixing welds, polishing, and deburring. Furthermore, if you want to remove resin from a concrete block, then this one is your best bet.
5. Segmented Rim Diamond Blades
Diamond blades are hands down the sharpest angle grinder attachments. They are called so because the wheels have segmented rims and synthetic diamonds at the edge. The sharpness and durability of the blade increase with its number of segments.
Owing to their diamond rims, the blades can be used to cut hard-to-penetrate and tough materials like granite, porcelain tile, concrete pavers, etc. It is used for dry and wet blade operations alike and is efficient for both types of cutting.
6. Polishing Pads
Lastly, polishing pads are made of smooth material and are used for gently polishing a surface. You can find a lot of options on the market and choose one based on the desired smoothness level. For instance, if you want to polish a dent in your car, then a buffing wheel made of wool is the perfect option, as you don’t want to scratch it.
However, if you want to polish concrete blocks, then you can choose a more coarse polishing pad. Another thing worth noting while using these attachments is the speed. As a rule of thumb, maintain an optimum speed while using polishing pads, as going faster can damage the surface while going slower won’t make much of a difference to the finished product.
Are Angle Grinder Blades Universal?
Angle grinder blades are generally universaland can be used with any model. However, some grinders might come with unique orientations and connecting ports, so it is best to check your exact model before buying a blade.
What Angle Grinder Blade Cuts Metal?
Metal is a tough material, and it takes enormous strength for tools to cut through it. Therefore, it is essential to select the right angle grinder blade for cutting metal. If you pick the wrong one, the blade can shatter during the process and injure you. While a sharp and thin blade is more prone to slipping, a blunt one can leave the job unfinished.
To strike the right balance, we suggest working with cut-off or diamond blades. Both these attachments are sharp, cut deeper, and make clean cuts. This eliminates scratches and burrs, giving a smooth and finished edge to the metal pieces.
How To Use Angle Grinder Blade To Cut Concrete?
We told you how to equip your angle grinder according to the task, be it cutting metal or concrete. Now let’s discuss how to use your handy tool to perform that task, as in, how to cut concrete. Concrete cutting process can be daunting, but here are a few simple steps you can try:
1. Put On Safety Gear
Handling an angle grinder blade is no easy task, and even some experienced DIYers are prone to hurting themselves while using it. So, as a rule of thumb, wear proper personal protective equipment to keep yourself safe from accidents and injuries. A complete protective kit for cutting concrete comprises the following gear:
Safety glasses to keep your eyes safe from debris and sparks
Earmuffs to stay clear of the noise
A dust shield or face mask so that you don’t inhale any powdered concrete dust or silica
Gloves for holding the handle better and preventing slips and accidental cuts
Boots to stay safe from debris
Tightly-fitted clothes so that fabric doesn’t get caught by the angle grinder disc
2. Prep Up Your Workspace
Once you have put on the safety gear, you need to prepare your workspace. We suggest using the angle grinder in an open and clear area where there are not many people, especially kids. Try and avoid using it in your garage because it is usually cramped up with discarded stuff. Declutter your workspace, taking special care that the floor isn’t littered so that you don’t trip and fall.
Equip your angle grinder beforehand and set its disc by opening the spindle and inserting the preferred diamond blade. After equipping the blade, move on to the concrete slab you will be cutting.
Make markings using chalk and ruler to ensure perfect cuts. If the block you want to cut is small, then we emphasize clamping it down to your workstation. That’s because you will be more prone to slips due to the smaller working surface, not to forget that tiny pieces fly more easily while cutting.
3. Fire Up The Angle Grinder
When everything is ready, plug in your angle grinder to a power source and adjust the blade guard such that it is positioned between the tool and your body. Now turn it on, and once the disc reaches its maximum speed, let it run for at least half a minute.
4. Cut The Concrete Slab
Move the grinder toward a concrete slab at an angle of 90° and make a cut of nearly half the depth of the slab. After making the initial divot, keep cutting until you reach your desired depth by moving the grinder to and fro.
Start carefully with a light hand, cut slower, and eventually work your way through the concrete. You can apply more pressure as the cut gets deeper. Just make sure that you don’t force the blade into the slab. After a minute or so, you will gain momentum and will be able to cut the slab effortlessly.
Angle Grinder Blade For Concrete Conclusion
An angle grinder is the only tool that can be used for a plethora of tasks, such as grinding, polishing, cutting, deburring, etc. It is a handy device that comes with different types of attachments and handle accessories to be better suited for carrying out different projects.
However, if you are looking for an attachment that is the best for cutting concrete, then we recommend using diamond blades. That’s because these are the sharpest and cut the concrete’s surface efficiently.
That said, we have reached the end of this informative guide. Thanks for reading, and do try using an angle grinder for cutting concrete. We’ll see you next time!
Different angle grinder discs such as grinding wheels, cut-off wheels, flat discs, and others can be used for carving, shaping, and cutting wood. However, the power tool should be used carefully with the right technique, or else it can cause a potential hazard.
If you have delved into woodworking in the past, then you will know that it is a fairly complex task. Thankfully, with the help of tools, such as an angle grinder, the process can be made a little easier.
But if you haven’t used an angle grinder a lot before, you may not know what grinding disc to use for cutting wood. And without the right disc, you may end up complicating the task even further.
That’s why we have prepared this guide to give you an idea about what angle grinding disc to use for woodworking. Let’s dive in!
What Is An Angle Grinder Disc?
An angle grinder is a handheld power tool that can be used for a wide range of tasks, such as polishing, cutting, grinding, and so on.
The tool uses a disc rotating at high speeds to accomplish these tasks. Because of this reason, it is also known as a disc grinder. This disc is strong enough to cut through wood and other rigid materials, such as rocks and metals.
Needless to say, it plays a crucial role in the effectiveness of angle grinders. But it is important to note that the disc is not universal by design and cannot be used on all types of surfaces. Different discs exist today, with each being suited for a particular kind of task. We have discussed them later on in this guide, so we suggest that you read on.
Can You Use An Angle Grinder For Woodworking?
As you can guess by now, the answer to this question is yes but it does pose certain safety risks. That’s why it’s crucial that you use the correct disc in the angle grinder to carve and cut wood.
For instance, if you have a wood carving disc attached to the machine, then make sure to use it only for carving wood. If you use it for any other task, you run the risk of damaging the machine, not to mention messing up the wooden materials.
Similarly, the technique you are using should be considered too. After all, this is a powerful tool that uses sharp high-speed blades to get the work done. So, if you use the incorrect technique, then the chances of making mistakes increases. And even the slightest mistake while operating the angle grinder can lead to serious injuries.
What Types Of Angle Grinder Discs Are There?
Broadly speaking, there are several types of angle grinder discs in existence, with each having a specific use case. In this regard, the ones which are commonly used in woodworking have been discussed below.
1. Grinding Wheel
The grinding wheel is the most basic disc used in an angle grinder. These wheels are available in different diameters and feature a ribbed grinding edge that helps to cut through wood or any other material.
A grinding wheel is suitable for use in most wood fabrication tasks, which provides a decent degree of versatility. However, they cannot be used for high-precision wood carving and cutting. Also, these wheels have a tendency to heat up quickly during usage, which means you need to be careful while using them.
2. Flap Disc
If you want to polish the wood surface, then this is the disc that you need to use. Flap discs have an abrasive surface, which essentially makes them the angle grinder equivalent of sandpaper.
As such, these discs can be used to chamfer edges, smoothen sharp corners and remove irregularities from the wood surface with high degrees of precision.
3. Ceramic Sanding Disc
The ceramic sanding disc is an alternative to the flap disc, typically used for sanding wood. It comes with an even more abrasive surface, which makes it a perfect pick for precision wood carving. Besides, the blade is made from ceramic materials instead of metal, which reduces its tendency to heat up during usage.
However, these discs are comparatively more expensive than normal flap discs, which is why they are not as commonly used by woodworkers.
4. Cut-Off Wheel
The cut-off wheel features a thin profile, complete with a sharp edge and tapered design, which makes it a great choice for cutting wood. Usually, these discs do not possess any sharp teeth at the edges, which facilitates a smoother cutting process.
In some cases, the disc surface may be rough, which allows for the abrasive cutting of wood. It smoothens the surfaces of the wood, ensuring that the cut edges do not have any imperfections.
5. Diamond Disc
Also known as a diamond saw blade, this disc is embedded with abrasive diamond shards at the edges. As such, it is even more effective in cutting wood than regular metal cutting blades. In fact, if you were wondering what angle grinder blade cuts metal, concrete, and tiles in addition to wood, then this is the answer to it.
However, its diamond-embedded design makes it a fairly expensive option compared to a regular metal-cutting disc. That’s why it’s only used by woodworkers as the last resort to cut through tough lumber.
How Do You Use An Angle Grinder To Cut Wood?
Provided you use the right disc and observe all the necessary safety measures, using angle grinders on wood is pretty straightforward.
All you need to do is turn on the power and hold the angle grinder with a steady hand at the correct angle and orientation. You also need to apply the right amount of pressure to get the job done quickly. But make sure not to rush it, as that can lead to accidents.
That said, you do need to keep some factors in mind to make the most of your angle grinder. These have been mentioned below.
A. Disc Diameter
The first thing that you need to consider when using an angle grinder to cut wood is the diameter of the wheel. You cannot use a large wheel since it will be more difficult to control. Besides, it might not fit the head of the grinder properly.
However, the diameter shouldn’t be very small either, as it will reduce the overall effectiveness of the tool.
B. Spinning Speed
When it comes to woodworking, you will find out that a single speed cannot be used for all types of tasks. The spinning speed necessary for cutting through wooden materials is considerably different from the spinning speed that is used for carving and shaping wood.
That is why most angle grinders come with a variable speed setting, which allows you to change the rotation speed accordingly. If you use the proper speed setting, then you can complete the task with higher precision and without any trouble.
Recommended Angle Grinder Disc Options For Wood
In this section, we have mentioned some of the best angle grinder discs you can use to cut wood. These discs are decently priced and will be efficient for most large and small jobs.
1. Arbortech TurboPlane
This blade is a great option for carving and shaping wood. It comes with carbide cutters embedded in sturdy steel frames for durability. What’s more, the blade design helps apply a strong shearing force on the wood, which produces uniform cuts.
2. King Arthur Lancelot
The King Arthur Lancelot comes with a chainsaw-like design, which makes it a great choice for aggressively carving through tough wood. However, it is a bit difficult to control due to its design, so you need to be careful while using it.
3. Graff Speed Cutter
If you want to cut through wood, then you will find the 3-toothed design of this cutting blade quite useful. The teeth geometry allows this wheel to shear through wood with very little effort. You can use the disc for occasional carving tasks too, which is a bonus.
4. Kutzall Extreme Shaping Disc
This is a highly abrasive blade that comes with numerous tungsten carbide teeth, specifically designed for sanding wood. The teeth extend all the way to the edges, which allows you to sand a large area at once. However, it generates a lot of dust, so make sure you use the proper protective gear.
Angle Grinder Safety
Safety is of the utmost importance when using an angle grinder for woodworking. Keeping that in mind, here are some useful safety tips that you should follow.
1. Wear Adequate Protective gear
It goes without saying that you need to keep yourself protected when using angle grinders. Using an angle grinder on wood generates a lot of dust that can get in your eyes, nose, or mouth. Not only that, but the grinding process can also be quite noisy up close. And of course, there are the usual operating risks for handling this tool.
So, make sure to wear safety goggles and masks to prevent breathing in the dust and debris. You should also wear suitable ear protection in the form of earmuffs so that the angle grinder noise does not bother you. Likewise, be sure to wear cut-resistant gloves and any other equipment that can protect you from physical injuries.
2. Declutter Your Workspace
Make sure that there are no unnecessary materials in the workplace, as they can interfere with the work and increase the likelihood of errors. Keep all of your tools, toolboxes, wires, and accessories away from the site but in an easily accessible location.
3. Have A Fire Extinguisher At Hand
It is always a good idea to keep a fire extinguisher handy when using an angle grinder for woodworking. That way, you can avoid major accidents if things go sideways for some reason.
On that note, we would suggest that you keep any flammable items away from the angle grinder as well.
4. Avoid Working In A Wet Area
If you intend to use an angle grinder for woodworking, then make sure that the workplace is clean and dry. Working in a wet environment can cause slipping accidents, which can be deadly with a powerful tool such as this.
Besides, the water on wet surfaces may cause short circuits and electrical hazards, both of which are equally dangerous.
What Other Power Tools Can You Use For Wood?
As we have mentioned before, an angle grinder is a great tool for woodworking. But considering all the safety precautions that you need to take, it cannot be considered the safest.
With that in mind, you can use circular saws as a safer alternative to an angle grinder. The circular saw blades are designed specifically for cutting and shearing wooden materials. For carving purposes, you can use miter saws, which have blades that can carve wood surfaces and smoothen edges with extreme precision.
Angle Grinder Disc For Wood Final Words
An angle grinder is, without a doubt, one of the most versatile power tools. Apart from woodworking, you can use an angle grinder disc for tiles, cutting concrete, plastic, and metal.
With the correct blades, you can drastically cut down on the time and effort required for such activities. Of course, you do need to use it carefully, or else you run the risk of getting badly injured. So, make sure to follow all the safety tips which have been highlighted in this guide.
An abrasive type 1 or type 27 angle grinder blade can effectively cut through metal of any density. With appropriate cutting techniques and safety protocols, the abrasive blade makes the cutting process extremely safe and efficient.
When tackling woodworking projects, you will inevitably face the conundrum of having to cut through metal. Using a hacksaw for the task can be taxing and time-consuming, and that’s where an angle grinder shows its versatility.
But before you grab your trusty grinder and start working, you should consider a few things about both the power tool and the blade. Let’s explore how you can maximize your efficiency by using the right metal cutting discs and the right techniques.
Cutting Sheet Metal With Angle Grinders
Angle grinders are capable of cutting through even the densest of metals, provided they are fitted with the right disc. And while grinders are usually used for refurbishing and polishing metal materials, you needn’t limit its use to that.
You can use your angle grinder for a variety of metalworking purposes, ranging from making knives to automobile body parts. Each application of this hand-held power tool can be performed with a metal disc that suits the job well.
A good angle grinder and blade combination will leave no room for complaints once you’ve finished with cutting dense steel and even sheet metal. And so, the role of a blade in metalwork cannot be understated. The right kind of disc will make cutting metal or polishing hard edges significantly easier.
The Right Cutting Blade For Metal
The right cutting blade for metalwork is an abrasive cut off disc, also known as a cutoff wheel. These discs have abrasives embedded in the grinding wheel suited for specific metals, such as aluminum cutting discs using aluminum oxide and silicon carbide abrasives. You have the option of using a one-blade-cuts-all disc, but they may turn out to be less effective than metal-specific abrasive discs.
Here is what you should consider when picking the right kind of metal cutting disc for your angle grinder.
1. The Make
Cutting discs best suited for metals are made with resinoid-bonded abrasives, which results in the abrasive materials being fused into the wheel. In short, the abrasives don’t wear off easily as the disc continues to age, enabling you to cut metals with it for longer.
2. The Durability
A cutting disc that breaks midway through a job is less than ideal, which is why the disc should be able to withstand prolonged pressure. To this end, most cutting wheels utilize fiberglass to strengthen them and resist damage when they are used.
3. The Thickness
Thinner discs cut metal faster and produce much less waste. These range from 0.04 to 0.045 inches in thickness and their point-of-contact with the cutting surface is minimal.
On the other hand, thicker discs cut slowly, produce more heat and can lead to the potential discoloration of the metal they cut. Thicker discs are also more durable, so if you’re willing to accept the trade-off, you may be able to work with them. Their thicknesses range from 0.06 to 0.09 inches.
4. The Cutting Depth
You can only fit a disc that can cut no deeper than 2.75 inches in a standard angle grinder. It would be wise to keep that in mind while looking into getting the correct cutting disc.
5. The Blade Type
There are several types of cutting discs designed to cut metal, but the ones best suited for the job are type 1 and type 27. These discs cater to different cutting needs, surfaces, and environments, giving you options when choosing one for your specific task.
Type 1 cutting discs are completely flat and are used to cut metal of all types, including mild steel. The downsides to using these is that they may make it difficult to make a flush cut and may break when used too much.
In contrast, the type 27 discs feature a depressed center that allows your cutting wheel to get closer to the metal. The trade-off with type 27 discs is the high cost and a narrower range of applications.
How To Use An Angle Grinder To Cut Metal
1. Using The Right Tools
Depending on the kind of metal you’re about to work on with an angle grinder, you’ll need an abrasive disc suited for the job. Hobbyists can get away with using an all-purpose disc for the job instead, as it’s more readily available.
You can also use a C-clamp to keep the metal in place before you begin cutting. The less your metal moves as you cut, the better and safer it will be.
Lastly, you can gather protective equipment such as safety goggles and earmuffs before you begin working. Sparks and stray pieces of metal may fly everywhere, and preventing any unfortunate injury as you work is paramount.
2. Check Machine And Cutting Wheel Condition
If you’ve been using the angle grinder habitually, you should check the machine before and after you use it. Over time, the handheld power tool can show wear and tear, and any chances of parts breaking and flying off should be reduced to the best of your abilities.
The same goes for the cutting wheel, and you should ensure twice over that it shows no signs of corrosion. If you see any, address the issue at once, or else you may see shattered chunks of the cutting wheel breaking apart and damaging your project. Worse still, it can lead to serious injury if you don’t don the appropriate safety gear.
3. Affix The Cutting disc
Next, secure the cutting disc properly to the angle grinder and ensure that the disc fits snugly. Type 1 discs need to have the flat side of the nut facing downward against the grinder, while type 27 discs need the protruding part of the nut facing down.
4. Final Checks
You can perform a few final checks before you begin slicing and shaping your metal. These tests ensure that the cutting process remains as safe as possible while giving you the best results.
See if:
The angle grinder turns on and functions properly
The metal is secured correctly with the C-clamp
Your protective gear (safety glasses and face shields) is in pristine condition
The cutting disc isn’t warped and doesn’t move abnormally
There are any hazardous objects in your vicinity
Once you’ve marked all these safety points off the checklist, you can move on to the next step of the process.
5. Turn The Grinder On
When you turn the angle grinder on, you should have the guard face your body. The guard will protect your fingers from getting caught in the cutting blade as you work, but remember to be careful!
You may position the machine in a manner that doesn’t require you to cross your arms while you cut. The last thing you’ll want happening while cutting is the grinder slipping from your hands, after all.
6. Cutting The Metal Right
Use the following checklist to ensure that you cut the surface well and prevent the cutting wheel from snapping:
Keep the cutting edge at a 90-degree angle with the metal
Be patient and take your time cutting the metal
Apply no more than moderate pressure on the wheel
Keep your eyes on the cutting surface
Don’t leave a cut unfinished, as it can lead to jagged metal edges
Angle Grinder Safety Tips
1. Workplace Safety
As you cut through metal, sparks will fly in all directions and may end up igniting flammables in your vicinity. These sparks can reach up to 1,800 F, which is why you should clear your workplace of anything that can easily catch fire.
These flammables include:
Wood and sawdust
Cardboard
Paper
Oils and fuel
Anything that uses aerosol
Power cables
2. Proper ventilation
Sparks may accompany fumes as well since metal discs can produce a lot of heat as they slice through metal. Keep your doors and windows open and if there’s a strong breeze coming in, position yourself in a way that directs the sparks away from your person.
3. Protective Gear Checklist
You should wear personal protective equipment while working with metal, such as:
Safety goggles for eye protection
Earmuffs
Face shield
Sturdy gloves
In addition to these, ensure that you don’t wear excessively loose clothing to reduce the risk of it getting caught in the machine. Clothing made of synthetic fibers is a no-go, as it can catch fire much more quickly than any organic piece of clothing. Lastly, wearing a long sleeve shirt to cover exposed skin on your arms is also a good idea to protect you from minor burns.
4. Fire Extinguisher
It’s a no-brainer to have a fire extinguisher within reach and ready to be used in a workshop. Ensure that the extinguisher works properly by testing its functionality regularly and refilling in case it is depleted in a previous use.
Angle Grinder Blade Cuts Metal Conclusion
Thus concludes our guide on angle grinder blades and how they can be used to cut metal. Metal can be quite difficult to slice through, but an abrasive metal cutting disc can effectively do the job.
If you’ve used angle grinders before, you may have noticed that the blade types used for metal are different from the angle grinder blade for concrete. The process for cutting metal requires extra safety precautions with the additional safety hazards that it poses, especially when compared to the process followed with angle grinder discs for wood.
As long as you have the right power tools and safety gear with you, the process is safe and highly efficient. All things considered, you can pick out the right cutting disc for the material of your choice and get to finishing that DIY project of yours!
Unfortunately, this product is discontinued on most e-commerce websites. Try this newer model WEN 34034 6-Amp Wood Lathe
The WEN 3420 Lathe is one of the most affordable options out there, but is it the right choice for you?
Well, we hope that you get the answer to your question after going through our comprehensive review. The unit is equipped with some great features for its price, making it a viable investment option for sure.
Having said that, it is also essential to consider its flaws in order to get a balanced idea. Yes, we wouldn’t say that this lathe from WEN is perfect. To be honest, no product is. But that doesn’t mean it shouldn’t be considered. So, through our guide, we bring you an unbiased review of the WEN 3420.
We decided to test out the unit for you, so we are quite positive about our findings. But the ultimate decision is in your hands.
So, without wasting any more time, let’s dive in.
WEN 3420 Lathe Review
For those who don’t know, WEN is a leading brand that deals with the manufacture of top-grade and affordable power tools. And the WEN 3420 Lathe is one of the many exceptional innovations from the brand. So, how about we discuss some of its incredible features?
Variable Speed Control
You will be pleased to know that the WEN 3420 Lathe features a speed control knob and a 2 amp slow start motor. In other words, it provides its users with complete control while working on various woodworking projects.
We were able to adjust its speed from 750 to 3200 rotations per minute by simply turning the knob in the right direction. You can increase the speed by turning it clockwise, and decrease it by turning it anticlockwise. Yes, it’s that simple! However, make sure to keep the pace at the lowest setting when you start the motor.
Capacity and Size
We loved the compact design of this lathe which comes with a surface area of 8 inches by 12 inches. This makes it ideal for most benchtops with a lack of sufficient space. Not only this but it can also be moved from one workstation to another.
It is always recommended to choose a lathe based on your workspace. That being said, we found the capacity and size of the WEN 3420 suitable for most workpieces. Furthermore, it includes a 5-inch faceplate, making it the best option for cups, turning bowls, and other non-spindle workpieces.
Easy Operation
As mentioned earlier, the unit comes with a variable speed control knob that allows you to adjust its speed settings easily. But that’s not all! Now, if you are a beginner, you might not know that a lathe requires a tool rest for flexibility and ease of movement. And this particular model comes with tool rests in two different sizes.
Having said that, we were amazed at the level of comfort the tool rest of this lathe offered. It enabled us to move it left to right and back to front with ease. In fact, you will also find a lock lever near the tool rest. This will aid you to keep it securely in the right position.
Furthermore, it comes with an on/off switch that makes it convenient to start or stop the motor as and when required. WEN has simplified the operation system of this unit so that every beginner can find it easy to use. And this is why it is a preferred choice for most first-timers.
Safety
When it comes to power tools and electrical appliances, safety should be your utmost priority. This is why it was essential for us to check out the safety features of the WEN 3420, and to be honest, we were quite impressed with our findings.
Now, you already know that the unit comes with an on/off switch for its easy operation. But that’s not all! It features a safety switch lock, which prevents the motor from accidentally restarting. You can start it once the key is put back in place.
The circuit breaker button is another exceptional safety feature of this lathe. It automatically switches off the unit in case of voltage fluctuations and overload. This, in turn, minimizes the cause of damage, keeping it safe and secure.
In such situations, allow the lathe to cool down for a while. You can then press the circuit reset button, and switch the motor on again. But remember to keep the speed low at the beginning to ensure safety. That being said, you don’t have to worry much since it comes with a slow-start motor, which starts gradually in order to maximize safety and minimize damage.
Apart from this, it is critical to follow the safety rules while using WEN 3420. For this reason, we would suggest you go through the instruction manual and thoroughly follow the safety guidelines. After all, safety depends on precautions!
Accessories
As we said, the WEN 3420 is one of the most affordable options available in the market today. And truth be told, seeing its price, we didn’t really expect it to come with so many great features. But what amazed us the most was the fact that it comes with a complete kit of accessories, which makes its operation even more convenient and comfortable.
We have already mentioned that it includes two tool rests and a 5-inch faceplate. So, by now, you must also know their functions. Apart from these two types of accessories, the tool comes with a tailstock, a knockout rod, a headstock spur center, and more.
The tailstock helped us set up the spindle at the desired position to get a tighter grip on the workpieces. On the other hand, you can use the knockout rod to remove the center cup when required. Not just that, but it also enables you to drill holes in the center of any of your workpieces.
Durability
When we invest in a product, we expect it to last us for a few years, if not a lifetime. On that note, you will be pleased to know that the WEN 3420 Lathe will surely ensure long-lasting performance. This is because of its sturdy solid cast-iron construction, which also makes it a handy power tool.
Furthermore, it is backed by a 2-year warranty from WEN. So, you can go ahead and buy this unit without worrying about its longevity. It is a reliable investment that will prove to be beneficial even in the long run.
What Could’ve Been Better?
There is no scope of the doubt when it comes to the functionality and performance of this safe lathe from WEN. However, we did come across a few drawbacks related to the model, but these aren’t deal-breakers.
Firstly, being a compact unit designed ideally for beginners, the WEN 3420 is suitable for smaller projects and DIY crafts. Why? Well, this is because of its low-powered slow start motor. Now, even though it minimizes damage and ensures safety, it lacks the power to tackle larger projects.
And secondly, we found the unit easy to operate, but it was quite noisy. The high level of sound produced by the motor may disturb you and your surroundings. Also, this might compromise your overall working experience.
That being said, despite its minor drawbacks, we would definitely recommend this lathe to first-timers who want to work on smaller projects.
Pros
On/off switch with safety lock
Slow start motor
Available at an affordable price
Includes a variety of accessories
Comes with a 2-year warranty
Cons
Noisy operation
Not suitable for larger projects
WEN 3420 Verdict
In our opinion, WEN 3420 is a must-have for every beginner despite its flaws. And there is really no harm in trying it out because it is a reliable investment option that’s not even too expensive.
The model is equipped with safety features, preventing unwanted accidents and damage. In fact, it is also durable and sturdy. So, you can lay your trust in it to ensure accurate and precise results for years to come. To sum up, if you need to tackle a small woodworking project, this should be your go-to option.
With this, we come to the end of our comprehensive review. And we hope by now you have made a decision.
Having a good quality grill is a key tool for having a backyard barbecue. But with so many high-quality options available in the market today, finding the perfect grill can be a tough nut to crack. Fortunately, there are some brands that stand out when it comes to quality grills, and Weber is definitely one of those companies. Here, we are going to take a quick look at the Weber Summit S-470 Gas Grill to find out if it’s a suitable option for you.
What makes the Summit S-470 a unique gas grill is that it offers you multiple cooking options. From simple tasks such as warming foods to smoking, grilling, searing or using it as a rotisserie, the Summit S-470 is a nice blend of all of these features in one single unit.
It’s without a doubt that the Weber Summit S-470 is on the high-end side of grills and will make a dent in your pockets. But, what you are going to get is a premium grill that’s manufactured using heavy-duty steel to ensure its longevity. What you get is an extremely well-built multi-function grill that’s going to last you for many years to come.
Specifications
Cooking space 470 square inches
Warming rack 112 square inches
Side burner 12,000 BTUs
Sear station burner 10,600 BTUs
Smoker burner 6,800 BTUs
Rear rotisserie burner 10,600 BTUs
Plus, 2-years warranty on the paint.
10-years warranty for grates and flavorizer bars
The Design
The design of the Weber Summit S-470 is another area where this grill stands out apart from delivering a host of functions. The unit is built with industrial grade stainless steel which is apparent right out the box. The stainless steel body is rust proof and a special coating makes cleaning it a breeze.
Weber has always laid emphasis on their grill’s design and the S-470 is no exception. The unit is tall enough to use comfortably for hours without getting tired of hunching over. The lines and curves that have been added for appeal do not give the grill a traditional boxy design. Instead, what you get is an outdoor grill that’s not necessarily the sleekest in the market, but offers top-shelf standards when it comes to both design and functionality.
The sturdy grill features a well-built shroud that’s over the enclosed cart, which provides better heat circulation while the food’s being cooked. Under that are the individual control knobs for all of the burners. The heavy duty control knobs feature red markings to enhance their appearance while providing the user with complete control over the grill.
Under that are two stainless steel doors which lead to the large cabinet space. Here, you can store away tools and other essentials while using the grill. The stand out feature of the S-470 has got to be the cooking surface itself. Instead of the traditional single cooking plate on the rig, you get double hot plates to cook more food faster.
The best part about using the Weber Summit S-470 is not only that it offers two hot plates for cooking, which is a full 470 square inches of cooking space. But, you get to take advantage of the different heat zones as well to cook at different temperatures simultaneously.
Features
The following are some of the features that make the Summit S-470 stand out.
Heavy-Duty Stainless-Steel Build
The S-470 boasts of a heavy duty stainless steel body. The rust-free coating on the stainless steel prevents the unit from getting rust, nicks, and scratches. The full-body stainless steel design also adds a premium feel to the grill, which makes it worth the investment.
Large Cooking Space
The Summit S-470 has many standout features, one of them being the significantly large cooking area. With the S-470, you get a sear station burner, a side burner, a smoke burner, and a rotisserie burner, all of which have been designed nicely into the grill, offering the user with more ways to cook than one.
With the large overall cooking space of 580 square inches, you can expect to get more done in less time, which is the main selling point of the brand.
Temperature Gauge
The double-layer stainless steel hood that protects the main cooking area has been fitted with a heavy-duty thermometer that helps you keep track of the temperature. This is a nice addition for those who like to cook at a specific temperature.
Grill Light
With the Summit S-470, Weber seems to have thought about everything. With the new design, you also get a grill light that’s been fitted into the inside of the lid cover. This light is bright enough for you to make out where the steaks at.
Snap-Jet Ignition System
The S-470 features a nifty snap-jet ignition system which makes starting up the grill extremely easy. It’s also conveniently located so you can turn the grill on or off when needed. The jet ignition system also makes it easier to heat up the grill quickly so you don’t have to wait too long to get started.
Other features include the enclosed storage space, six spots for holding tools, and a 10-foot long gas installation hose. All of the features of the Summit S-470 have been well thought of and excellently built. These features and tweaks to the previous grill design offer better functionality on a grill that’s great to look at and promises to cook some great tasting foods as well.
Warranty
When purchasing a grill from a well-known brand such as Weber, you already know you’re paying for a quality product, but a little reassurance is nice. For that, Weber offers a full two-year warranty on the coat of paint that adorns the S-470. That’s not all: you also get a 10-year warranty for the flavorizer bars and the grates.
Pros
Ultra full-function, quality construction grill with a smoker box, side burner, rotisserie, and sear burner
Strong warranty and support from Weber
Besides durability, the sharpener offers great-quality sharpening that will take good care of colored pencils
Six cooking zones deliver a versatile cooking experience
Even, high heat from four stainless steel burners
Brushed stainless steel finish will not show marks as easily
Cons
Handle light is more gimmick than useful
Conclusion For Weber Summit S-470 Gas Grill
Weber has always been known for its high-quality grills, and the company has taken its level of quality up a few notches with the Summit S-470. Not only is this grill great to look at, but it also allows you to cook more food at different temperatures simultaneously.
Weber is already well-known for its appliances and the kind of quality and performance that it offers. But which Weber product will you choose?
While they make excellent grills, they offer a variety of options, and it can be confusing to decide on one. Now, the Weber Spirit is the original series released earlier, while the Spirit II is an upgraded and slightly advanced version. The latter comes with a set of new and improved features that were released a few years later.
In the following section, we will explain each of the models of both series in detail. Read carefully to know all about them and then make an informed decision.
Dive in now!
Weber Spirit II E-210 And Weber Spirit E-210 | A Comparison
In this section, we will be comparing both these models and will tell you about the pros and cons of each. They are similar in many aspects, but there is a slight difference which will be discussed.
This is one of the smallest models that are available in the market, and it is very cost-effective. Released in 2013, the E-210 has been very popular among consumers who were looking for a grill for their small flat or dorm room. We will discuss its features in the section below.
Performance
This is a small and basic grill that comes with dual-burners. The burners are protected by heavy grates, and the best part is that they are not prone to catching rust. Plus, the surface is fade-resistant, and the color will stay for years to come.
Moreover, the grates will ensure that the heat spreads well, and you will get proper grill marks on your food. You can cook steaks and patties just like professionals.
Below the grates is something that Weber especially adds to its products. There are porcelain enamel bars that help in diverting the grease from the flames. This will protect your burner and ensure that it lasts long. Grease on the bar gets smoked, and this adds more charcoal-like flavors to a dish.
It also has a built-in thermometer which will help you keep track of the temperature at all times. You can ensure that the food never gets overcooked, thanks to this.
Cooking Surface
We will now move on to the cooking surface of this compact device. It comes with 360 square inches of cooking area with a 90-square-inch warming rack.
Although it is the smallest option, it will still provide you with ample space to cook meat and vegetables together. You can even cook a large turkey of 20 pounds at once on this.
Build
Moving on to the build, it is a small product that is 50 inches in width and 32 inches in length. If you are working with an open lid, this will come to a height of 63 inches. You can use it for small and tight spaces, and it will easily fit in any kitchen.
Next, it is designed like a closed cart and has a small cabinet for the propane tank. There are hooks on the side to hang your cookware. The entire product is placed on 4 wheels which will let you move it around easily. What’s more, the wheels can be locked in place if you only want the body to move from front to back.
Coming to the materials, this is made of excellent quality stainless steel with cast-iron grates. The cooking area has a layer of porcelain, making it sturdy and attractive.
Assembly
The majority of the product is already assembled, and you will not have to spend too much time on it. There are only a few parts that need to be attached after it arrives. You will take half an hour to put them together, and you will need a screwdriver for the job.
Once you put the items in place, it might be a bit heavy. But the wheels will let you move it around easily, and you should not be facing any troubles.
Usability
Controlling this product is very easy, and you can work with the knobs in the front. A simple twist is required to switch on the burner, while another knob will help you control the temperature.
Moreover, it comes with a crossover ignition system that is powered by a battery. The flames are automatic, and this makes it easier to handle the grill. You will find the grill heating up very quickly, and that reduces the overall cooking time.
Also, AA batteries and a fuel gauge are provided with the pack. The batteries will let you begin cooking immediately, while this product’s gauge will help you understand the amount of propane that is left.
Overall, we found this to have a great build, and it was straightforward to use. The only downside was that the burners could not be lit up separately. Both would light up together while cooking.
This model was released way later in 2018, and the company brought it out as a form of upgrade. It is known to be one of the latest products that Weber has to offer. This one has a few similar features, but some stand out. Read on to find out about them.
Performance
So, when it comes to performance, the E210 works with a GS4 grilling system which makes it stand apart from the former option. The GS4 grilling system includes flavored bars, a grease management unit, easy ignition, and burners. There are 2 burners with an output of 26,500 BTU. Again, this is similar to Spirit 1, and the burners are well-spaced to allow for easy and even grilling.
The flavor bars are also similar, and there are 3 of them which prevent grease from falling into the flame. You will be getting a smoky flavor because of this, and you won’t have to worry about flare-ups.
Now the feature that stands out the most here is that it is compatible with iGrill 3. This will allow you to monitor the cooking temperature with your phone. It is a very successful feature that the present generation loves, and you won’t have to bother about undercooking or overcooking your meal.
Cooking Surface
The cooking space provided here is 360 square inches with a 90-square-inch warming rack. This is pretty similar to that of the previous item, and you should have an error-free experience.
Build
While the previous product was known to be the most compact when it was released, this one quickly took up the tag. It measures 48 inches in breadth and 26 inches in length. When the lid is open, the height is 57 inches, and you can easily place it anywhere.
Next, it comes with 2 side tables, but one of them can be folded down. This is entirely designed to look like an open cart which is pretty different from the closed cart design of the former option. This allowed better accessibility to the propane tank. However, it also has hooks on both sides of the table to hang your cookware and accessories.
Moving on to the materials, the Spirit II E-210 is made of stainless steel with cast-iron grates and a porcelain enameled top. 2 giant wheels have replaced the 4-caster design of the previous model. The wheels are accompanied by 2 thick legs that help in placing them on any surface. You can move it on rough surfaces and grass, thanks to this.
Assembly
Like the previous option, the Spirit II E-210 comes partially assembled with a few parts that need to be attached later by you. It is not very difficult, and you can call customer care representatives in case you face any issues.
Usability
This product also has 2 knobs which you can use to control the temperature. The best part is that you can adjust the temperature of both burners separately. That will give you more control. You can cook something on high heat on one side while you can grill another food item on a low flame on the other.
Moreover, the Spirit II E-210 is equipped with an infinity ignition system which works better than the crossover one, which is present in Spirit E-210. This one will ensure that the grill ignites whenever you want it to.
Further, its fuel gauge remains similar, and you will get the same benefits of a propane scale that will help you measure the amount of fuel left.
So, in conclusion, we found that the Spirit II E-210 model is just a fancier version of the Spirit E-210 because of the variety of features that are offered. You will get a few differences, and there is a major change in design too. There have also been some improvements in the process of operation.
But the only issue is that you will not be able to fold one side of the table as we already mentioned. That might make it slightly difficult to store away in case you have to.
What We Like
Large cooking area
Open cart design
2 giant wheels for better support
Quick ignition system
What We Don't Like
One side of the table is not foldable
Weber Spirit II E-310 and Weber Spirit E-310: A Comparison
Just like the Spirit E 210 models, the Weber Spirit II E-310 and E-310 also have certain similarities and differences. The E-310 was released in 2013, and that was followed by the Weber Spirit II E-310 in 2018 with some upgrades. In the next section, we have discussed them individually for your benefit.
This is a model that was initially released as an alternative to the E-210 and has been very successful in the market. We have discussed its features in the section below.
Performance
This product comes with 3 burners instead of 2 like the previous models and boasts 32,000 BTU per hour when it comes to cooking power. You can rest assured that the heat will be evenly distributed and the food will be cooked completely.
Next, there are angled flavorizer bars that prevent the grease from dripping into the flames. The grease then creates a flavorful smoke that adds more taste to the dishes. Also, the excess grease is directed towards a funnel that then leads to a drip tray below. This makes the food healthy, and you can easily clean the grease by taking out this tray.
Moreover, it keeps the burner flames in check and prevents flare-ups. The burners do not clog as the grease does not reach them, and you can expect it to work for a long time.
Cooking Surface
Although it has a compact body, this has one of the largest cooking surfaces. You will be getting 529 square inches of cooking surface. This includes 105 square inches of warming area, and the rest can be used for cooking.
Moving on, you can use this for making meals for 5-6 people easily. There are hooks on both sides where ladles and spoons can be hung so that you can reach out to them quickly while in the process.
Build
This is another compact unit, and it measures 52 inches in breadth, 32 inches in length, and 63 inches in height. Hence, it will not take up too much space, and the best part is that there are 2 foldable side tables. This helps in storage, and you can fold them down when not in use.
Coming to the materials, the item is made of stainless steel with a porcelain-enameled top which is very sturdy. The grills and the flavor bars are made of cast iron and then coated with porcelain. This makes it look attractive, and it can withstand high heat easily.
Now, when talking of storage, the Spirit E-310 has a lot of storage area, and you can keep your cookware easily. There is a steel door which will hide all the kitchen equipment away, giving you a clean look.
Then 4 casters will ensure easy portability. You can move the grill about easily, and the front wheels can be locked too. This will prevent it from moving side to side and provide more stability while using it.
Assembly
This is one area where there is a slight drawback as the device does not come assembled. The manual is not very clear, too, and you might take some time to put this together. This is heavy and weighs 120 pounds, and we will suggest taking the help of a friend or spouse to put it together.
Once it is completely assembled, there is nothing more to be worried about.
Usability
There are knobs placed right at the front, which will let you adjust the temperature of each burner. This is possible with 3 separate knobs. Also, it features an electronic crossover ignition system, and that makes it easier to switch on. All you have to do is push a button, and that will ignite all the 3 burners.
This single button added to the convenience offered, and we did not have to spend much time on it.
Next, we will talk about its fuel gauge, which is built-in and which will help you understand the gas level in the tank. If it depletes, you can immediately refill without disturbing the grilling process.
And that’s not all, you also get a thermometer placed in the hood, and that will measure the temperature. This will let you achieve the perfect temperature while preheating or cooking.
What We Like
Foldable side tables
Grease management system
Well-spaced burners for even cooking
Electronic crossover ignition system
What We Don't Like
The instruction booklet is not clear
Weber Spirit II E-310
This is an improvised version of the previous model that we discussed. We were impressed with the excellent performance, reliability, and quality offered. And now we will be discussing all of it in the following part.
Performance
The Spirit II E-310 has 3 burners but a slightly lesser heat capacity of 30,000 BTU per hour. Now we will not hold this as a drawback as the difference is not much. Moreover, the 3 burners can be operated separately, and you can manage the heat settings differently for each. They are spaced out and allow equal and even heating throughout the surface.
Next, you will find cast-iron grates that have a layer of porcelain. These can be reversed and used and will help the food get those perfect grill marks. It also retains heat and will keep your food warm for a while.
Coming to the flavorizer bars, they remain the same and will provide you with similar protection from grease.
Next, there is another feature that stands out and that is Weber’s iGrill 3 Bluetooth thermometer. This is introduced in the new model, and it will help you monitor the cooking temperature and fuel level via your phone. But yes, you will have to purchase it separately.
Cooking Surface
This provides a large cooking area of 425 square inches with 105 square inches of warming rack. The cooking space is very similar to that of the previous model, and you can expect similar results.
Build
The Spirit II E-310 is slightly more compact than the previous model and takes less space. It measures 52 inches in length, 26 inches in breadth, and 57 inches in height with the lid open. So, now you know that it is smaller when compared to the E-310 original option.
Now moving on to the side tables, this one poses a slight problem as only one of the side tables can be folded. The other one remains in place, and that means in case you want to store it, more space will be required.
Further, the grill is designed like an open cart with enough storage space. You can keep all your accessories and kitchenware in the cabinet. The gas tank here is kept outside this cart and not in a closed place like the previous device. This makes it easier to access the tank. But yes, it is best to keep this away from kids.
The next point of difference is the wheels as this one comes with 2 large wheels and 2 thick legs. The wheels will allow easier movement on rough terrains, while the legs will provide it with more stability.
This is accompanied by a 10-year warranty which makes it a very cost-effective choice.
Assembly
The griller is more compact and lighter than the previous model. However, the installation and assembly process is a bit complicated, and you might require a lot of time to get this in place. We will suggest that you call up customer care in case you face any difficulties. But once you have set it up, it will work out well.
Usability
Like the previous product, this has 3 knobs which will let you control the different burners. This is also similar to the previous option, and then there is a thermometer in its hood which will help you check the temperature.
Further, the igniter has gone through a transformation, and you will be getting an infinity ignition system. This is way better and more reliable than the crossover system.
What We Like
Backed by a 10-year warranty
Works with iGrill 3 technology
Open cart design with more space
Hooks for storing spoons and ladles
What We Don't Like
Difficulty in assembling products
Weber Spirit Grills Specifications
Having extensively reviewed each grill, let's delve into the similarities and differences between these grills. Key similarities include the shared fuel type, the number of side tables, and the type of grates used. Regarding differences, both E-310 models come with an extra burner, and are larger in all dimensions, providing a more expansive cooking area and a larger warming rack. The Spirit II models are slightly smaller in size, albeit with more weight. Listed below is a table of the Weber Spirits Grills compared in BTU per hour, dimensions with the lid open and the lid closed in inches, cooking area in square foot, weight in lbs, number of burners, type of fuel used, side tables and grate provided:
You must have seen that each product comes with several factors, including advantages and disadvantages. We were initially overwhelmed with so much information, and then we decided to break it down into points. This should help you make an informed decision in the long run.
Size And Build
It is essential that you check the amount of space that is available in your home and then purchase a product. If you want to keep your grill outdoors, then look for a convenient space and measure it. Compare the space with the size of this and then only go on to purchase.
Further, decide whether you want to keep the grill in one place or take it around. If you plan to move it from the house to the yard often, then get one with strong and big wheels. The wheels should be able to move on even rocky surfaces too.
Number Of Burners
This will depend on the number of people that you plan to cook for. If you have a family of 2-4, 2 burners should be enough as that will allow you to cook for 2-3 people at one time. On the other hand, a bigger group would need you to purchase one with 3 burners.
Now some products have burners that can be individually controlled, while in some, this feature is missing. Your choice should depend on the kind of requirements that you have.
Next, you should look at how the burners are placed as that will ensure even cooking. In the case of Weber grills, the burners are distributed over the entire area with equal gaps in between. This ensures uniformity in heat distribution, and we were happy with the results.
Grates
Now, grates are an essential part of grilling, and they are responsible for providing proper grill marks on the food. Bad or inefficient grates would lead to the burners clogging up and the food getting burnt. So, always opt for cast-iron grates with porcelain enamel or thick stainless steel ones. These are durable and offer excellent heat retention capacities.
Also, porcelain grates are very easy to clean, and you can simply wipe them. We would recommend this to save you time while cleaning.
Next comes flavorizer bars, which are present along with the grates. These bars prevent grease from entering the burners and clogging them. The grease that collects on it is smoked, and that adds more flavor to the food. Also, it leads excess grease away from the gas and into a drip tray.
Materials Used
If good material is used to make a grill, it will last longer and provide more value for money. We suggest that you choose an option that is made of aluminum as it is pretty sturdy and resistant to rusting. It can also be made of stainless steel, which is a great alternative and provides enough sturdiness.
Since these products will see a lot of moisture and stains, they have to be resistant to both. Hence, it is best to get grates that are coated with porcelain.
Cooking Area
While purchasing a product, you will have to take into consideration the size of the grilling area. If you have a small family, then an area of 250 to 350 square inches should be enough. This is perfect for 2 people, and you can cook at one go.
But if you have a medium-sized family, then you can opt for 450 to 500 square inches of cooking area. And for parties and large gatherings, purchasing one with 500 square inches or more is the best. That way, you can cook in large batches and get done with the process faster.
How Long Do They Last?
Weber grills can easily last for up to 10 years or more if you keep them clean and take care of the parts. Some will come with a 5-year warranty, while others will come with a 10-year warranty.
Where Are These Grills Created?
Most of these grills are made in China or the USA. It mostly depends on which model you choose, and the country will be determined according to that.
What Are The Color Options?
Black is the most common color that people choose, but there are other options too. You can choose among red, ivory, black, sapphire blue, smoke, and crimson red. There are limited pieces in copper color too.
Conclusion
The quality of a grill is the most important thing that you should look for while making a purchase, and Weber provides you with excellent quality. You must have learned about the 4 models in the previous sections, so choose as per your requirements and that should work out well.
Moving on, there are some differences among the Weber models, but all of them will give you a smooth experience. However, the newer and more advanced ones come with a few extra features and can be a bit more efficient than the original ones.
But in case you are looking for a simple grilling device, the older ones will serve you well too. With this, we will take your leave.
Let us know if you have any further queries in the comment section below. Until next time. Happy shopping!
For many folks, enjoying the summer means having a barbecue in the backyard with friends and family. Most gas grills that are available today don’t cater to small families or homes that don’t have the free space to include a large gas grill.
That shouldn’t be an excuse to not have a barbecue at home. This is where the Weber Spirit E-330 comes in. This is a gas grill that features just about every function you would expect to find in a grill but in a compact unit. The small size of the Spirit E-330 offers users with a compact grill that’s easy to move around and store away when not in use. So, let’s take a closer look at what the Weber Spirit #-330 has to offer.
Equipped with upgraded features and the perfect size for...
Sear station creates an intense heat zone to quickly add...
Sure, there are many gas grills to choose from nowadays, but few offer the functionality and compatibility of the Weber Spirit E-330. This is exactly what you would expect from a company that’s been delivering superior grills for as long as Weber. The company doesn’t disappoint with the Spirit E-330 which is part of its smaller designs.
With the Spirit E-330, Weber makes its entry into the compact gas grill market in style. The new Spirit E-330 offers customers with all the bells and whistles one would look for in a gas grill in a compact size unit. The Weber Spirit E-330 offers a full stainless-steel body with 3 burners that provide an ample amount of heat to cook delicious foods outdoors. It is also reasonably priced which makes it possible for everybody to enjoy outdoor cooking in style with the Spirit E-330.
Specifications
Three burger grill: 32,000 BTUs
Side burner: 12,000 BTUs
Rear searing burner: 7,500 BTUs
The Design
For many folks, purchasing a large gas grill is out of the question due to a lack of space. Keeping that in mind, the Spirit E-330 offers a viable and affordable alternative. With the Weber Spirit E-330, you get to cook delicious food outdoors in style.
One of the main features of the Spirit E-330 is its compact design. This makes it easy to cook on and move around in the backyard. The compact design also takes the hassle out of storage, which is a challenge with larger gas grills. For a compact grill, the Spirit delivers a decent amount of cooking space to prepare foods, but not enough for cooking for large families. Other features that make the Weber Spirit E-330 standout are the multi-colored controls that add to the grill’s appearance. They are also easy to use and provide complete control over the grill. With just three large heavy-duty control knobs for the grill, there’s no need to guess the function of each.
The stainless steel grill area is protected by a heavy-gage metal lid that protects the cooking area. It features a large handle for easy grip and a large thermostat to gauge the temperature of the grill. Below the cooking area is a surprisingly large storage space where you can keep grilling tools and accessories along with the gas tank. If you’re looking to move around the grill then that shouldn’t be a problem with the sturdy caster wheels that can take the unit on any surface.
The Features
The following are some of the features in the Weber Spirit E-330.
Stainless Steel Build
You expect to get a certain level of quality when purchasing a product such as a grill from Weber, one of the masters of gas grills. With the Spirit E-330, you are not going to be disappointed with the quality of the design and the materials that have been used in manufacturing the E-330. The Spirit E-330 offers a durable grilling unit that’s reasonably priced and will last for years to come.
Large Cooking Area
One of the standout features of the Weber Spirit E-330 is its large 424-square inch cooking space that is surprisingly large, considering its compact design. This allows hassle-free cooking of a decent amount of food with ease. While you won’t be having a party with the Spirit E-330, the grill offers just enough cooking space to cater to a small crowd of family or friends, which is exactly what it promises.
Impressive Power
The output of the Spirit E-330 is just as impressive and makes cooking a breeze. The three burger grills can deliver up to 32,000 BTUs of cooking power, and if that’s not enough, you also get a side burner that produces up to 12,000 BTUs and is a nifty addition for preparing sauces or other foods. There’s also a rear searing burner that has a total output of 7,500 BTUs and can be used for both warming and cooking.
Easy to Clean
The Weber Spirit E-330 doesn’t just take the hassle out of storage but also offers a grill that’s extremely easy to clean and maintain. The porcelain-enameled cooking grates can be cleaned with ease along with the rest of the grill. Since the whole unit has been constructed using stainless steel, it is able to maintain its appearance for longer.
Flavorized Bars
While with a gas grill this small you would expect the bare minimum, Weber has gone out of its way to make sure you do not feel that there’s anything missing with the Spirit E-330. The grill includes flavorized bars that bring the flavor out of every food you cook.
Other Features
Some of the other features that the Spirit E-330 offers include lots of space for storage and a temperature gauge built into the grill cover. It also includes heavy-duty control knobs for the three grills and the side burner. You also get an easy to use electronic ignition system to power the grill whenever needed. The addition of two heavy-duty caster wheels makes it easy to move around the grill or keep it in storage when not in use.
Warranty
Weber has always been confident about their products, and they are holding on to the tradition with the Spirit E-330. The company offers a solid 10-year warranty on the cook box and the burners. You will also get a 5-year warranty on the cooking grates and flavorizer bars along with a 2-year warranty for all the other parts of the gas grill. Not bad for a portable outdoor grill.
Pros
Sleek and heavy-duty design
Many additional features
Comes along with a powerful side burner and rear searing burner
Excellent warranties >
Cons
The low grade of stainless steel
Only three burners
Conclusion For Weber Spirit E-330
The amount of functions that the Spirit E-330 offers along with its portable size makes it a sure winner in the small size gas grill niche. This outdoor grill is the ideal size for enjoying cooking outdoors even with limited space.
The second product Weber Q2200 is a discontinued product, no longer available on the market instead the updated version Weber Q3200. Although, Weber Q1200 is available on the market.
For many folks who take their family barbecues seriously, buying a grill is a pretty big deal, and rightly so. The good news is we’re living in the golden age of outdoor grills. What this means is that when it comes to options, we are spoilt for choice. One of the leading players in outdoor grills for many years now is Weber.
The manufacturer has been responsible for delivering many high-quality grills and is constantly improving its game in terms of both style and functionality. Since Weber has been responsible for rolling out many premium grills through the years, here we are going to focus on two grills, in particular, the Q1200 and the Q2200. So, if you’ve been stuck with the decision of which grill to choose, this is going to be your guide. So, let’s get started.
8,500 BTU Burner: Provides robust level of heat output,...
The Weber Q1200 and Q2200 are two world-class outdoor grills that are known for their superior build quality and many functions. Both these outdoor grills have been well-built using heavy-duty materials. They are also both powerful enough to deliver an excellent cooking experience. These also are without a doubt, two of the best barbecue grills that have been built by Weber, and they are certainly two of the most popular. Both these grills feature a slide on drip pan for collecting oil and grease while cooking.
Since both the Weber Q1200 and the Weber Q2200 fall under the portable or tabletop section of outdoor grills, they both offer great value for money with their portability and sturdy design. With so many similarities, it can be difficult to choose between the two, but upon taking a closer look you will find that there are quite a few differences between these two top-shelf grills.
Specifications
Single burner | [Q1200] 8,500 BTUs, [Q2200] 12,000 BTUs
When it comes to the design and appearance of the Weber Q1200 and Weber Q2200 it gets really difficult to tell them apart. Both these barbecue grills boast of a similar design with a sturdy lid covering the cooking area, and foldable side tables. Both get a thermometer for gauging the temperature while you cook and are available in multiple colors.
One of the areas where both the Weber Q1200 and Weber Q2200 are almost identical is in its build quality. You will notice the top-shelf build quality of the Q1200 and Q2200 right off the bat. The stand-out features between the two grills are the porcelain enameled cast iron cooking grates that are sturdy and well built. Maintaining their high-quality standards, you also get a glass-reinforced nylon frame that supports the grill. The slide on the drip pan makes sure all the grease or oil is collected in one place for easy disposal.
Right off the bat, it’s clear that the only real differences worth mentioning between the Weber Q1200 and the Weber Q2200 is the difference between the heat output, dimensions and the available cooking area which differ slightly. Both the Q1200 and Q2200 offer the best value for money since you will be getting a barbecue grill that features an ergonomic design while also offering you with power and portability.
The Features
The following are some of the features of the Weber outdoor grill and how these features differ in the Weber Q1200 and Q2200.
Total Cooking Area
The Weber Q1200 has a cooking area of 189 square inches while the Weber Q2200 has a cooking area of 280 square inches, which is a difference of a full 91 square inches between the two grills. While this might seem like a big deal to some folks, the good news is that the nature of squaring size means that, at the end of the day, the difference in cooking space isn’t that drastic.
To put the size difference of these two grills into perspective, the manufacturer has decided to use hamburgers as a means of measurement. For instance, according to Weber, the Q1200 has a total capacity of eight hamburgers. The Q2200, on the other hand, can cook up to 11 hamburgers at a time. While this isn’t much of a difference, if you plan on inviting many guests to your backyard barbecue it’s best to go with the larger option.
Heat Output
Both the Weber Q1200 and the Weber Q2200 feature a D-burner which helps distribute the heat well throughout the interior of the cooking area. The Q1200 offers a total heat output of 8,500 BTUs while the slightly larger Weber Q2200 can produce up to 12,000 BTUs of heat. It is also important to mention here that the Q2200 has a slightly larger lid. The taller lid has been incorporated into the design of the Q2200 because it provides more options for the users in terms of grilling.
Performance
When it comes to performance, both the Weber Q1200 and the Q2200 performs well and can cook delicious foods. Both these grills are quick to start thanks to the electronic ignition system. Both the Q1200 and Q2200 also feature a temperature gauge that’s been integrated into the design of the lid. This makes it easier for the user to know the temperature inside the cooking space. The feature also comes in handy if you are looking for a precision cooking grill.
Since the Q2200 comes with a slightly larger lid, it allows you to cook more meat. What the Q1200 fails to deliver in size it more than makes up for in cooking capabilities. For instance, while the larger Q2200 is a more convenient option if you are looking to cook more food within the least amount of time, it still cooks at a high temperature, which can make it difficult to roast meat. On the other hand, the Weber Q1200 cooks perfectly on low heat as well, which makes it a versatile choice.
Final Verdict For Weber Q1200 vs Q2200
While both the Weber Q1200 and the Weber Q2200 have similar features, if you are looking to cook more food then the larger Q2200 is going to be a better option. If you are going to be roasting meat a lot, then it’s best to go with the Q1200. Both grills have plenty to offer users all you have to do is choose one that suits your needs.
Watts is a measure of the amount of energy being released. It is created when amps and volts combine. The higher the wattage, the more will be the output and power from an appliance. A watts-to-amps calculator converts watts (electric power) to amps (electric current) in alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC) power systems.
Watts to Amps Calculator
You can easily convert watts to amps (amperage) by using the electrical power formula, according to which power (watts) is divided by voltage (volts) to get amps. The formula for this is:
Amps (I)=Watts (P) Voltage (V)
This formula is applicable only for devices that operate with DC power, whereas for AC current, the power factor is considered. So, the equation goes:
Amps (I)=Watts (P)Voltage (V) Power Factor (PF)
Watts To Amps Converter: Some Key Terms Explained
Before you can fully understand why the conversion from watts to amps is important, you must have a brief idea of certain terms associated with this formula. Let me tell you more about them:
Volts
Volt or voltage is the measure of force or electric potential. Simply put, it helps measure how much force is required to get the electrical current flowing. In the United States, home appliances work at different voltages. For instance, air conditioning units, clothes dryers, etc., operate at 240 volts, whereas computers, light bulbs, and phone chargers work at an electrical supply of 120 volts.
Before making a big investment, like buying a new air conditioner, you must check your AC system’s cooling capacity. You can do so using BTU to kW air conditioning calculator or even the kW to BTU calculator.
Amps
Amps or ampere is a unit that measures electrical current. It determines the amount of electricity that runs through a circuit. In a circuit breaker, you will often notice the amperage written, and the larger this number, the more electricity can flow through the circuit.
To calculate amps, you divide watts by volts. So, if you have an 800W electric appliance connected to a circuit of 240V, then it will be drawing 3.33 A.
Similarly, you can calculate how many amps of current are drawn per watt of power using the amps formula. For example, at 120 volts, you will need 8.33 amps of current to generate 1000 watts of power.
Watts
I’ve already explained what watts are. To recap, it represents the energy produced when volts and amps work together. It is the power that an electric device uses to run. For instance, when you light a bulb or run a vacuum, it consumes a certain power, which is expressed in watts.
You can calculate watts by multiplying amps with volts. For example, at 120 volts, 1 amp will produce 120 watts, and at 120 volts, 20 amps will produce 2,400 watts.
In larger units, the power consumed is mentioned in kilowatts. One kW = 1000 watts.
Convert Watts To Amps: All You Need To Know
When you are converting watts to amps, the first step is to know what is the current type you are dealing with.
In DC or direct current, the electric current flows in one direction. This type of current is produced by solar panels and used by devices (such as laptops, cell phones, etc.) that run on the electric battery. When the battery is connected to a circuit, electric charge flows in a single direction from negative charge to positive charge.
AC or alternating current has current flowing in both directions. Usually, the current changes direction periodically. The AC supply is used extensively in homes and businesses.
Tip
Although the calculation is easy to do manually, I recommend using an online calculator instead. When you use the watts to amps calculator, you will be asked to insert a few values.
For instance, you will be asked to specify the current type you’re working with - DC, AC (single), or AC (three-phase). Then, you will be asked to insert the amps-watts-volts values. For an AC voltage, you will be given the power factor (usually taken as 1).
Watts To Amps Conversion For AC Single Phase
For DC watts to amps calculation, you have to divide power (expressed in watts) by the power factor times RMS voltage (expressed in volts). So:
Amps (I)=Watts (P)Voltage (V) Power Factor (PF)
Watts To Amps Conversion For AC Three Phase
For three-phase units, you will get the option to choose between the line-to-line voltage and line-to-neutral voltage. The PF is taken as one, and a certain square root is derived.
You simply have to insert the given values and choose the voltage type, and the results will be calculated for you.
Final Words
Converting watts to amps may feel simple, but there are a lot of factors you need to consider. It is not simply possible to convert watts directly to amperes or amps to watts. Instead, you must know the resistance (r), voltage, voltage type, and so on. This is why it is best to use a calculator.
Calculators designed for electrical systems, such as BTU calculators, also come in handy when trying to determine a home appliance’s cooling capacity or when trying to convert between EER and COP numbers.
With that, I will take my leave. Goodbye!
Have you just stumbled on the idea of waterproofing surfaces through epoxy?
Recently, the popularity of using epoxy for covering materials has resurfaced. Hence, we thought about sharing some information about working with it.
When it comes to epoxy, most people think of it as only an adhesive. Apart from its brilliant gluing capacities, epoxy is also an excellent coating material. It can be an overlay on anything from a bathtub to your kitchen floor to reduce corrosion and damage.
However, its quality as a waterproofing material remains lesser-known. And, with proper techniques, epoxy can become an instant favorite for the job.
If you are one of those people who have questions about the water resistance of epoxy, hop on to get your answers. Also, check out the new project ideas to start one as soon as possible.
On that note, let us begin unraveling the queries on epoxy!
All You Need To Know About Waterproof Epoxy
Is Epoxy Waterproof?
Let's start by answering the burning question. Yes, when used properly, epoxy can make a surface water-resistant. Moreover, using a layer of epoxy can create a barrier against corrosive chemicals.
Because of its waterproofing capabilities, epoxy is often used as a coating on floors of commercial buildings. Even swimming pools have an added layer of it as a beneficial sealant.
However, you need to be very careful to buy the correct epoxy. Generally, the claim of being a waterproof epoxy is mentioned on the label of a bottle. Hence, picking up an already tested epoxy would give you much better results.
Try to look for a water-based epoxy or waterproofing epoxy for your intended job. If possible, it's always good to consult with an expert present at the store to get their opinion about the product.
Having said that, we do think that epoxy is seriously underrated when it comes to waterproofing surfaces. Sure, you might have to experiment a bit, but it will be a worthy project.
How To Properly Use Epoxy For Waterproofing?
To ensure appropriate waterproofing with epoxy, here are some points that you should note:
Clean The Surface Properly
People often end up blaming the waterproofing capabilities of epoxy due to improper application. Before you start the application, it's essential to clean the surface thoroughly. This includes getting rid of dust, oil, and water.
Moreover, it's necessary to let the surface be absolutely dry. Many people try to waterproof a wet surface, but we would suggest against it. Also, as you will need to apply multiple layers of epoxy, make sure not to get dirt between them.
Health Of The Base Material
Even though epoxy is a strong sealant, the health of the base layer plays a vital role in lasting capabilities. You cannot expect a cracked wooden floor to maintain the same level of integrity as a brand new surface. Hence, you may want to fix the base material before applying the epoxy.
This is especially important for wooden surfaces, as they tend to get damaged sooner. Besides, you may want to look for more flexible epoxy options to make the process easier.
Proper Application Of Epoxy
One of the most common mistakes committed while waterproofing with epoxy is the application of a thin layer. Every epoxy comes with instructions about the adequate amount that needs to be used. In the case of waterproofing, this is usually a thick layer to make the seal extra tight.
Additionally, you may need to apply multiple layers of epoxy to make it fully effective. Hence, make sure to check the application instructions before buying the materials.
Moreover, choosing the correct application tool is also quite vital as it may affect the amount of epoxy that ends up on the surface. So, be sure to lay it on thick for better water resistance.
Choice Of Epoxy
On your visit to the hardware store, you will be greeted with numerous types of epoxy resins. All of them might look tempting, but you will need to find the one that will work best for you. Hence, a handy tip from our side is to know more about the base material.
We suggest you pick up an epoxy that is either water-based or is meant for waterproofing. Manufacturers often mention it on the bottle. Additionally, you may also look for the features stated on the packaging. Also, make sure to check the type of surface that works for the particular epoxy.
Proper Curing Time And Environment
Usually, most epoxy resins take around seven days to cure. However, it will depend on the type of epoxy that you are buying. After the application is over, it needs to receive a proper environment for curing. Adhering to the instructions gives anticipated results, and you wouldn't need to reapply epoxy for a long time.
Advantages Of Using Epoxy For Waterproofing
If you are new to using epoxy, you are at the right place to know about its advantages as a waterproofing material. Here are some of the strongest points about epoxy that you should know about:
Works With Various Substances
Are you tired of buying different sealants for various base surfaces? Epoxy comes as a miracle since it can work with numerous materials. It works well on wood, metal, plastic, and even fiberglass. Some even use it on bare concrete or outer walls of their houses as a waterproofing layer, and it seems to do the job.
You may need to experiment with the thickness of the coating and the application technique to get it right. But, it will most likely be a long-lasting sealant on most surfaces.
Easy To Use
Epoxy is a fuss-free substance, and it is easy to use even for a DIY beginner. It can be applied with a brush, roller, or any tool you may find comfortable. Besides the usual protection measures needed to work with it, there aren't many requirements.
Most manufacturers clearly state the instructions. However, the only thing that needs to be perfect is the curing time and temperature. But that’s pretty easy to follow, so you don’t really need to worry about anything.
Corrosion Resistant
An epoxy wouldn't just give you a waterproof surface. Alongside, you will also get the benefit of corrosion resistance. This feature prevents damage-causing chemicals from getting to the base material, and is especially helpful for things like wood which are easily affected by harsh substances.
Moreover, epoxy also helps to delay the usual wear and tear seen on a surface. This is particularly true for waterproofing outdoor surfaces like swimming pools or lawn furniture, as they may get easily damaged from heat and rain.
Durability
A prominent feature of epoxy resin is its durability. With proper curing time and environment, you practically create a long-lasting hard layer. Also, epoxy doesn't require frequent reapplications. Even busy flooring may only need a touch up every 3-4 years. Hence, the lasting protection of epoxy makes it a perfect choice for those who detest a yearly chore.
Projects For Epoxy Waterproofing
If you are a DIY-er, then you must always need a new project. Hence, to get you started, here are some items that benefit from epoxy waterproofing.
Swimming Pools
Swimming pool surfaces always need waterproofing as the treatment chemicals and heat can cause lasting damage. So, covering it with an epoxy layer will prevent most of the probable damage. Also, frequent reapplications after 3-4 years will keep the pool healthy and good-looking.
Commercial Or Personal Flooring
Floors tend to get damaged due to many things, and serious ones can cost you a lot. Hence, applying a thick layer of epoxy can protect against damage, especially from water or other liquids. Moreover, it's great for wooden floors as the thick layer also prevents damage caused by excessive pressure or sharp objects.
Kitchen Countertop And Floor
When it comes to household damage, the kitchen is one of the most common places to drop things. Most of us have experienced our hearts stopping when the fork drops on the beloved wood flooring. But a proper application of epoxy can put an end to it. Moreover, it will keep your surfaces stain-free even if you mistakenly drop a bowl of tomato soup.
Epoxy Resin Frequently Asked Questions
Here are answers to some further questions that you may have in mind while waterproofing with epoxy.
How Waterproof Is Epoxy Resin?
Even though we cannot tell you the exact waterproofing capacity of epoxy, the substance is definitely resistant to water. On application of an adequate layer of it, the surface wouldn't be affected by moisture or liquid. Moreover, epoxy also prevents chemicals and corrosives from seeping into the surface.
Will Epoxy Resin Waterproof Plywood?
Yes, epoxy is one of the best ways to waterproof plywood. However, while buying the epoxy, make sure to check if you can use it with wood. The epoxy works as a laminate on wooden surfaces and helps to deter water for a long time. Also, it provides one of the smoothest surfaces by filling out any holes or cracks.
Is Epoxy Resin Suitable For Outside?
You can use epoxy to waterproof outdoor surfaces. As most epoxy is UV stable, the coating does last long. Nevertheless, you will have to ensure that the epoxy layer gets cured properly for the waterproofing to work.
Final Words: Should You Go For Epoxy Waterproofing?
To give you a simple answer, yes, we would definitely recommend going for waterproofing by epoxy. This great substance has surprised us with its capabilities. As more people come to learn about its versatility, we’re sure you’d love to test it out on new projects.
Moreover, we appreciate the fact that it's a readily available substance. Most hardware stores contain one or more variants, and the salesperson will surely guide you to find the right one. Also, it leaves a pleasing glossy surface that looks wonderful!
However, you must remember that working with epoxy requires some precautions. This includes wearing a pair of thick gloves, goggles, and a respiratory mask. You can also check the packaging for more specialized instructions.
Now, it's time for you to go and find a surface that you would love to waterproof. In case of any queries, come back to us, and we will surely help you out.
The effects of a beautiful piece have a way of capturing the eyes of an observer.
And many existing artists love watercolor as a painting medium because of the many benefits they get from using it.
Firstly, watercolors are easy to use for anyone, be it beginners or experienced artists. Another good thing about watercolors is that they are relatively cheaper if compared to other coloring mediums.
Now, there are many upcoming artists who are drawn to the art of painting with this medium. But how does one prepare for painting with watercolors? There are a lot of things to consider having and buying.
If you too are a practicing artist, don’t worry! We have your back. Today, we will give you a list of all the things/supplies that you must have in order to set up your very own watercolor studio.
Keep in mind that these materials are both necessary and inexpensive, therefore, anybody can get them without having to spend so much.
The first thing you’d need is, of course, watercolor paints.
You probably have seen watercolors come in different packaging - tubes, pan sets or pencils.
If you are wondering which one to get as a beginner, we would suggest going for pan sets because firstly, they are easy to carry around and they do not consume too much space in the studio or on the shelf.
Secondly, these paints are organized, hence, preventing the user from creating a lot of mess during the painting process.
When looking for watercolor pan sets as a beginner, choose one which is student grade as they are much cheaper than those which are artist or professional grade.
Student-grade watercolors are good for practicing because you don’t have to focus much on the mixing process as you will do with professional or artist grades.
However, if you feel unsure about buying a whole set of watercolors, you can buy sample sets of any brand which you like. They will cost you much lesser than the actual colors would. Hence, this is a good way to find out if a watercolor painting set is the right one for you.
There are a lot of sketchbook varieties out there and choosing one can be tricky because each and every one of them seems important.
However, we would suggest buying one with thick sheets that are about 300 gsm since the colors are water-based and can penetrate through the paper if it is too thin.
Not only that but if you choose a much lighter or thin paper, there is a high chance your painting will not last as long as you expect because the paper may warp anytime soon.
The size of the notebook also matters a lot because you don’t want to end up regretting having bought a sketchbook that is too big or too small.
When picking out the right size, think about how practical it is for you. The practicability of the sketchbook depends on where you work often, how you carry the sketchbook, and so on.
Finally, we would also recommend finding the right orientation: horizontal or vertical. This again depends on what and how you want to paint. If you choose landscapes, then a horizontal-oriented sketchbook is the right one for you as it provides more space width-wise.
As we have discussed a little about sheets in a sketchbook and how thick they should be, now we are going to look at something similar; these are watercolor papers.
Paper is one of the most essential supplies when it comes to watercolor painting. What makes a piece of art great is not only the right paints but the right quality of the paper as well.
There are papers that are specifically designed for watercolors, and they are known as “watercolor papers”. These are not the same as regular papers we use every day, or like sketching papers.
These absorb moisture very well and do not allow the paint to bleed through on the other side of the paper. Besides that, these papers also provide enough texture to make your painting look excellent.
However, just like how normal papers are measured, these watercolor sheets are also rated by their size, weight, and texture.
And just as choosing sketchbook sheets, we suggest you go with watercolor papers that are about 300 gsm or 140 lb which are cold-pressed. Also, choose papers that are acid-free or pH neutral because they will preserve the quality of your painting and help it age well.
The importance of pencils is inevitable even if we are doing a watercolor painting.
Many artists use pencils to create an underdrawing before they start off with the actual painting. The reason they use a pencil for this is because it provides outlines which make the work easier.
However, a pencil can do so much more than just outline the piece. It can contribute to the overall beauty of the painting by enhancing small details. Moreover, lead pencils blend very well with watercolors.
Besides lead pencils, you can choose to outline the work with other colored pencils which you see fit. And that’s the best part about it - we get to be creative with this step.
If you use pens to darken a few areas or just for working with other details, you will notice amazing changes in the painting.
Although watercolor painting by itself is already magnificent, adding pen effects will take it to a whole different level. But then again, not just any pen will do.
For watercolor paintings, we recommend going for micron pens. If you can, refrain from using ballpoint pens because they do not have pointy nips.
If you like to sketch and paint at the same time, using micron pens will surely help make a great piece of painting.
With micron pens, you can easily slide through the details of the painting without making a mess. These are also much suitable for rough surfaces and cold-pressed papers since you don’t require to put on a lot of pressure on the nip while drawing.
One more benefit we get from using micron pens in watercolor paintings is that they tend to blend well with the rest of the colors, making them look harmonized. Ballpoint pens, on the other hand, do not produce the same effects. Rather, you can tell that the ink does not belong there.
We understand if you are a beginner, that you would want to start off with only a couple of brushes first, and that’s a good thing.
But we must say that you should not be content with only a few brushes you have in hand. The reason we are saying this is because there are a lot of brushes that provide different effects because of their shapes and sizes.
If you only stick to the few ones you have, there is a lesser chance for your work to improve.
Even if you plan to buy a few brushes for the beginning of your watercolor journey, make sure that each brush is distantly different from the other so that you can see the different effects that each brush has on the painting.
If you have gained a certain level of experience, that’s when you start trying out different brushes every now and then.
However, even if you are on a budget, be sure to get good-quality brushes so that they will serve you for years to come as well.
Palettes are necessary for mixing any kind of paint.
Yes, there are DIY alternatives or other surfaces which are good enough for mixing colors - and that is great!
But there are certain benefits of using palettes. First of all, they are specifically made for the purpose of mixing colors and all good artists prefer using them.
Secondly, there are varieties of palettes made to suit different paint mixing purposes and have different surfaces.
If you are an artist who works once in a while, then a paper palette would be a great choice since you can discard them after you’re done. Paper palettes can be used for a maximum of three times continuously before disposing.
But if painting is your daily hobby, there are so many palettes out there with various features to suit your preferences. For instance, a plastic palette with a thumb hole is great when you’re working for many hours because it is lightweight and comfortable.
Also, unlike random surfaces, palettes these days are washable, scrapable, or even foldable. These features make them desirable for certain preferences.
Artist Tote Board
An artist's tote board provides a flat support for when you are painting.
You can use any board with a smooth surface for this. But we would recommend getting a tote board because it is designed for artists and their work.
Most boards have clips to hold the paper in place. They also come with a smooth rubber band to ensure your painting does not move or tilt.
Tracing Paper
You may be wondering why tracing paper is on the list of watercolor supplies.
If you are a beginner, tracing papers can come in very handy.
For instance, there is an art that you want to imitate and recreate, but it’s too complicated. What you can do is use tracing paper and trace every outline.
After that, use the “rub method” of transferring the outline onto the actual watercolor paper and you’re good to go!
But choosing tracing papers is not a task where you have to take much caution; any kind of tracing paper will do. If you need a tip, we would suggest looking for cheap ones which have enough transparency and won’t easily tear while tracing.
Drafting or Masking Tape
Artists will do anything to make sure their paintings remain in good and straight shape while painting so it does not curl up at the touch of water-based paints.
From choosing the right watercolor paper to using the right amount of paints, they also have found another technique to prevent papers from crippling; and that’s taping the paper down.
For this technique, you can either use masking/drafting tape or gummed paper.
Using gummed paper ensures that the paper remains flat on top of a surface. However, gummed papers can get too rigid to remove and at times, require to use of a blade or any sharp object to detach it from the paper.
We do not recommend using force to tear off the tape from the paper because that will only damage the painting.
A masking tape, however, is not as strong as gummed paper. It still holds it in place, but will not be as flat as it should be when using gummed paper. That means you still need to straighten it when the painting is dry.
Nonetheless, the masked tape can be removed easily without harming the condition of the paper.
Spray Bottle
A hair spray bottle will come in handy during the painting process.
If you want different effects on the painting, use a water spray bottle. It has become a technique for achieving and trying out different textures.
It depends on the distance and the amount of water used for spraying, you can work with different kinds of effects.
Glass Jar
A glass jar is where you store all brushes used for painting after you’re done cleaning and drying them.
It does not necessarily have to be made of glass but we mentioned it because it provides better storage and you can see through the glass whenever you have to choose a preferred brush with a name on it.
We would recommend using a medium-sized glass jar if you own only a few brushes now.
But if you have a lot of brushes, make sure to store them in a glass jar which is much bigger so that when you put in a brush, it does not touch the bristles of other brushes and increase the chance of warping or getting damaged too early. There should be enough space in the jar when moving the brushes.
We also suggest getting three glass jars for your brushes because you can use one for rough cleaning, one for proper cleaning, and the last for storing your brushes.
Liquid latex, which is commonly known as masking fluid, is used to create blank white spots on the painting. These are areas where you don’t want the paint to touch.
Sometimes, when working with watercolors, it becomes hard to avoid certain areas in which you want to stay white (like painting dozens of stars, for example). And in this case, using masked fluid would be an excellent choice.
Masking fluids protect the areas by repelling any liquid and then you can peel it off when finished. Those areas will still remain blank as your desired effect..
Masking fluid can come really handy once you start to get the hang of using it.
Watercolor Sponges
Another one of the best non-traditional techniques is using a sponge for achieving different effects in watercolor painting.
If you want to paint small textures which will probably take forever using a brush, then a sponge is the best option for this. It is comparably faster to achieve a texture that you like.
Any type of sponges will work for watercolor painting. However, if you want to explore different textures, we would recommend using a natural sponge.
A natural sponge comes in different textures and there’s no telling which pattern you’re getting next, hence, it also becomes a great option for achieving a spontaneous painting.
But if you want to manipulate and have more control over the pattern outcome, you can always cut the sponge and trim it to get the desired texture. If not, there are always sponges available online or at an art store that has a variety of sponges with different textures.
Water Jar
Needless to say, this is an obvious tool needed for watercolor painting. How else are you going to mix watercolor paints without water?
But the reason it is worth mentioning here is that some of us can be a little careless at times and forget the most necessary materials because they’re too small to notice that they’re missing.
When you’re painting at home, we see there’s no need to pay attention to small things like these. Even when there’s no water jar kept separately for painting, you can always use a bowl or something else to substitute that.
But a water jar becomes necessary when you go plein air. Either keep a separate one for this purpose or buy brushes that come along with a barrel that you can use it to store the water.
Having a jar helps you stay organized as a painter. There is no need to keep looking for a different bowl/container every time you have to paint.
By practicing keeping a separate water jar, it will become a habit to carry it wherever you go plein air; you will automatically remember to store it along with the other supplies.
Conclusion
So these are all the basic supplies you’ll need for your studio. Few of them are available online or at a local art store, while for some, you can use alternatives without having to shed some extra money.
We hope this article was helpful and we’d like to see you again soon.
Watercolors are a simple yet challenging medium to work on. Practicing various painting techniques with watercolors can help you master it.
Artists are generally thought of as expressive and emotive - at least when it comes to their canvas. Painting is therapeutic, and even if you don’t consider yourself an expert, experimenting with watercolors can be exhilarating.
As it was rightly said by famous painter Bob Ross, “There are no mistakes, only happy accidents.” When it comes to learning a new technique, the best way to do it is by picking up the brush, dipping it in paints, and creating magic on the canvas.
Do you paint as a hobby, or are new to the world of watercolors? Well, this guide has been created for anyone who is looking for watercolor painting ideas and inspiration.
So without further ado, let’s bring out our paints and get started!
I've always loved the deep tranquility of the forest. With each brushstroke, I've tried to capture that feeling, using a palette of various shades of green.
In this painting, I focused on 4 types of trees: pine tree, cypress, aspen, and teak. Each tree species has unique characteristics that I've tried to emphasize in watercolor.
One of the first watercolor painting ideas to try out is a simplistic, colorful balloon painting. Wet your watercolor paper and use any light color to create a soft background - maybe a sky or splash pattern. Use bright colors to make two inverted egg-shaped balloons and add a string.
17. Balancing Zen Stones
Try creating balancing stones to tune in to your inner Zen. Begin by outlining, then use gray, white, and shades of black to add delicate details. Don’t forget to add the shadow! You can use this reference image for tips.
18. Sea Of Poppies
Create a splotchy watercolor background by dropping paint water on your wet canvas or watercolor paper. Once dry, add beautiful purple poppies using rounded strokes and a long stem.
19. Mountain Scenery
Painting mountains with watercolors is easier than it looks. Use a simple layering technique with light shades to create the mountain background. Check if it is completely dry, then add dark-colored trees.
20. Abstract Art
Let your imagination run wild! Create abstract designs and shapes using whichever color you wish to express your emotions for the day. Abstract art is one of the most fulfilling ways of letting your paints do the talking for you.
21. Dusk
Painting dusk sceneries can be challenging, but there are always online tutorials to help. Opt for darker pastels and create a scenery at dusk for this one. Start with lighter shades and build up to darker ones.
22. Bird
Outline a bird and fill it in with bright watercolors. Add some branches and fruits to complete your painting. Don’t forget to include a small beak and a white gleam in its eye for the reflection of light.
23. Farmhouse
Paint this beautiful farmhouse, complete with trees, flowers, and the sky. This can take a couple of days to complete, but once it’s done, you can sell it. Trust us, it’s so thrilling to see once it's complete.
24. Half Sunflower
Not confident enough to paint a full sunflower? Try painting half! Opt for bright yellow and orange shades and use black for details. Tune in to your inner Van Gogh with this one.
25. Lighthouse
While this watercolor painting does require some skill and patience, the end result is stunning. Use a template to create the structure if you need help. Remember to add a background to complete it.
26. Abstract Trees
The background for this painting idea is astounding - create a colorful transition using different shades. Add the silhouette of a tree and branches, and finish off by dropping splotches of colored paint.
27. Cup Of Tea
Fancy a cup of tea? Why not paint it using brown and red watercolor shades? Add the teabag in for a unique effect. Creating shadows will give the painting a realistic appeal.
28. Fall tree
Fall trees remind you of the warm sun, pumpkin patches, and shades of orange. Use a wet toothbrush dipped in paint to create the effect of flowers. Try a wet-on-wet technique with watercolors for the orange leaves.
29. Flamingo
A favorite subject amongst most painters - is the majestic flamingo! Outline first, filling it in slowly with shades of pink, red, and white. Add a splash watercolor effect at the back for a mesmerizing result.
30. Rainbow Trees
Ditch the monotone trees and try creating rainbow-colored ones instead! Use all the colors on your watercolor palette and add black for detailing work. Let your creativity run wild with this one.
31. Bright Flowers
Paint brightly colored flowers using a wet-on-wet technique for this watercolor painting idea. Remember to add a bright, contrasting background for a special effect. Use different size brushes for the flowers.
32. Pastel Roses
Using a dry-on-dry technique for this watercolor painting, paint with undiluted soft shades to create roses. Add a vase and some dark green ferns to complete it. Once done, you can use this as a postcard for loved ones.
33. Lavender Trees
Start by creating the curved tree trunk and branches. Add the lavender leaves and flowers using both wet-on-wet and wet-on-dry techniques for added details. Create a bright purple shade by adding some pink to your lavender paint.
34. Seahorse
Create an emerald seahorse with this watercolor painting inspiration. Use the wet toothbrush technique to add colored bubbles in the background, giving it an underwater effect. Cover the seahorse with a piece of paper if you don’t want to add the colored splotches to it.
35. Misty Waters
A soft but mesmerizing watercolor landscape. Use lighter blue shades to create the misty waters, keeping lots of white space for effect. The negative space will enhance the appeal of this watercolor painting.
36. Hibiscus
Created using a ‘wash technique’ with watercolors, this hibiscus is an excellent way to practice your watercolor techniques. Use shades of red and white to create it. Add green stems and black detailing work.
37. Sunset Cacti
Using beautiful shades of navy, orange, and yellow, create a gradient background for this watercolor painting. Then, use black paint to make the cacti silhouette, and add some details for bushes.
38. Simple Flower
An extremely simple watercolor technique to practice for beginners. Use a wet-on-wet technique to make a watery background effect, picking any colors you wish. Once it is dry, add a minimalistic flower, and you’re done!
39. Roses
Roses are some of the most beautiful concepts to paint using watercolor. Since they’re found in a variety of colors, experiment with your watercolor palette and use wet-on-wet techniques to create a bunch of colorful roses.
40. Splatter Painting
Splatter paintings are not only easy but also fun to create. Dip a paintbrush or toothbrush into different watercolor paints and spray them on your canvas. Create shapes and designs as creatively as you can.
41. Flying Egret
This beautiful, white bird with an orange beak is challenging yet impressive. Try your hand at painting this in watercolor using soft white and grey shades and blue for the background. Of course, feel free to use a template or reference to create the bird.
42. Layered Leaves
Layering watercolors can create stunning textures that look like they’ve been made by expert painters! Try it yourself by layering different watercolors over one another. Remember to let one layer dry before painting the next.
43. Lone Boat
Paint a solitary but determined little boat using simple watercolor painting techniques. Try the wet-on-wet technique for creating water ripples and the dry-on-dry technique for the boat. Remember to use line work for detailing.
44. Sponge Clouds
Love the look of fluffy clouds? Why not try painting them using a sponge? Dip a dry sponge into watercolors and blot it on watercolor paper to create dreamy clouds. Choose any watercolor shade you like for this one.
45. Red Radish
Painting vegetables can be fun. Paint this red radish using red and pink and a thin brush to create the roots in beige. Add the green leaves on its crown to finish. You can use a real vegetable in front of you to make this into a still-life painting.
46. Night Sky
Create a night sky watercolor painting using shades of blue and black. Add white stars and black trees to make the painting pop. Try different effects to create the background.
47. Bicycle Basket With Flowers
This watercolor painting looks extremely attractive because of its use of bright colors. Paint the bicycle in whichever color you wish and add colorful flowers to complete it. You don’t need to paint the entire cycle if you don’t wish to.
48. Lavender Fields
Lavender fields look striking, especially against a sunny background. Pick a vivid purple color for the fields and add a bright sun for this one. Add a splash effect to make it pop.
49. Rainbow Giraffe
A colorful, rainbow idea to jazz up a monotone giraffe painting. Add clouds and pouring, colorful rain for effects. Take the help of a reference image to draw the giraffe.
50. Dreamcatcher
Dreamcatchers are meant to catch your deepest, innermost dreams and desires. Make your dreamcatcher come to life by painting it with vibrant watercolors.
51. Dandelions
Another popular idea for watercolor painters - the dandelion. Paint a couple using unique colors like blue, green or your favorite watercolor shades. Add any background effects you wish to experiment with.
52. Happy Orangutan
Paint a happy baby orangutan using shades of brown, orange, and white. Don’t forget to add a big, dreamy smile!
53. Solitary Dandelion
How about painting a solitary dandelion for a change? You can see a blue one in this image, but feel free to add any other color to your artwork.
54. Fuschia
Attempt these magnificent fuschia flowers using a mixture of colors to create the exact shade. Opt for a splash effect for the background.
55. Geometric Flower
The beauty of this watercolor painting lies in its tasteful shading. Try layering techniques to create this shaded effect for your flower.
56. Crossing
Paint a busy street with a zebra crossing using advanced watercolor techniques. Take a photograph for reference to get the shading right.
57. Doors
Remaking door paintings have been popular for generations. Create your own using watercolors and add bright flowers for effect.
58. Flowers
Yet another idea for watercolor flowers - try painting them in a clear glass pitcher. Add some shaded shadows below for effect.
59. Bird Study
This cute, fluffy bird is worth spending a few days painting. Add a spot of white to its beady black eyes to make the pop.
60. Church Door
Instead of traditional doors, how about painting a watercolor church door this time? Add black details with a pen.
61. Sparrow
This watercolor painting features a tiny sparrow on cherry blossom branches. Use your imagination to create a colorful background.
62. Colorful Dreamcatcher
Similar to the previous dreamcatcher on our list, this one has a cleaner backdrop but more vivid feathers.
63. Skull
Begin by drawing a rough skull, then fill it up with black, grey, and white watercolors. Add a drip effect with rainbow colors for the background.
64. Autorickshaw
Found commonly on Southeast Asian roads, the autorickshaw can be an interesting subject to paint. Keep the background minimalistic for this one.
65. Purple Flowers
Purple and pink are lively colors to opt for. Paint watercolor flowers using various shades of these colors and add a green contrast. Use different techniques for this painting, mixing wet on wet and wet on dry methods.
66. Simple Vase Flowers
Sketch a long neck, and thin vase with flowers, and use watercolors to paint them in your creative style. Keep the background simple to make the flowers pop. Add a table or window in the background if you wish to.
67. Pink Roses
The best part about this pink rose painting is its colorful background. Let your creative juices flow with this one! Don’t be fussy about the paint, instead, let it flow and create its masterpiece.
68. Simple Trees
Paint simple trees by adding splotches of greens and yellow, and some black penwork for detailing. Don’t forget a colorful background!
70. Lord Krishna
A classic Indian God, Krishna, was painted in a minimalistic style. This idea is great for those who want to practice making watercolor figures. Use any reference image for this one, picking a bright, dark blue for the figure.
71. Autumn
Embrace autumn with this rich, orange and red tree painting. Scatter some leaves on the floor to make it more realistic. Remember to let the paint dry first, before adding the leaves on the floor.
72. Seaside
A unique seaside painting complete with long-stemmed plants painted in black silhouette. Add a bright sun and its reflection on the blue water. Use a wet-on-wet technique for the watery effect.
73. Lake & Trees
Honestly, this one looks like a Bob Ross painting. It does require some skill, but attempting it is so much fun! Watch a tutorial for more guidance, or simply use this reference image as your guide.
74. Cone Flower
Although it looks minimalistic, it’s quite challenging to make this coneflower. Use a fine-tip black marker to add finer details. Don’t be a perfectionist - let the paints flow freely for this one.
75. Hummingbird
Draw a hummingbird and fill it in with bright, green watercolors. Add a long, black beak and a branch for it to perch on! Remember to paint a long, dark beak to complete it.
76. Abstract Landscape
Painting abstract landscapes can be a great way to practice different watercolor painting techniques. Try experimenting with wet on wet, dry brush, gradient, and wash techniques when making these paintings.
77. Abstract Christmas Tree
Christmas trees are always fun to paint, but how about trying an abstract one this time? Create fluid brush strokes with dark and light green and use paint splotches for the background.
78. Superman
Who doesn’t love Superman, right? Try your hand at this watercolor Superman painting by using red and blue. Keep light brush strokes and diluted watercolors for the effect. Create a drip effect using a wet brush for this one.
79. Paint Brushes
Painting still life can be one of the best ways to practice any art technique. Place your paintbrushes in a glass jar or mug, keep them on a table, and start painting! Inspiration is right in front of you.
80. Tulips
Practice painting watercolor flowers by choosing different species as inspiration. This time, paint some watercolor tulips in bright, vibrant colors. Flower paintings are a great way to practice different watercolor techniques.
81. Flying Hummingbird
If you’ve already painted the sitting hummingbird, you’re probably up for a new challenge. Try painting a flying hummingbird, complete with a beautiful flower and vibrant background.
82. Colorful Lighthouse
Coming back to lighthouses, why not pop in a splash of color for this one? Look at a reference image and draw a lighthouse. Complete it by adding vivid watercolors and a brilliant sky.
83. Portrait
Painting portraits is challenging. Opt for this abstract girl portrait with dream-like blue eyes. Choose a fun backdrop to blend it in. You can replace the girl image with a boy if you wish to experiment further.
84. Flower Vase
Why are flowers so popular amongst watercolor artists? Maybe because they’re so much fun to paint! How about this brightly colored bunch of flowers in a beautiful, blue vase? Make the flowers brightly colored or monotone, as you wish.
85. Enchanted Woods
Once you learn the wet-on-wet watercolor technique, use mystical shades of blue, purple, black, and a pop of pink to create this enchanted woods painting. Complete it by adding a deer silhouette.
86. Catching Stars
Create this beautiful concept painting of a little girl on a ladder trying to catch stars. You might need a reference photo which you can find online, but painting it should be super fun!
87. Mountains
Instead of scaling the mountains, how about painting them? Use gradients and soft shading to create this mountain landscape painting. Remember to use a layering technique to create the effect of mountains at the back.
88. Pine Cone
You can take this as a still life painting by actually getting a pine cone, or simply take this reference image to paint it. It’s quite a fun watercolor exercise to try! Keep the background simple so the focus remains on the pine cone.
89. Blue Jay
Paint this wonderful Blue Jay using your best blue and gray watercolor shades. Remember to draw a pretty branch for your Blue Jay to sit on. Draw the bird first, so you have a reference of how much to paint.
90. Waterscape
A perfect postcard image of two boats on the water. This watercolor painting might require some skill, especially for the water effect, but it’s fun to try out nonetheless. Try using a wet-on-wet technique for the ‘water ripples’ effect.
91. Owl
Try painting the wise owl using your watercolor shades of brown and oranges. This is a fluffy bird, so make sure you add lots of feathers. Add a few lines of blue on its underside, just to make a shadow effect.
92. Poppies
You can never paint enough flowers. This time around, try painting these beautiful yellow poppies as your next watercolor painting inspiration. Intertwine the stems to create a unique effect, and don’t forget to add a background.
93. Day & Night
This is a brilliant concept of a day and night painting on one single canvas. Paint a day scenery on the top and a nightscape at the bottom. Flip the painting to show off both styles of art.
94. Midnight Sky
Skies are always super fun to paint. It allows you to use various effects like gradients, splash, textures, etc. Paint this midnight sky by opting for darker shades of blue and purple. Add the silhouette of trees to the finish.
95. Rainbow Elephant
Painting animals with watercolor is an exhilarating project. The elephant especially is fun to paint. This gentle giant has been painted in shades of purple, pink, and navy. It seems like it has stepped into a puddle of rainbow colors, which is a great effect to recreate.
96. Wish Dandelion
Although this is another dandelion watercolor, its gradient background gives it a unique vibe. Keep the center of the dandelion white, while painting the rest of the background in vivid colors of your choice. Add details with markers and write ‘Wish’ in cursive at the top for a special effect.
97. Florals
To end with, we are adding another beautiful floral watercolor painting. Although it looks abstract, a great deal of detailed work has gone into this one. Start with a colorful background using the wet-on-wet technique, and let it dry completely before making the flowers.
Final Words
With that, we have come to the end of our massive list of watercolor painting ideas!
Learning anything new requires patience and effort. When it comes to watercolors, the challenge is different. Watercolors are notorious for having a mind of their own. Remember one thing about learning this technique - it is best to let the colors flow freely and see where it takes you.
The mistake beginners make with watercolors is trying to control its flow. Instead of doing that, just let the colors blend into each other, creating their own mesmerizing textures and patterns. As with anything, it takes some practice to get comfortable with watercolors. So don’t hesitate. Pick up your brushes and start painting.
Watercolors act as an excellent tool for expressing the works of an artist’s creative mind.
Some painters who are just starting out choose to explore the scopes of watercolors using their own techniques - a splendid approach that nurtures creativity.
On the other hand, some want to learn what has already worked for others. This is also a great way to start because then they will know what and what not to do at a much faster pace.
First of all, it is highly essential that one must learn the basics of a subject before they can become a master at it. The same thing applies to watercoloring as well.
There are many sources out there that one can go to for guidance.
Reading a book is comparatively better because you can easily stop, think, and re-engage whenever you want to. Another reason to read a book is that it strategically describes all the small and minute details that other sources fail to do.
And in today’s article, we have picked out the most useful and highly recommended watercolor painting books which one needs to learn.
Best Watercolor Painting Books
Besides the fact that these books have worked for many artists, they also contain specific techniques and instructions that will introduce the amateur artist to a whole different level of watercoloring, while recommending useful skills to the experienced one.
With 128 pages and numerous instructions about watercoloring, this book by Matthew Palmer is a must-have for beginners.
Inside this book, there are 12 outlines for drawing, 6 fascinating projects as well as hundreds of demonstrations to help a beginner out in producing an exceptional piece of watercolor painting.
Experience
We find this book to be extra helpful for artists who are new to watercoloring and still not sure where to begin, as well as for those who are concerned with outlining or sketching before actually getting into the painting process.
Most developing artists find the book to be rather helpful when understanding the complications of watercolor as a painting medium.
This book contains everything a beginner needs to know about watercoloring, hence, it has saved us a lot of money which we could have paid for an expensive art class.
Moreover, we like that throughout the whole book, there are recommendations for using particular painting materials like certain brushes and paints, which we find really suitable.
While the book tells us about simple and elementary color mixing, it does not stress much about how some colors work well together, however. But keeping that aside, this is an incredible, complete beginner’s guide to watercoloring.
Pros
Provides detailed descriptions about the different techniques and methods of watercoloring
It offers recommendations of using particular painting materials that work well for various instances
Contains up to 12 outlines and 6 projects
Cons
Includes simple illustrations for color mixing but lacks information about better color balance
Here is another book which consists of 128 instructional pages.
Judging by its name, this book by Veronica Lilja may appear to be oriented towards those who have reached expert levels and slowly starting to get tired of using watercolors.
However, the name is somewhat misleading because the book contains guidelines for beginners to follow as well.
Experience
What we love about this book is that it includes a set of techniques and color-mixing guides which serve both beginners and experts. And apart from that, it offers suggestions to use different types of supplies and papers for watercolors.
We also get to explore various topics such as the comparison between warm and cool tones, color wheels, and many other aspects of watercolors.
Another good thing about this guide is that it is flexible.
Unlike other tutorials which require completion of a task before a given time period or that need us to follow certain guides strictly, this book allows us to experiment with watercolors while getting guidance at the same time.
Pros
It contains a number of strategies for beginners to take on, as well as innovative and non-traditional techniques for the experienced artist
Allows readers and watercolorists to see the extent to which watercolors can go and experiment with it
Cons
The title of the book is confusing as it seems to target only seasoned artists
This book is for artists who have had a lot of experience with watercolor paintings and want to try something new. What it includes are state-of-the-art techniques and suggestions to make watercoloring more enticing.
The author, Ray Henderson, is an esteemed watercolor artist whose artworks reflect his brilliant, ingenious mind. Through his book, you’ll be able to see his unique methods for creating outstanding watercolor art.
Experience
First of all, we find this book to be very easy to follow because it breaks down complicated instructions into much simpler ones.
For instance, within the book, there are a number of full-sized pictures and right beside them are specific portions of the image which the author keeps aside to explain what type of technique he used for achieving that kind of effect.
Secondly, it teaches and provides complete details on how to create amazing textures in watercolor paintings. And since textures are almost always required for producing exceptional paintings, we think this guide is a must-have for both an advanced beginner and a watercolor expert.
However, the paperback version does not contain high-quality pictures, and we have to settle for the hardcover version which comes at a slightly higher price.
And if you are one of those artists who are really concerned about the quality of a painting, this book will be just what you need.
Pros
The book provides amazing illustrations when it comes to texture techniques with watercolors
It thoroughly explains how to achieve a particular effect most easily
Cons
The paperback version of this book contains low-quality images, and one has to settle for a higher priced hardcover
Kristin Van Leuven wrote this book which is so much different from the rest of other guides.
The reason is that there are two parts to it. One section focuses on the essentials of colors and supplies while the other section focuses on exploring resist art (a technique where several layers are used to highlight a design with the use of a medium such as tape) and concentrating on common painting subjects such as flowers, landscapes, animals, etc.
Experience
When we struggle with the process of watercoloring, we tend to lose focus on what we need to do for achieving great painting results. And this book really helps when it comes to situations like this.
The best thing about this book is that the author chose to use a simple language for communication rather than highly technical terms which might be difficult for a beginner to understand.
The 8-pages techniques which inform us how to achieve the desired effect using multiple methods are quite enlightening. For example, we learn to add the necessary amount of water to mix with the right amount of colors for various painting effects.
Then, we also learn about the resist technique in 12 pages which provides detailed explanations on how to use them properly.
Another great thing about this book is that it provides knowledge about the world of watercolor painting as no other book does. Therefore, if you want to go from a complete beginner to a much more experienced artist, then this book is for you.
The book is only intended solely for beginners because it provides only basic information and is not for artists of the intermediate level. Painters who are already familiar with the basics may not find this book to be helpful although they are still learning how to paint with watercolors.
Pros
Introduces all the ins and outs of watercoloring to the absolute beginner
The book contains simple terms which anybody can understand
Cons
The guides provided by this book are only for beginners and not for artists of intermediate level
This book by Gordon MacKenzie allows the artist to explore endless watercolor scopes and ideas through the use of delightful and easy instructions.
It leads both beginners and seasoned artists to the world of watercolors using light, casual structures to successfully come up with a great piece of art.
Experience
Rather than using guidelines, the book itself takes the reader for a ride through the whole creation process.
The reason we chose to include this book on this list is that it is entirely different from other guides by letting learners see the step-by-step, non-traditional journey for creating an exceptional piece of painting.
This process is effective because we feel that we’re in the author’s shoes, scrutinizing each step carefully.
Even with the informal style of guidance one gets from this book, we are still able to produce remarkable paintings.
Another great thing about this book is that we get both The Watercolorist’s Essential Notebook and The Watercolorist’s Essential Notebook: Landscapes in one place.
However, the book’s whole explanation concept is lengthy at times and might not work for everyone, especially those who like to follow single sentence instructions.
Pros
This book delivers a guide for both beginners and experts in an informal way, allowing them to observe each and every step carefully
It also includes two North Light watercolor guides that are essential for any creative artist
For the price of two different guides, this book is highly affordable
Cons
The book’s concept of explanation might not work for those who choose to follow short and crisp guides
In this 142-page guide, you will be able to see the fantastic life-like artworks on cityscapes and landscapes achieved by using multiple creative steps and techniques.
This guide leans more towards bettering the advanced artist whose aim is to improve their paintings on both landscapes and cityscapes.
However, the steps provided by the author are so easy that a learner can also follow if they choose to take on this wonderful journey.
Experience
To experienced watercolorists, this book brings new ideas and demonstrations which enhance their present styles of painting by using the author’s approaches.
We liked that in one way, this book covers all the basics of watercoloring in minute details which beginners would find helpful since every explanation is a byproduct of answering frequently asked questions about watercolor paintings.
While at the same time, it helps a seasoned artist to see the extent that watercolors could go to by following the suggested techniques.
Besides that, we gain a lot of insights into the struggles and successes experienced and shared by the author.
But because the book clearly focuses only on producing great landscape art, it might not be useful for artists who want to learn the different subject matters of watercolor paintings.
Pros
A large section of the book’s guidance is based on questions raised by artists every now and then, making it more relatable and reliable
It includes many instances encountered by the author so that it helps readers, especially beginners, in knowing what to expect
Cons
As good as the book is, the demonstrations are only limited to those of landscape and cityscape paintings
This next book by Cathy Johnson is a good option for the absolute beginner.
Inside this 128-page guide, there are full-sized pictures in each page along with brief and very clear demonstrations about them.
Besides being quite simple in explanation, the author also uses simple terms and language to convey the methods to her audience so that anybody can easily get the idea.
Experience
This guide provides a complete guide to using different tools and materials for painting and proper color mixing that makes the process of learning come easily to a beginner.
There are times when we think that teaching ourselves the art of watercolor painting is pretty hard to achieve immediately. But that’s not the case with this guide; everything we read is available in a simple form and everything we have to follow is broken down into the easiest manners possible.
With a guide as such, we can start painting with watercolors efficiently within a few days.
Moreover, the paintings we are able to achieve with this guide are remarkable and realistic to the eye of any beholder.
The ebook version of this guide contains poor-quality images. Therefore, we do not recommend buying it.
Pros
This book offers the determined beginner a number of easy ways to learn how painting with watercolor works
The tricks available in this book help deliver realistic and exceptional watercolor artworks
Cons
The ebook version contains images which do not produce good-quality images when zoomed in for a better view
Shirley Trevana in her book Breaking The Rules of Watercolour adds 10 watercolor paintings followed by revealing her thoughts while creating them.
With this process, we not only see what’s genuine narration but we get to learn the do’s and don’ts of watercolor artworks using her techniques.
In this book, you’ll see how the author creates amazing artworks by continuously looking for alternative ways to make the best use of watercolors.
Experience
To put it out there first, this book is not a guide for beginners because the kind of illustration which the author used leans more towards those who already have enough knowledge of this medium.
That being said, the book shows us personal methods which the author used to create these 10 paintings.
We get to see the way Shirley was able to come up with extraordinary paintings is by using her unique methods. These methods include her own style of creating textures, different perspectives, and most importantly, her way of combining colors to get the best results out of them.
Moreover, the features of these 10 paintings used in the book are very clear and of high quality so that the reader can observe all the textures carefully.
Pros
The whole guide is based on using the author’s unique methods of taking watercolors to their highest level
All the pictures in the book are enhanced so that the reader can closely watch each attribute and brushstroke
Cons
The demonstrations in this book seem to be intended only for knowledgeable artists, hence, beginners will find it hard to understand the guide
Here is a book that will work pretty well for anyone who likes to paint for fun. Anybody who reads this book will find it to be pleasing and entertaining rather than serious and descriptive.
The book covers almost all the basics about watercoloring, and is therefore great for learners.
Experience
We like that this book provides short and crisp guides which are very easy to understand for anybody. With a brief guide, you can jump from one step to another step pretty easily.
What we like about this book is that it has fun and fascinating guides that make us look forward to what’s in store for us on the next day.
We find the concept to be constructive because unlike other guides which you read once a while, this one actually helps form a habit for us.
The guide helps us learn and practice one new step every day, ensuring better and quicker learning. So, if you are determined to learn about watercolor paintings, this book might be the best choice for you.
However, the problem with the short guides is that they don’t answer or clarify doubts. If you need a better explanation, you won’t be able to find it here.
Pros
The book contains short and crisp ideas that any reader would understand and easily follow
The guide’s concept is entertaining, which makes it fun to read
Cons
These steps are meant only for giving ideas/techniques and not to provide extra information or to clarify any doubts
Watercolor Painting Books Conclusion
Well, that’s it, folks! Those are the best watercolor painting books that we have chosen specifically for you. We hope you found this article helpful enough and enjoyed reading it!
While painting on paper is fairly common, using watercolor on wood can create interesting effects and a distinct style, making it a great medium. Wood also allows the watercolor to stick better to the surface, and the colors appear brighter, especially when you prepare it well using proper primer and varnish.
Since watercolor paint is a diverse medium that is robust and easy to apply, it can be used on various flat surfaces, such as watercolor paper, wood, glass, and fabrics. Most artists prefer wood panels since they’re compatible with most paints, and their natural wood grains can add elegance and texture to the work of art.
However, working with wooden surfaces can also be quite tricky since they are porous in nature. So, you must create a suitable and well-prepared flat surface before you paint watercolor on wood, and this can be done by choosing the right natural grain and applying primer.
Besides these techniques, you must know other important steps to create a watercolor painting on a wood panel. We will discuss those steps in this guide, so keep reading!
How To Use Watercolor On Wood: A Step-by-Step Guide
Materials You Need
As with any other art medium, achieving the best results to create watercolor paintings on wood highly depends on the materials used. Good quality materials - from wood and varnish to art supplies like brush and paint - all of them play an important role in the process of creating long-lasting art.
Many artists who work with watercolor paints have started utilizing various eco-friendly surfaces, such as a thick canvas and synthetic, recyclable materials like Yupo papers. However, watercolors on wood remain the most preferable for their unique pattern and smooth surface.
Here are the materials you will need to get started:
High-quality watercolor paint
Sandpaper
Dust removal kit
Primer for prep work
Varnish for sealing
Paper towel or damp cloth
Mask, eye goggles, and gloves for safety
Water and paintbrush
These materials are easily available at craft stores, so you need not worry about their availability.
Step 1: Know Your Watercolor Paint
We are all aware of how watercolors work, but we’d like to reiterate a few key points for better understanding. Firstly, different watercolors have different compositions. However, most of them are made using gum arabic, a binding agent that combines with water to activate different colors. Some other brands also use linseed oil as a binding agent for their watercolor paint.
So, it’s important to look into the binding agents used and other chemicals included in the paint when you purchase it from the local craft store. You can also avoid the hassle of checking every watercolor product by using trusted brands, such as Daniel Smith or Winsor & Newton.
After purchasing the watercolor paints, activate the pigments in a palette to understand how they might appear on different materials.
Step 2: Preparing the Wood Surface by Sanding
Most often, you find a wood panel or piece that has a nice natural grain or texture - that’s why you must sand the wood to prepare it for watercolor. Use fine-grit sandpaper to sand the areas where you will add paint. This will create a smoother finish that will help the pigment pop when activated.
If you have a large piece of wood or a wide wood panel, you can try sanding a smaller area in the middle. This will alleviate the surface surrounding the middle, giving a framed look. Many artists use this method since it’s quite difficult to frame wood. Attach the sandpaper to a drill for better grip and control, and ensure you sand the wood in a well-ventilated room.
Step 3: Remove Dust And Wood Shavings
After the sanding process is over, you’ll find several wood shavings and a significant amount of dust on the wood and the workstation. You must remove this unless you want a different kind of texture that utilizes wood shavings - but be warned, they’re quite tricky to incorporate.
The best way to remove the fine particles from the surface is by simply blowing the loose debris off. We recommend using a vacuum cleaner with the blower settings and adding a thin nozzle to the opening. Blow the air both with and against the wood grain. This will create a striated intersection on the wood, which will give you a canvas-like appearance.
Alternatively, you can use a bottle of compressed air, which is often used to remove dust from computer keyboards.
Step 4: Apply Primer
When the wood is properly sanded, wipe down the surface with a damp cloth and paper towel to prepare it for primer application. Since watercolor paints contain gum arabic, they may be tacky while applied on a surface with no primer. Moreover, a primer helps the watercolors move fluidly on the surface, making it easier for you to blend and layer them.
The best primer for watercoloring on wood is watercolor ground, preferably in an iridescent gold color that compliments the natural finish of the wood. You can use this primer directly from the container and apply them on wood, metal, canvas, etc. At first, apply a light coat with a synthetic flat brush to get a smooth texture, but if you want a rough texture, use a brush with natural bristles instead.
Moreover, you must remember that the watercolor ground makes the surface more absorbable, so ensure you use little water. When applied in thin layers, the iridescent gold primer will create the perfect canvas for your art.
Another primer you can use instead of watercolor ground is Gesso, which is affordable and easy to use. Mostly used for acrylic and oil paints, an even layer of super heavy or light Gesso that resolves absorption issues and allows the watercolor to move more freely. The most prominent benefit of Gesso is that it doesn’t yellow over time, but it requires thorough sanding if you decide to use more than one layer.
Step 5: Painting with Watercolor on Wood
Painting on wood with watercolor is similar to painting on other surfaces - you can follow your favorite painting technique, preferred texture, and artistic goals. However, we recommend applying the paint with thicker layers compared to when you apply watercolor on canvas or paper. A thicker consistency with less water content will stick better onto the wooden surface and prevent dripping.
Alternatively, you can apply a great number of very thin layers of watercolor paint. In this case, you need to be extra careful so that the layers aren’t too thin to avoid dripping and are thick enough to have a visual impact.
Step 6: Finishing and Sealing the Wood
The final step in creating a watercolor painting on wood is sealing it with a varnish. This step ensures your artwork lasts longer - the varnish protects the wooden surface from humidity, preventing it from rotting or yellowing with age. When it comes to watercolor paintings, we recommend sealing the wood with clear-coat spray before applying varnish, like Krylon.
If you want to protect your watercolor painting further, consider applying an epoxy resin layer (artist-grade) to the already sealed surface of the painting. This will provide extra protection to the gum arabic in watercolors, which are vulnerable to moisture.
You can also protect your painting with glass by making a customized wooden frame, but ensure the glass isn't too thick. Glass can provide robust protection against humidity and prevents warm color from fading due to bright lighting.
Advanced Techniques
Wood serves as an excellent medium to experiment with different painting techniques. We’ve already discussed how artists prefer building the painting layer by layer, especially when it comes to wood. This offers better results than simply daubing it on the surface, but it takes quite a lot of time and patience. So here are some other techniques you can employ to achieve your artistic goals:
1. Blending
Properly using blending techniques in your watercolor painting can give you the advantage of creating certain interesting textures and shadow effects. To get started, choose a particular color and create a dark and light version using white and black, as required.
Start with either the dark or light shade. Then, while the paint is still wet, add the other shade and blend them gently. Make sure the first layer of color starts to pop through the second layer - the two shades shouldn’t totally mix with each other.
2. Ombre Effect
Ombre is a very popular technique among artists, who use it to express a single shade through various iterations by reflecting light from different angles. For example, you can start with a very dark shade of color and progressively lighten it until it’s totally white.
The easiest way to create the perfect ombre is by “washing” the wood before applying paint. Simply cover the surface with a thin layer of water, and then add a dark pigment at the bottom of the wooden piece. While moving towards the top, keep adding pigment in small amounts and ensure you wash it down to create lighter shades. And although this method can be a bit messy, it creates a scattered yet romantic effect.
These two methods aren’t the only ways you can create interesting watercolor paintings on wood. Experiment with different shades, textures, and water content to find a style that suits you best.
How To Use Watercolor On Wood FAQs
What kind of wood can I use for watercolor painting?
Most wood species can be compatible with watercolor paints, but we recommend using soft wood types. Consider pine or even balsa since they absorb the paints better, making them last longer. Hardwood, such as oak, maple, or rosewood, has a tendency to soak too much watercolor, which prevents them from showing up brighter and lasting longer.
Do I need to prepare the wood before painting with watercolor?
Yes, absolutely. Preparing the wood before applying watercolor paint is important since it ensures you have a fresh, smoother surface to work with. Unwanted texture and ridges can ruin your painting by disintegrating the color and not giving you the pigment you wanted.
What types of watercolor paints should I use for painting on wood?
Most watercolor types are compatible with wood as a medium. If you properly prep the wood, apply high-quality primer and varnish. And just to be on the safe side, consider purchasing brands that are trustworthy and have been on the market for a long time.
Can I mix watercolor paints with other mediums, such as acrylic or oil paint?
Yes, you can. Combining watercolor paints with acrylic or oil paints can give you a thicker application, which easily sticks on the wood surface and doesn’t drip.
How do I protect the watercolor painting on wood?
The best way to protect a watercolor painting on wood is by applying a nice coat of varnish on the completed piece of art. You can also frame it with glass to protect it from humidity and dust, helping your art last longer.
To Sum It Up
Wood can be a good medium for watercolor painting, especially if you want unique patterns and textures that cannot be achieved on paper or canvas. The one disadvantage of using watercolor on wood is the amount of time lost in thoroughly preparing the surface, but the awe-inspiring results are more than enough for compensating it.
And if you’ve never tried watercolor on wood or considered doing it, you may want to try it out - the whole process is fun and worthwhile. You’ll get better color payoffs, better ombre and layering effects, greater durability, and unique textures, which will help you create memorable art. This experience will also help you understand how watercolor paints respond to different mediums.
Alternatively, if you want to try something less complicated first, consider using textured clay to get the hang of how textured surfaces like wood really work.
Watercolor canvases are the most popular art media among professional artists due to their huge margin of error, low absorbency, and high durability. Such qualities allow you to experiment with different art styles and techniques, such as wet-on-wet, gradient, lifting, etc., to create unique watercolor paintings.
Many watercolor artists prefer to work with watercolor paper since it’s a versatile medium with high mobility and absorbency.
This traditional art medium is coveted in the painting world due to its durability and the fluidity it allows the watercolor paints to achieve. However, many people are unaware of how well these paints work on watercolor canvas.
The quality of your artwork will depend on the kind of canvas surface you use since some watercolor paints appear brighter and blend better on certain watercolor canvases. But to start working with watercolor canvas, you need to gain a full understanding of the medium and the process of painting watercolor on it.
In this article, we will walk you through all the important details and help you gain mastery over yet another medium. Read on!
Watercolor Paper Vs Canvas: Which One is Better?
Before we further our discussion of watercolor canvas, let’s take a look at how paper and canvas fare when pitted against each other. We’ll discuss six determining factors: absorbency, versatility, lifting capacity, convenience, durability, and availability.
1. Absorbency
Watercolor canvases and papers have almost equal capacity when it comes to absorbing watercolor paints and fixing the painting surface. However, similar to watercolor painting on wood, you have to be extra careful while painting on canvas so as not to disturb the underlying layer. So, there’s going to be a significant learning canvas as you slowly adapt to the techniques and brush strokes that are compatible with normal canvas.
Moreover, building up each layer by washing and putting a glaze or varnish will be extremely difficult on your first try. But don’t lose hope - after a few tries, you’ll master painting on a canvas board and create amazing watercolor paintings.
Once you’ve learned how to blend and layer on watercolor canvas, you’ll notice that canvas surfaces accept watercolor paints less readily than paper. This low absorbency is ideal for painting styles like the wet-on-wet technique since it gives the watercolor artist more time to experiment with the pigment.
2. Versatility
Watercolor canvas is much more versatile than watercolor paper - you can easily create watercolor canvas art using acrylic paints, ink, and even pencils. Ideal for mixed media art, watercolor canvas allows sketching outlines of your subject matter and erasing any errors made. And you’ll find that artwork is much easier to display on stretched canvas instead of paper.
3. Lifting Capacity
Lifting capacity refers to the degree of ease of removing paint colors from the surface or washing it to start over. And watercolor canvas certainly has this capacity - all you need is some clean water and a paper towel, cloth, or sponge. Gently rub it on the canvas surface and get the paint off the surface. You can either erase and fix the error or completely erase your watercolor art to white to start over.
It is often possible to lift paint from watercolor papers as well, but it only works on hot and cold-pressed watercolor paper.
However, this lifting capacity of watercolor canvas products can often be a disadvantage, especially if an artist uses a lot of glazing. This technique is quite difficult on canvas since it requires a lot of patience to move around the watercolor paint without lifting any previous layer. You’ll have to learn how to glaze on canvas through a lot of trial and error, but try to master how to do it quickly without mixing the colors.
4. Convenience
You might often need to prepare your watercolor paper before painting, but a standard canvas doesn’t have this problem. After you purchase canvas boards or pads from the art supply store, you can directly start painting on them without any preparation.
This is because most watercolor canvases are made from 100% cotton (Gossypium hirsutum) and are acid-free, but only a few watercolor papers have this quality. So, purchasing a traditional canvas will be much more affordable than looking for high-quality, artist-transfer paper.
5. Durability
Unlike watercolor paper, normal canvases don’t warp or wrinkle around the edges that easily - it is much more durable in this sense. Plus, they can resist wear and tear or any breakage that is caused by moisture or abrasion. However, you’ll find paint pooling in certain areas of a poor-quality watercolor canvas.
6. Availability
Watercolor canvases are widely available across most art stores, and you’ll find a wide range of sizes as well. The common type used by many artists is the stretched canvas, which allows you to paint on all four sides of the canvas board, giving you more dimensions to work with.
What To Consider While Choosing A Watercolor Canvas?
Always go for acid-free watercolor canvases that are made from 100% organic textile, such as cotton or satin. Keeping these two parameters in mind will save you from various difficulties during painting.
Firstly, an acid-free cotton canvas won’t react to watercolor paints and can create dissimilar colors, and secondly, they’re environment-friendly and not harmful to your health. But ensure you’re purchasing authentic watercolor canvas boards and not just normal boards covered in Gesso.
And since there are various kinds of canvases, including canvas pads, canvas boards, and stretched canvases, many people often get confused when faced with the options. Usually, the difference lies in the size of the canvas, so as long as there’s a label mentioning that it’s compatible with watercolor paints, you’re good to go.
There are two ways you can get started with watercolor canvas. Either you can buy a readymade canvas board, or you can prepare one using watercolor ground. However, preparing canvas can be quite challenging on your first try, so we recommend using readymade ones initially.
Materials You Will Need
Let’s look at the materials you will need to create a watercolor painting on canvas and prepare the surface before you begin painting if required.
Canvas pad/ board
Watercolor ground
Watercolor Gesso
Watercolor paints
Paintbrush, sketch pens, pencils
Paper towel or damp cloth
Watercolor Palette
Fine-grit sandpaper
Varnish
Transfer paper (optional)
Masking fluid
Toothpick or earbuds
All of these supplies should be of good quality. Doing so is a foolproof way of avoiding various challenges one can face while painting, such as color pooling, high absorption, curling, warping, etc.
Preparing Canvas For Watercolor
If you prefer preparing your own watercolor canvas board instead of buying readymade ones, then this basic tutorial is for you. First thing first - you’re going to need watercolor ground, which is a specialized watercolor gesso to help the canvas absorb water-based paints.
Absorbent ground is necessary since most canvases aren’t absorbent enough to keep the colors in place. Even if you add a thin layer of normal gesso without applying ground, there are chances of the paint running off.
Before you prepare the watercolor canvas, you’ll be faced with various watercolor ground choices, but we recommend using the one by Daniel Smith if you’re a beginner. Try using an absorbent ground that is transparent and smooth in texture since it will ease the process of spreading.
The aim is to get a flat, smooth surface for painting, so you can also sand the canvas after applying gesso. Here’s a detailed look into the process:
Step 1
If your watercolor canvas pads or boards are raw, apply two layers of standard gesso to cure the canvas before applying the absorbent ground. Let it completely dry.
Step 2
Apply at least two to six layers of watercolor ground to your pre-stretched canvas, and allow each layer to dry completely before applying the next one. Moreover, if you want a textured surface, start applying the watercolor ground more roughly, starting from the second layer. In this case, you’ll have to apply more layers than you normally would for a smoother surface.
Step 3
Let the watercolor ground cure for at least 24 hours before painting watercolor on it. When it’s completely dry, you can start painting watercolor, oil, and acrylic paints on the surface.
Tip
If you want a very even and smooth surface to paint on, use a fine-grit sandpaper to sand the canvas when it’s completely dry.
Applying Watercolor Paint on Canvas
Now that you know the basic differences in the effects of watercolor paints on canvas and paper, you’re ready to get started. Keep in mind that there will be a period of experimentation and adjustment, which you’ll use to get ahead of the learning curve.
From learning how much paint to use in a single stroke to the glazing process, there’ll be quite a few things you need to get the hang of. So, we recommend utilizing your first watercolor canvas art as a test run.
Experimenting with different brush strokes, paint dilution, and concentration is the key to unlocking the power of blending, layering, and lifting techniques. You can reuse your watercolor canvas simply by lifting colors to correct any errors - this helps prevent waste and achieve a finished painting.
So, as long as there aren’t any layers of sealant or varnish, you can continue to tweak your artwork with different techniques. If you’d rather not lift colors repeatedly, you can cover the error with watercolor grounds and start all over again.
Step-by-Step Guide:
There aren’t any specific instructions for creating a watercolor painting on a canvas pad or board since every artist has their own art style. The basic steps are similar across different painting types, whether you’re using acrylic paint, watercolor, or oil paint. But you can always follow some recommended guidelines to make your first attempt successful. Follow these steps:
Step 1
Before you use watercolor on canvas, lightly sketch the subject and ancillary drawings on the surface with a pencil. If you’re worried about leaving grease stains on the pre-stretched canvas, consider using transfer paper while sketching. Masking fluid is another agent that helps in safeguarding your canvas and waterproofing the painting. You can also use this fluid if you wish to keep certain areas of the painting uncolored - do it at this step itself.
Step 2
Now you can begin painting watercolor on canvas. If you want a more solid base for your painting, use a background wash before getting started. Then proceed to add layers, details of the subject, and glazing. However, be wary while applying the glaze since it can be tricky - experiment with your mixing time and paint-water ratio.
And as always, there’s always the option of lifting color and starting over if you haven’t applied a sealant.
Step 3
If you’re feeling adventurous, try creating mixed-media art. Watercolor paints are compatible with various other media, such as acrylic and oil-based paints, so take advantage of this ability. You can also incorporate watercolor paints in an acrylic painting and vice versa - take your pick!
Step 4
As we’ve mentioned before, any error you make while you use watercolor on canvas can be corrected through color lifting. But there are other techniques as well. Simply use earbuds or a toothpick to scrape some of the paint off the area where you’ve made a mistake. And since watercolor canvas is quite durable, you won’t need to worry about ripping or tearing it.
Moreover, you can correct a fully dried painting - simply add water to the area using a round brush and scrub the paint off.
Step 5
Ensuring your watercolor canvas art is completely dry is a huge step towards increasing its longevity. Let the painting dry for at least 24 hours - this will also give you enough time to decide whether you want to make any changes before sealing.
Protecting Your Watercolor Canvas Art
The high resistance of canvas against humidity and debris is the most common reason why most artists prefer this medium after trying it. So, it doesn’t require glass or a wooden frame to protect it from the elements.
If you decide to hang your art on the wall as decoration, ensure you apply a thick layer of UV-resistant spray varnish or sealant. It’s always better to use spray varnish than brush a sealant on the surface since it can smear or lift the paint.
Remember that you can’t make any changes to the watercolor painting once you’ve sealed it, so ensure everything is in order. Also, ensure you spray the varnish only when the artwork is completely dry.
Moreover, you only need about three light layers of sealant to protect your painting, but ensure you let each layer dry for 20 minutes before applying the next. When you’re done sealing the painting, let it cure for a while, preferably for another 24 hours, before handling it. Properly sealing after you use watercolor on canvas makes it water-resistant, ultra-violet rays resistant, smudge-proof, and durable.
Different Watercolor Techniques
Learning about the basic techniques of watercolor painting can go a long way in preparing you to create a masterpiece. Of course, trial and error is a compulsory part of the journey, but having some knowledge reduces the chance of errors.
1. Lifting Technique
This technique is very useful for correcting areas or creating low-pigmented subjects such as clouds or eyes. It actually “lifts” the pigments from the surface of the watercolor paper or canvas. To do this, first, you cover the entire painting surface with a light coat of water and then paint the area with any color you want.
Ensure you use a lighter shade since lifting a darker shade is quite difficult, and we recommend scraping the paint in this case. Then, before your paint dries, use a clean brush or paper towel and firmly press it on the area where you don’t want color. This way, the paper towel or brush will soak the excess paint, leaving behind a colorless or lighter area.
2. Gradient Technique
This basic yet effective technique lets the watercolor bloom from a lighter to a darker shade. While creating a color gradient, you should pay close attention to the water-paint ratio to get a beautiful result. It is mostly used to paint sunsets, oceans, or landscape backgrounds.
After priming the surface with water, start with a dark shade of any color and add a thick layer on the uppermost part of the canvas or paper. While the paper is still wet, quickly keep adding layers and bringing the color to the bottom with clean, horizontal strokes without dipping the brush in an additional color. As you create layers upon layers, the brush consistently loses color, creating the beautiful gradient effect we’re aiming for.
For sunsets that include different colors, you can re-do the process with another color on top of the completed gradient while the surface is wet.
3. Wet-on-Dry Technique
The previous techniques involved the “wet-on-wet” art styles, so we’ll talk about something different here. A wet-on-dry technique denotes using paint on a dry surface - this process helps you make certain details stand out and set properly onto the canvas.
First, wet the surface and create a background with one color - apply it evenly and let it completely dry. You can use gradient or lifting techniques to create beautiful backgrounds in keeping with the theme of the main subject.
Once the background is completely dry, take a thin or pointed brush and draw your details using darker pigments.
Warning
Don’t add a lot of water to the paint since it can lead to unwanted blending or diffusion.
4. Wet-on-Wet And Wet-on-Dry Combination
This combined method is very popular for creating oceans or lakes with ripple-like effects. After covering the paper or canvas with water, you need to use the same technique as when creating a gradient effect. The only difference here is that you need to totally disconnect your brush from the paper occasionally to create negative spaces.
Next, while the paint is still wet, add darker pigment to create more depth - do this with wavy brushstrokes. However, the darker strokes should reduce in frequency as you reach the top of the canvas or page. This wet-on-wet technique allows the darker pigment to seep into the lighter one, creating a rippling, water-like motion.
Moving on to the wet-on-dry portion, using a side-to-side motion, apply blue strokes swiftly, but let the color fade as it moves to the top. Ensure you don’t add too much water to the color this time - the strokes should be dark and detailed.
Even though this technique is quite elaborate, it can be very effective in creating difficult themes such as water and sunsets.
Tips For Creating Watercolor Painting On Canvas
Now that you know all about creating watercolor paintings on canvas, here are some suggestions you can follow to enhance the experience. These tips will make the process a lot easier and enjoyable:
1. Start Off With Landscapes or Bouquets
Many artists prefer canvas to watercolor paper since it helps you to experiment more freely by allowing you to correct errors without worrying about starting over. And errors can get particularly daunting when creating a landscape with various minute details, such as trees (including branches, leaves, flowers), sky gradient, water, etc. So, we suggest taking advantage of the margin of error given by canvases and starting off with a serene landscape like a pine forest.
2. Drying Time
Wait for at least 24 hours before applying varnish or paint coating to your finished piece. This will prevent the colors from accidentally washing off or blending with the varnish or coating product. Also, read the label of the varnish carefully and follow the directions while working with it.
3. Choose The Right Varnish Method
Always use spray varnish on the canvas for watercolor paints since applying glaze or coating with a brush can lift the colors from the painting you’re trying to safeguard. Moreover, using a spray-on method is more convenient - you’ll be done with just three coats and won’t need to wash your brush or hands repeatedly to take the solution off.
4. Take Your Time
It is a common misconception that you must seal the painting immediately after completion. However, you can wait for a few weeks before you decide to apply the varnish. This will give you enough time to decide whether you’re satisfied with the finished product. But ensure you keep it in a dry, cool place away from contact.
5. Create Your Preferred Texture
Watercolor ground often creates a chalky, uneven texture that many people might not prefer. If you want a smoother surface, simply sand it down with fine-grit sandpaper. Then, take a cloth (preferably with no lint or lose threads) and remove the excess dust. Now you have a smooth, even canvas for watercolor.
How To Paint Watercolor On Canvas FAQs
Do I need to prime the canvas before painting with watercolors?
No, a pre-stretched canvas you purchase from the art store is already primed with watercolor gesso or absorbent ground. So, you won’t need to prime a readymade canvas – just start painting as you normally would on watercolor paper. But if you decide to make your own canvas, then preparation is necessary. Refer to the step-by-step guide on preparing a canvas, as this article mentions.
What kind of watercolors should I use on canvas?
A traditional canvas allows you to use pretty much all kinds of watercolors, including gouache, watercolor in tubes, pans, liquid watercolor, markers, etc. All you need to do is ensure the surface is wet enough for the pigment to show up and blend with others. Moreover, when using watercolor markers, the surface requires sanding since markers don’t thrive on textured canvases.
Overall, you need to be careful about the paint-water ratio for most kinds of watercolor products.
Can I mix watercolors with other mediums on canvas?
Watercolor canvas is a great surface for creating mixed-media art. Since the material is quite durable, unlike cold and hot pressed paper, it readily accepts other media like acrylic paint, ink, graphite pencil, etc. Many experts recommend experimenting with different media on canvas to achieve different depths and dimensions.
How do I prepare my canvas for watercolor painting?
If you decide to make your own raw canvas before painting, our step-by-guide on preparing a canvas will be helpful. As such, you need to cure the canvas with at least two layers of standard gesso. Then, you need to apply two to six layers of watercolor ground.
Depending on the texture preference, you can either roughly or smoothly apply the absorbent ground from the second layer. Let the canvas cure for 24 hours after this process. Once completely dry, sand the surface for an extra smooth base.
What techniques can I use for watercolor painting on canvas?
You can use all watercolor techniques on canvas – lifting, layering, blending, gradient, ombre, wet-on-wet, wet-on-dry, etc. Just be careful about the paint-water ratio and let the colors dry properly, and you’re good to go.
How do I ensure the watercolors don't bleed on canvas?
Typically, watercolors don’t bleed on canvas unless you’ve neglected to use the right water-to-paint ratio and drying time. After painting one section, let the area dry completely before you paint the next section – this will prevent the color from bleeding unnecessarily. Moreover, priming the canvas well is another way to ensure it readily accepts the paint.
How do I frame a watercolor painting on canvas?
You can directly hang the painting or let it rest against a shelf or wall when the artwork is cured and dried. However, if you don’t prefer the raw look of canvas, you can get it framed in a wooden or glass frame based on the preferred aesthetic. If you’re unsure how to fix it in a frame, send it to a photography shop specializing in framing.
How do I care for my watercolor painting on canvas?
The spray varnish that you’ll use after finishing the paint will sufficiently protect it from UV rays, humidity, and dirt. However, you can never be too careful – so you should put the canvas in a dry area that is away from direct sunlight and human traffic. You can also consider framing it in a wooden frame to protect it from rodents and debris.
To Sum It Up
Before ready-made canvases were invented, artists had to stick to watercolor papers for their art. And even though the paper did allow brighter hues and mobility, people started demanding permanent structure as the art style evolved. Thus, watercolor canvas gained popularity as the most preferred art medium for watercolor, gouache, and even oil-based paints.
If you’ve never tried painting on canvases before, we recommend using it since it allows you to experiment with different techniques more freely. And if you do make mistakes, you can always lift the color or scrub the area to get the paint off. You’ll never know the full scope of your artistic abilities, especially when it comes to watercolors, if you don’t try painting on canvas!
The Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is one of the best high-quality options to add depth to your artwork. The QoR watercolor medium by Golden is a close second and can help you increase the luminosity of your painting. On the other hand, the Holbein Ox Gall Medium is best for working with painting techniques like wet-on-wet.
Sometimes, a good watercolor medium is all you need to elevate your paintings.
A medium helps you alter the properties of your wet paint. For instance, you can play with the consistency, texture, and drying time of your paints by mixing them with a suitable medium.
However, which one should you go for and why? In this article, I will tell you about the top 5 watercolor mediums in detail.
Increases the granulation of color, giving a mottled...
For maximum effect dilute colour generously with medium...
What I like
Easy to apply and remove
Helps create a smooth wash easily
Adjusts gloss and texture
Lasts long
What I don't like
Extremely runny texture
The Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is a must-have for every watercolor enthusiast. It can help you add a decent texture and depth to your paintings. All you need to do is use your best watercolor markers or pencils to sketch your drawing and mix this medium with your choice of watercolor paint or ink. This way, you can easily experiment with a granulated effect!
The best thing about this medium is that you get to work with various textures. You can achieve anything from subtle changes to bold transitions by adjusting the granulation medium you add to your paint.
For instance, when I wanted to paint a house using watercolors - I used the granulation medium to create textures that resemble that of bricks or wood. Or, if I wanted to create elements like a leaf, this medium helped me achieve a textured and mottled appearance for the same.
It is important to note that the Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is a little runny in texture, which is great if you want to create a soft blended look in your painting surface. However, you can find better options if you are looking to paint precise details in smaller sections.
Color: Clear | Finish type: Matte | Form: Liquid |Package: Bottle | Volume: 75 ml or 2.5 oz.
Watercolor Medium is a general purpose medium used to...
It also increases the gloss and saturation of colors when...
What I like
Increases luminosity
Improves pigment intensity
Ability to provide both matte and glossy finish by varying the amount of medium used
Comes with a dropper
What I don't like
No instruction manual
If you like adding a transparent, glossy texture to your paintings, the QoR medium by Golden might be the best option. It can be used to create a variety of glazes and textures and is suitable for both beginner and professional watercolor artists.
You can adjust the glossiness of your painting by varying the amount of medium you add to your paint. For instance, I used to add a normal amount if I wanted my artwork to shine brightly and fewer drops to achieve a more matte finish.
The QoR medium also allows you to enhance the intensity of your watercolor pigments, which is why it is popularly used to work with vibrant colors. I used this medium to add beautiful elements like a flower, tree, or sky to my paintings. It also helped me create a smooth and even dry wash, which helped me further elevate my art piece.
This medium has a dropper, making it very easy to use. However, you can also use a brush or spray bottle to apply it as per your convenience.
The only drawback with this product is that it comes with no instruction manual, which might be a problem for beginners who rely on such manuals to learn product use. Other than that, the QoR medium is definitely worth a try.
Color: Clear | Finish type: Gloss | Form: Liquid |Package: Bottle with dropper | Volume: 59 ml or 2 oz.
Improves flow and transparency of a watercolor paint
Works great with watercolor painting techniques, such as wet-on-wet
Extends the drying time of your watercolor paint
Enhanced adhesion allows the artwork to last longer
What I don't like
Strong odor
Made from the extract of cow bladder, the ox gall medium is popular for increasing flow and transparency of watercolor paints. The one sold by Holbein is a great option, especially if you are looking for a medium to prevent blotching on your watercolor paper.
The Holbein ox gall medium allows artists to create smooth and even washes in their artworks while giving them great control over the flow of watercolor paint. All these features make this artist-grade wetting agent an ideal medium for the wet-on-wet watercolor painting technique.
Using this medium, I could easily create smooth transitions, gradients, and hues in my watercolor painting. It also prevents the paint from drying out quickly, which helped me paint for long hours without needing to constantly re-wet my painting.
However, the Holbein ox gall medium has a strong odor. If you are sensitive to strong smells, there might be better options for you.
Contains gum arabic, honey, water and a preservative
Thin with water
What I like
Made up of good-quality materials like gum arabic and honey
Easy to use
Can make paints more versatile
Smooth texture
What I don't like
A little costlier than the others
The Sennelier watercolor binding medium is easy to use and best for artists who want to avoid sticking to a particular watercolor paint pigment or consistency. It has a smooth and consistent texture and blends decently well with watercolors.
This Gum Arabic-based medium enhances the flow and transparency of watercolors, which is why they are popularly used while painting with certain techniques, such as glazing and layering. Apart from that, you can mix this medium with your watercolors to create your custom palette or use it to modify the existing properties of your paints.
If you like purchasing only high-quality art tools, the Sennelier watercolor binding medium will not disappoint you. It comprises ingredients, such as gum arabic, honey, and water. As a result, the medium works well to help enhance the overall quality of your artwork.
This medium comes from a very reputed brand and is a little costlier than other mediums. However, a great quality product seldom comes at a low price.
Color: Clear | Finish type: Semi-gloss | Form: Liquid |Package: Bottle | Volume: 200 ml or 6.8 oz.
Thickens watercolors and gouache to give an impasto effect
What I like
Gel texture
Thick consistency
Easy to blend
Can be used to create effects with impasto medium
What I don't like
Makes the paints appear slightly lighter than they originally are
Sometimes, all your painting lacks is a little opacity - and that is exactly what the Winsor & Newton Aquapasto watercolor medium provides you with. Its gel-like texture medium allows you to create a sense of depth in your artwork and play with several effects.
The consistency of this watercolor medium is quite thick but can be thinned out to achieve your desired texture. It blends with wet paint easily, and there are no hassles even when using the Aquapasto medium with acrylic paint sets.
Using this blending medium, I got to work with a huge spectrum of effects. It helped me create everything from smooth and glossy effects to rough textures. Like any good blending medium, it slows the drying time of your painting - thus making it easier to paint for a long time.
The Aquapasto is well-known for its thickening abilities while working with watercolors and gouache. Hence, you can also use it to create an impasto gel medium effect in your painting.
However, if you prefer using luminous paints in your artwork, you might not love the Winsor & Newton Aquapasto. It makes watercolors appear slightly lighter and less transparent.
Color: Transparent | Finish type: Matte | Form: Gel |Package: Tube | Volume: 60 ml
Factors To Consider While Buying Watercolor Mediums
1. Quality
The quality of mediums you use can make or break your artwork. Hence, only go for high-quality ones made up of ingredients like gum arabic and cellulose. Also, ensure that they are acid-free to prevent accidental damage to your paintings (and to yourself!).
2. Type Of Medium
Depending on the type of your painting, you may require a specific kind of medium. You can choose from various mediums, such as gesso, varnish, and masking fluid while looking for one. Further, it is best to go for gum arabic-based mediums if you want a binding effect in your paintings.
3. Compatibility
You need to ensure that your art tools are compatible with your choice of medium. For instance, applying a medium that needs water for activation on watercolor sketchbooks that can only hold a small amount of water is not a good idea. Doing so may lead to the paper getting damaged.
4. Budget
Finally, you should find a medium that suits your budget well. You should carefully assess the functions you need your medium to serve and then decide on a budget that doesn't strain your wallet.
FAQs Related To Watercolor Mediums
What are the different types of watercolor mediums available in the market?
The different kinds of mediums available on the market are texture medium, granulating medium, permanent masking medium, lifting preparation medium, and so on. You can also go for an iridescent medium or a varnish, depending on the type of your painting.
How do watercolor mediums differ, and which one should I use for my painting?
The mediums differ in texture, consistency, and their effects on the watercolors you combine them with. You should choose one based on the blending techniques you will use in your artwork and the textural effects you wish to create.
Can I mix different watercolor mediums to achieve a specific effect?
Yes, you can mix different mediums to achieve a specific effect. However, check their compatibility first to see whether they will work together. You may also experiment with their proportions and apply them to your artwork.
How do I store my watercolor mediums properly to ensure their longevity?
You should store your mediums properly in a cool and dry place to ensure their longevity. It is best to keep them away from direct sunlight exposure and extreme temperatures. Additionally, make sure to wipe the cap of your medium bottle using a paper towel so that it is sealed properly.
How do I apply watercolor mediums to my painting, and how do I know how much to use?
You can apply mediums to your painting by using tools like a wet brush, sponge, or spray. The amount of medium that you use should depend on several factors such as the kind of finish you want in your illustration and the consistency of paints that you are aiming for.
What are the benefits and drawbacks of using watercolor mediums in my paintings?
A good medium (binding medium, lifting preparation medium, etc.) can help you increase the vibrancy of your paints and enhance their transparency. You can also use a medium to create a wide range of effects, such as adding gloss or creating an iridescent medium. However, certain watercolor mediums can alter the color of your paint by either lightening or darkening its hue – thus making it difficult to achieve your desired shades.
Conclusion
It is best to experiment with different mediums to find which one suits you best. Additionally, you should apply them in layers to increase depth and add texture. Following these tips can help you create stunning artwork. You can also go through a tutorial on sites like Skillshare to practice your skill of medium application.
The Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is one of the best options. It provides much room for a creative experience, and you can add a lot of depth and texture using this medium.
However, if you like a glossy finish in your paintings, the QoR watercolor medium won't disappoint you. The Holbein ox gall is the best medium to create wet or dry washes and works well if you like creating smooth transitions.
And with that, I have reached the end of this blog post. Goodbye!
Water volleyball is fun, exciting, and safe, so it can be played by people of all ages. Moreover, the rules of this game are straightforward, so beginners won’t have a tough time understanding it, which is why it’s a popular sport among college students.
Is one of the best volleyball pool nets lying in your garage?
Sure, summer is the best month to play water volleyball; after all, jumping into the water and passing a ball between two teams without dropping it sounds fun. And the rules of water volleyball are similar to traditional volleyball, but the risk of injury is low.
Here we’ll walk you through 13 things you wouldn’t find in any volleyball rule book. Keep reading!
Water Volleyball 101: 13 Things You Need to Know
1. The Number Of Players Varies
As against traditional volleyball, each team in water volleyball usually consists of four players– called a four-by-four. If you’re playing in the pool and want to crowd it, you can have a team of six players or six-by-six.
In water volleyball, if players wish to play a co-ed game, they can add two women and two men to each team or three-and-three.
With teams of four players, two are supposed to be in the back, while the other two will be on the net. Even if you play the game with six players, the setup will remain the same.
Are only five people willing to play water volleyball? Well, go ahead because water volleyball is a highly versatile sport.
2. Water Volleyball Rules Are Similar To Regular Volleyball But Has A Few Differences
Water volleyball rules are quite similar to regular volleyball, but there are a few dissimilarities too. They are as follows:
A. Number Of Players
The number of players in water volleyball can be between two and four, depending on the size of the pool. However, court volleyball isn’t as flexible as the former; as such, only six people are allowed in the game, with three on the backline and three on the front.
B. Winning
In water volleyball, the winning score depends on the mutual understanding of players and can either be 11, 15, or 25. Furthermore, the winner must have a two-point lead and win two out of three matches.
On the other hand, the first team who reaches 15 points in the fifth game wins the game in regular volleyball. Moreover, the winning team must lead the game with a lead of two points. Not just that, but it must also win three games out of five to emerge as a winner.
C. Scoring
The scoring rules of water volleyball differ from that of court volleyball.
Such as, in water volleyball, you win points whenever the ball lands in the water after passing through the net on the opponent’s side. You also win a point whenever the ball touches the net but doesn’t pass through.
Meanwhile, you win points in court volleyball whenever the ball strikes the court. But remember, the opponent team will win a point if your team members strike the ball more than thrice in a row. Whenever two players of a team touch the ball simultaneously, it is considered as one hit.
One similarity that both water volleyball and court volleyball share is that the opposing team will win a point if you double-hit the ball.
3. Elderly People Can Play Water Volleyball
Court volleyball can injure your lower back, shoulder, knee, and fingers, taking a toll on a player’s body. Moreover, as people age, their knees and back become less flexible, so they cannot play court volleyball.
For elderly people, water volleyball is an excellent sport because water is easier on the joints. Among older adults, it has become highly popular, and YMCAs and athletic clubs are training teams for water volleyball.
4. Water Volleyball Is A Great Exercise
Court volleyball is an excellent way to keep yourself fit, but there’s a high risk of injury. But playing the same sport in water boosts your strength and muscle toning without exposing you to back or knee injuries.
5. Water Volleyball Has Different Names
Did you know that water volleyball is often called pool volleyball? Most people call it pool volleyball because it’s usually played in swimming pools.
However, you can play it in any water body of the required size and depth as long as you know how to set a net. And if you don’t know how to build a pool volleyball net, look for tutorials online, and you’ll be good to go! You can even make a pool volleyball net by using backyard volleyball net with having to proper tools for the pool.
Another name for water volleyball is splash volleyball because of all the splashing that occurs in water.
Spanish people call it Voleibol Acuatico, while Brazilians refer to it as Aqua-Volei. On the other hand, Italian residents call it Acqua Pallavolo, and it’s known as Wasser Volleyball in Germany.
6. Water Volleyball Is Different From Water Polo And Water Aerobics
Water volleyball, water polo, and water aerobics are water activities, but they are different from each other.
Water aerobics is a fantastic exercise for older adults because the buoyancy makes it easy for them to use their muscles without putting excessive strain on fragile bones and joints. Unlike water aerobics, water polo is a sport similar to basketball or soccer. In water polo, the player’s objective is to throw the ball in the opponent team’s goal.
However, it’s a tough game because it’s played in a deep swimming pool so that players’ feet don’t touch the floor of the swimming pool.
7. Official Court Dimensions Must Be Followed
Even in water volleyball, players must follow official court dimensions if they intend to play “officially.” A 30 x 60 feet court with a net of about 24 feet long is perfect for playing water volleyball. Note that the net must dangle one foot above the water.
And those wondering what size pool for volleyballisideal, let us tell you that a pool of four to five feet is sufficient for enjoying the sport.
The court must be adjusted to accommodate players’ ability level and strength. Like, people whose cardiovascular health isn’t good may enjoy playing in a small space.
While the court can be adjusted, you can’t do much when it comes to the size of the pool. So, if your pool is 20 ft wide, your court will also be the same size.
8. Water Volleyball Isn’t An Olympic Sport
Contrary to what people say, water volleyball isn’t considered an Olympic sport. Certainly, this may invite a lot of mixed reactions from people, but we think that it isn’t regarded as an Olympic sport because it isn’t bound by formal rules.
9. Biribol Sport Originated Before Water Volleyball
Dario Miguel Pedro, a Brazilian professor, developed the Biribol sport in the 1960s, which is similar to water volleyball. As against water volleyball, Biribol is a popular sport in Brazil, with numerous teams in Brazilian towns and a Brazilian National League.
10. Water Volleyball Is Played In Many Colleges
Besides local leagues, YMCAs, and athletic clubs, water volleyball is popular among college students and is played in many colleges. Lenoir-Rhyne University in Hickory, North Carolina, University of San Diego, California, University of South Florida, and Iowa State University, to name a few, are colleges where water volleyball is played.
11. Water Volleyball Is A Great Pick-Up Game
Are you a member of a club that has a swimming pool? If yes, that’s great because finding a couple of people who are fond of playing water volleyball won’t be difficult.
The water of the swimming pool acts as an equalizer, allowing people of varying skill levels to work together as a team. And since the rules of the game aren’t set in stone, you can play it with two or three players on each team.
12. Water Volleyball Is Played With A Ball Specifically Made For The Sport
While you can use soccer or beach balls to play water volleyball, it’s advisable to use a ball made explicitly for the game. Or, to be precise, you need to have a waterproof ball to enjoy water volleyball, which soccer and court volleyballs aren’t.
In this regard, the GoSports Water Volleyball 3 Pack is an excellent option, whose outer layer is soft and is eight-inch in size. And the best part? It’s a three-ball pack, so you can play the game uninterrupted even if your ball flies out of the swimming pool. However, you can use a soccer ball or a beach ball in case you’re in a pinch.
13. Water Volleyball Is A Fun Sport
Water volleyball is boring– said no one ever! After all, you don’t get hurt in the water; the rules of water volleyball are pretty straightforward, and not to forget, every player is in a cheerful mood.
Water Volleyball Wrapping It Up
That’s pretty much it– things about water volleyball that no one told you before!
Like sack races, water volleyball isn’t an official sport, but both are enjoyable. Be it a beach, pool, pond, or lake– water volleyball can be played anywhere, provided the water body is of the appropriate depth and size.
And since it doesn’t exert much pressure on the joints, it makes for an excellent sport for people who no longer play court volleyball. Irrespective of whether your team wins or loses, remember it’s just a game. Have fun, folks!
If you think gardens are just for greens, then you may not be totally right!
And one of the things that you certainly don’t want to miss out on is a water feature. After all, who wouldn’t like coming back to the sound of trickling water after a long day at work? Besides, these structures invite several pollinators like birds and butterflies, which ultimately facilitate plant growth.
So, here we are with the 48 best water feature ideas that will turn your garden into your favorite zone. Whether you’re a DIY enthusiast or not, we’ve something for each requirement.
Now, let’s get started, shall we?
Best Water Feature Ideas
Mixed Metal Water Fountain
If you have got some leftover metal parts in your garage, then this first idea is just for you. Transform a humble metal tank into the showstopper of your backyard using some galvanized metal, washers, a low shutoff water pump, washers, and a tap.
Place your favorite greens inside the tank, and you’re done! For the finishing touch, bring in the old watering can.
Plant Pot Water Fountain
This simple structure consists of two plant pots, one smaller than the other. The bigger one forms the base, so throw in a large pail and cover it with a pot saucer. Add in some river stones above it and make way for the other pot. Don’t forget to seal any drainage holes. Lastly, drop a solar pump for water flow.
Galvanized Bucket Solar Fountain
Simplicity has its charm, and so does a plain galvanized bucket. Grab your favorite aquatic plants like cyperus involucratus (baby tut), taro, canna lily, Siberian iris, liriope, etc., while still planted in their respective containers; the roots will keep the water clean.
Then, put them in the bucket and fill water till you cover the roots. Finally, submerge a solar fountain pump.
Bubbling Water Fountain
Okay, now constructing this feature is likely to take quite a lot of time, so make sure you have enough on hand. Using a mortar mix, prepare two circular molds (the fountain) with a water inlet and a well-like base that’ll house the fountain pump. While we like the earthen look, you can paint the feature to amp up the setup.
Wooden Barrel Water Fountain
While taking a quick breather from DIY projects, let us introduce you to this classic wooden barrel-style water fountain. What we liked the most about it is the interiors are lined with a plastic coating to prevent any moisture or mold buildup. That said, you can always build one with any material of your choice, or even change the colors if you like.
Tiered Flower Pot Fountain
Remember the plant pot water fountain we talked about? Well, here’s a variation that you can try for larger backyards. This time, we got three PVC pots instead of two and drilled a hole in the bottom of the base pot to feed the plug through it. We also found that two-part epoxy putty works better to seal the drainage hole, especially for warmer areas.
Ceramic Cascade Birth Bath Fountain
Planning to get rid of that old ceramic tea set? You might want to wait till you see this next water fixture. Thanks to a concealed solar water pump, the mesmerizing water flow from one level to the other is a sight to behold. Plus, it can be the perfect holiday gift for friends or family.
Tiny Egg Fountain
A smaller alternative to the bubbling water fountain is this ceramic sphere fountain top, which is ideal for your patio or indoor garden. Here again, you can create the spheres, but we think you should get the pre-drilled ones at a nursery. Similarly, find a plastic tub that’s big enough to hold the spheres. Set it up with a fountain pump, and that’s about it.
Solar-On-Demand Fountain
Bring regality to your backyard with this weathered stone-finished water fountain. But there’s more than just looks that made us include it in the list. Not only can you switch it on and off with the press of a button, but the unit also stores solar energy for nighttime use. A full day of sun exposure equals six hours of charge.
Patio Water Wall
As they say, ‘Rome wasn’t built in a day’! Sure, this patio water wall won’t be among the quickest constructions but is worth the time and effort. If you can find a safe space, you can even place it in the garden, but we prefer the patio placement. After all, what is better than the serene sound of water to calm the senses?
Blue Planters Waterfall
Blue amidst green is quite a symbiotic relationship as each color helps the other to stand out. And the fun part about the design is that it houses some really simple and cheap materials to steer the water circulation. If you don’t find blue pots, buy plain terracotta pots and paint them before use. Sounds like a creative weekend activity for your kids, right?
Disappearing/Underground Water Fountain
Not in the mood for a prominent fountain structure? Then how about an underground installation? A decorative rock fountain that has just the water stream on display is a brilliant compromise between an open pool and a free-standing arrangement, but you may need extra help for the construction. And allow us to suggest a colored water stream for an added appeal.
Three-Tier Fountain
We thought recreating the tiered flower pot fountain for a bigger version would be a costly affair till we came across this structure. Just head to a thrift shop nearby and pick up some fixtures, spacers, and basins. The measurements and numbers will depend upon the desired height of the fountain. Finish off with a layer of paint, or keep the rustic charm as is.
Spring-Inspired Pond
If you’re looking to upgrade the walkway, then here’s a DIY water feature that may well be the perfect accent. Moreover, you can even recycle the existing slabs to support the pond, so that’s a win-win! Throw in whichever aquatic plant you like, or skip this step, but ensure water circulation to prevent building a mosquito breeding ground.
Tea Pot Fountain
There’s a high chance that this free-standing feature makes you say ‘how did I even build it’ after installation! An old iron teapot becomes the water source, while the water flows into the barrel base via a shallow bowl. Aside from being relatively simple to assemble, it can be easily put away when not in use.
Water Garden
We’re loving how this compact wooden garden has brought so much life to the space. Plus, building one such frame isn't a lot of hard work-just keep the right tools in the vicinity. However, ensure that you line the insides with a water sealant for durability. Furthermore, drill a couple of holes in the bottom for drainage if required.
Overflowing Ceramic Pot Fountain
If you’re fond of the rhythm of babbling water, we recommend this overflowing ceramic pot fountain. The water bubbles up from the spigot to create a dramatic effect, that honestly, we’re living for.
As the cool overflowing water hugs the outside surface before disappearing into the gravel reservoir below, let your fingers experience the soothing tactile pressure. Simply magical, we say!
Nested Ceramic Pot With Fountain
By placing a second, larger ceramic pot at the bottom, you can create a big ‘center of attraction’ piece, especially for larger spaces. Or, create a miniature version for your indoor garden. Throw in some river rocks to streamline the water flow.
Old Flower Pot Fountain
Loosely based around the ‘Leaning Tower of Pisa’, this structure is perhaps the best use of old terracotta pots that are about to be thrown away. Because of its angle, the river rocks are clearly visible even from a distance. But make sure that you seal any holes to prevent the water from flooding the ground.
Circular Water Wall
The appearance may tell you otherwise, but this circular water well is actually pretty sturdy, and you can make it even more stable by opting for thicker glass. Apart from that, you’ll need a fair bit of welding to secure the structure on the ground, so call in some professionals. Install a couple of landscape lights for that alluring effect.
Stacked Stones Fountain
For centuries, stone stacking has been known as an active form of meditation. But given the busy lives of people today, it may be a better idea to install this structure once and for all. The number of stones will depend on the desired height of the fountain, but make sure that all of them have flat surfaces to aid seamless stacking.
Watering Can Fountain
Nothing speaks of countryside vibes like this watering cans and galvanized tank fountain. Connect the three in a way so that water flows from one to another without exposing the pump or tubes. In that sense, the only prerequisite may be a fence or wall that can support the structure. A pro tip: use old metal hangers as the brackets.
Bamboo Trickling Waterfall Basin
Heavily inspired by Japanese gardens, the trickling waterfall basin uses a long length of bamboo supported by two narrower lengths, which help trickle the water down to a ceramic basin. In this particular instance, the white color represents the zen element, but you can also choose a darker color to create a beautiful contrast. The result? A corner you wouldn’t want to leave easily!
Pretty Little Pail Fountain
Try this super simple pail fountain to break the monotony of greens in your garden. It basically uses just one element- a pail. Add tons of gravel to fill the bucket to the point where only the stream is visible. The bits of sea glass bring a pop of color to the monotony of cream and gray.
Cascading Copper Wall Waterfall
If you grow too many colorful flowers in the garden, then this cascading copper wall waterfall is the perfect accent to provide visual balance. Grab a simple copper sheet and attach it to a box-like reservoir. We also suggest polishing the sheet before assembly for a smooth water flow.
Fun And Fancy Wheelbarrow Waterfall
Don’t we all have that first wheelbarrow, which is too close to disposing of? Well, by converting it into a funky waterfall, you can keep it as memorabilia of your initial gardening days. The tilted angle gives a feel as if it’s ‘building’ its reservoir. But a bit of illusion doesn’t hurt anybody!
Loop de Loo Waterfall Chain
Seasonal water features are a great way to save water without compromising on uniqueness. For example, this copper chain waterfall can be hung from the shade of the patio on rainy days. Likewise, multiple chains within a few inches of each other will create a uniform water flow.
Ceramic Urn Fountain
A ceramic urn fountain can be the perfect decor to make add a touch of elegance to those dull corners of the garden. Plus, you don’t need a lot of tools or equipment to make this. One thing to know- some people prefer planting the pot directly in the soil, so we think it’s better to add a liner in the hole for reinforced stability.
“Treasury Of Rocks” Pail Fountain
It’s safe to say that one of the most liked river-side views is that of the shining pebbles underneath clear water. And this fountain emulates that frame to a good extent. You can slightly modify it by adding or removing the metal containers. However, don’t skip a standout piece like the stunning blue bobble to create that dramatic statement.
Vineyard Inspired Barrel Fountain
The best way to show your love for wine is by dedicating a structure in the honor of your favorite wine brand. All you need is an old wine barrel that’ll serve as the reservoir cover when inverted. Bring the tube through the bottle to secure it firmly atop the base. Alternatively, you can use two or three bottles for a unique look.
“Water Tumbling Down The Wall” Feature
This fun yet attractive water feature can be thought of as an expanded version of the teapot fountain. Water starts flowing from the old watering can to the pipes to the downspout to the bucket. The latter is equipped with a spigot that ultimately lets the water into the galvanized washtub. Frankly, we can look at the water flow for hours and still won’t get bored!
Now, let’s take a look at some of the larger water features that can be included in your landscape.
Tall Stone Gateway Water Feature
Confused between a fountain and a pond? Don’t be anymore. This striking stone gateway water feature lets you have the best of both worlds. Get the natural sunlight to bounce off the fountain stream and meet the pond below for a mesmerizing view. Heads up: you’ll need plenty of time and work to get this one done, so plan well in advance.
Cascading Waterfall With Stairs
A cascading waterfall that runs over rocky steps makes for a sight to behold. You can surround it with a mix of plants and boulders, which will also double up as its boundary. That said, features like these require a lot of space. So, customizing it to fit smaller spaces may not be a bad idea.
Pond With Fish And Plants
As traditional as it may sound, the traditional charm of a fish pond remains an unmatched phenomenon. The secluded bench completes the harmony between everything that’s a part of this serene waterscape. Moreover, the plant reflections and tickling sound of water create a relaxing environment for the koi fishes. Just make sure to add them after you’re done with the rest.
Asian Style Water Garden
Water features don’t always have to be limited to the outdoors. For example, this garden pond draws inspiration from a combination of feng shui and bonsai art to extend its boundary to the transition area between the indoor-outdoor space. A couple of chairs here and a bean bag there will make you not want to leave this corner.
Water Garden With Wooden Bridge
With this setup, you can leave it to the onlookers to choose their respective points of focus. But whatever draws your attention, we bet you can’t ignore the tranquil connection between the water, rocks, bridges, and flowers. We love this flat-shaped bridge, but you can also opt for the conventional curved variant.
Natural Water Feature With Rock Edging
You don’t need fancy ornaments to accentuate a simple natural water body, as is evident from our next example. We’re really impressed with how the rock barrier adds depth to the pond by cutting between the green and the almost-green water. Another advantage is that you can start off with a smaller pond, and then expand it over time.
Crystal Waterfall On Brick Wall
Yes, we know, crystal waterfall sounds every bit fallacious, but it makes for an extremely unique view, nonetheless. The secret? basins with concealed LED lights. As the water falls from the wall, it reflects the light below, thereby giving a sparkling effect like that of crystals.
Water Feature With Spurting Jets
We usually think of water jets to be part of hot tubs, but not anymore. While the water jets here create a dome-like structure with the stream, you can alter the placements to replicate any shape you want. Accordingly, change the accents to things that best complement the resultant effect.
Multi-Layer Rock Garden
The versatility of multi-layer rock gardens makes them a suitable choice for both central and corner positions in your garden. As the cascading stream makes its way from one level to another, the oxygenated water enhances the positive vibes in the surrounding areas. And if quacking isn't an issue, feel free to bring in a couple of ducks.
Rain Shower Fountain
This rain shower fountain is your literal getaway to a rainy day! Use a pressure-treated lumber frame to build this gorgeous frame for anytime rain at the convenience of your backyard. Not only can you install a waterproof strip of LED lighting, but you can also customize the dimensions according to the size of your garden.
Looking Glass Water Feature
We’re in awe of how the glass ball looks as if it has risen from the water bed to show the future. While we feel that this plain transparent ball works the best for the cause, you can replace it with any other color or even shape.
Mini Oasis With Waterfall Feature
Rejuvenate your senses with the sound of trickling water by building a circular boundary made from rough-hewn stone. It uses a long ‘keystone’ to initiate the water flow that collects at the pond-like structure below. A mix of prostate and bright flowery plants like chrysanthemums, zinnias, lazy susans, etc. softens’ the rough edges of the stones.
Tornado Garden Fountain In Glass Container
Not many designs define ‘out-of-the-box’ thinking like this tornado-shaped waterfall. It sits inside a glass cylinder, which is in turn, surrounded by a circle containing contrasting pebbles. And as always, adding a few LED lights will let you enjoy the view even in the dark.
Spurting Face Water Feature
We bet this idea takes you back to the hit 90s show “Legends of the Hidden Temple'’. As talks about reviving it for a version with adult contestants doing the rounds, this spurting face water feature will become the highlight of your garden in no time. And may we strongly recommend installing a couple of red LED lights for the eyes.
Water Fountain With Regular Steps And Stones
If you’re into contemporary designs, then this modern water feature should be on your list of must-haves. It’s basically a combination of stones, decking, and water plants that come together for this classy waterscape. The only thing to consider- the price of assembling this one may be on the higher side.
Traditional Garden Design With Vases
Here’s a design that will double up as a water provider to birds. Equipped all the vases with a water fountain pump to accommodate more birds. Besides, you can turn it into a seasonal affair by activating the pumps only during summer.
Gazebo Water Feature
Is your backyard blessed with a pond and gazebo? Then how about creating a winding path adorned with stones and flowers that surrounds the pond and leads to the gazebo? The different textures and colors certainly come together for a gorgeous landscape.
Garden Filled Pond
Before we wrap up, here’s a simple yet elegant water feature idea that’ll save you a lot of money and time. Simply add in a lot of aquatic plants in the pond to create a colorful centerpiece. Besides, the roots of the plants will keep away mold formation on the water surface.
Bathtub Pond
To end the list with something simple, here’s a DIY plant-filled pond that’s perhaps the best way to recycle your old bathtub. By attaching a fountain pump, you can circulate the water or leave it stagnant. In the case of the latter, make sure you change the water regularly to keep it clean.
Final Thoughts
That’s all from us on the best water feature ideas.
Hopefully, we’ve brought enough options to the table for you to choose from. And now, we leave you to take the final pick. Almost all our recommendations can be customized to fit a given space, so that’s a bonus!
On that note, we’ll take your leave, but not without a quick pro tip: circulating water involves less maintenance. So, try to install a fountain pump in your structure.
Polyurethane is the most popular finish for hardwood floors. Why, you ask?
It’s because the most important features of a good finish are good and long-term protection for the floor. That’s not all; the finish has to fight off impurities, such as grime, dust, and dirt to keep the floor healthy. And polyurethane does all that effectively.
But then, the question arises - should you opt for water-based or oil-based variants? And that’s exactly what we’ll discuss in this guide today.
This floor finish dries up rather quickly after application. Usually, it takes about two hours to dry up well enough to apply more coats. The advantage of this is that you can apply many coats in a single day.
As a result, your job might be done faster with this water-based floor finish. And it will even be low on odor. What’s more, a clear finish will keep things convenient and quick because all you need is water to clean up the floor when you want to.
Furthermore, a water-based polyurethane floor finish accentuates the ‘character’ of the wood slightly. So, if you just want a protective floor finish without much ado, apply this finish to the hardwood in your room.
Also, if you already like the color of the wood on the floor, simply highlight it with this solution. For example, if you love the way maple speaks to you, buy a water-based polyurethane floor finish to keep it that way!
Some Disadvantages
The biggest consideration before using water-based polyurethane is the expense involved in coating the floor with this finish. Water-based finishes are almost twice as costly as oil-based variants.
Furthermore, water-based polyurethane floor finishes contain only 30-35% solids. This is not enough to protect the floor in one application. That becomes one of the reasons for you to apply four coats as opposed to two or three, which may seem sufficient upon application.
That’s not all; the look of the floor after the coating dries up, may not be shiny or bright at all. In fact, the floor can exude almost a dead-pan look. You may face some difficulties in following the strokes of your applications because the water-based finish is completely clear.
In other words, marking the strokes at the right places might be necessary to do a neat job.
The best part about using oil-based variants for the floor is that the applications get fewer in this instance. The finish costs much less than water-based solutions for floor finishes. Moreover, it does not require too much maintenance over a considerable period of time.
Also, it goes perfectly with certain kinds of wood. It leaves an amber glow to the floor that looks rich and glossy in some instances.
Oil-based polyurethane contains 45 to 50% solids. It is the presence of these solids in the floor finish that give it a protective layer after application.
Some Disadvantages
The coats of this oil-based polyurethane floor finish take a long time to dry up. The waiting time between each application is five hours. When you apply the final coat to the floor, you might as well say goodbye to the room for one half of the day!
So, it takes twelve hours for the finishing touches to settle and dry up. Before using this floor finish, it is best to organize the house or working space in such a way so that you don't need the room for a day.
How To Maintain The Floor Finish
For starters, sweep the floor every day or vacuum it from time to time to pull out the latent impurities stuck there. Put carpets or rugs in those areas that are used frequently by people. Apart from that, you may vacuum the dust off the rugs once in a while to maintain the house.
This is a simple and effective way to clean and preserve the floor finish, irrespective of your preference - water or oil-based polyurethane.
On that note, we will sign off. Till next time, take care!
This is a discontinued product, no longer available on the market.
The Waring Pro ICT400 might have received rave reviews, but does that mean it will work for you?
Obviously, not all of us have the same cooking style or requirements. Therefore, it's essential to answer this question with the help of thorough research. Undoubtedly, it's one of the most advanced and performance-driven models on the market.
But we decided to look into every aspect before giving our recommendation. While it offers a range of benefits, it has a fault or two that didn't escape our critical analysis. Nevertheless, there are no significant disadvantages that could discourage purchase.
We can also assure you that our assessment is reliable, as we tested all the important parameters, so you can decide without a second thought.
Let’s get down to business.
Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop
Why Buy This Product?
The ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop is truly one of the best options in this price range. However, we won't ask you to take our word for it; instead, take a look at the advantages it offers, starting with...
Smart Controls
The first thing that caught our attention is the user-friendly controls, streamlining your kitchen experience from the get-go. The buttons are pretty self-explanatory, and you don't need to sweat about which does what.
Each of them is intuitively placed on the front of the cooktop, ensuring easy access and visibility. That said, the panel includes on/off, timer, heat, and up/down functions. The heat control lets you set the desired temperature, and as such, you can use the up and down key to adjust it from time to time.
Besides, the LCD screen shows you the current temperature throughout use, so you can monitor the operation with ease. The timer function lets you set the preferred duration for the cooking time, allowing you to multitask while the cooktop runs. And the best part is that it beeps when the cooking is done.
Heating Elements
Many of us opt for induction units to reduce gas consumption and invest in alternative power sources. Therefore, if you too are thinking along the same lines, the ICT400 will not disappoint. For starters, it's one of the most efficient models, using up to 70% less energy compared to conventional units.
Also, since it includes 2 burners, you can individually adjust the heat setting for both. The right one includes 5 heat settings, while the left one comes with 8. This is a thoughtful arrangement, ensuring maximum customization and control.
High-Quality Surface
We're very impressed with the premium-quality glass surface, providing durability and hassle-free operation. Furthermore, it's a cinch to clean, which is a life-saver for homeowners who like to keep things low-maintenance. But then again, make sure to use the right cleaning solution, as an incompatible one might damage the surface.
Other than that, the surface features two circles on the burners, so you can place the cookware in the right spot. This ensures even heat distribution while eliminating hot spots. Besides, the surface is responsive, meaning it automatically shuts off the heat 30 seconds after the pot or pan is removed.
Power Settings
Regardless of the cooktop model you buy, it's ultimately the power capacity that will determine its operation. The ICT400 runs on 120V and ideally should be used with a converter. As for the burners, the left one includes 8 power levels ranging from 200W to 1200W. Meanwhile, the right burner has the same starting level and goes up to 600W.
You can use the burners simultaneously and at maximum power settings. The right one is primarily meant for simmering and slow cooking, while the left burner is ideal for high-heat preparations.
Ventilation
This model is not only exhaust-free but also well-vented, so you can work without overheating issues and nauseating fumes. Long story short, it's equipped with a side cooling fan, enabling glitch-free performance throughout. So, even if you're using both burners and cooking at the highest timer setting (150 minutes), the fan will ensure smooth operation.
Sensors
This Waring Pro model is truly futuristic, given that it includes built-in sensors that ensure safety and practicality. For instance, if you turn on the cooktop but don't place the induction cookware, the burners won't start to heat.
Also, as soon as you remove the pot or pan, the surface starts to cool down. This indeed makes it a safer choice, especially if you have overactive children at home.
Prevents Overheating
With conventional cooktops, you have to continually monitor the heat level, so you don't burn the food. Also, there's a chance you might accidentally leave it on longer than required. All of these are legitimate concerns, and hence this Waring Pro model is the perfect solution to overheating problems.
Basically, if your pot or pan starts to overheat, it emits a long beeping sound and turns off the unit. So, even if you got busy with something else and lost track of time, this cooktop has got your back.
Compact And Lightweight
While it includes 2 burners, the ICT400 does not take up a lot of space on the kitchen counter. It's sleek and lightweight, clocking in at 7 lbs., which is easily far more manageable than dated induction models. Therefore, it's a perfect purchase for modern kitchens where space is a serious issue.
What Could've Been Better?
Obviously, the ICT400 is not perfect, but then again which induction cooktop is? While it has a few minor flaws, none of them are deal-breakers per se. That said, we couldn't help but notice the noise produced by the cooling fan.
It may not be the loudest mechanical whirring, but we would have preferred a quieter operation. Apart from that, this model only accepts cookware with magnetic capability, meaning you can't just use any pan, even if it's labeled as induction safe.
This could be a problem for some users since you might have to buy separate utensils for this cooktop. That aside, it's still a very functional option and deserves a place in your kitchen.
Pros
Uses up to 70% less energy than conventional models
Intuitive button controls and LCD heat indicator
Features 2 burners with multiple heat settings
Built-in sensors ensure safety and practicality
Automatically turns off unit to prevent overheating
Cons
The cooling fan is a bit noisy
Only accepts cookware with the magnetic capability
Waring Pro ICT400 Verdict
That's all from us!
Despite a few shortcomings, the ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop is undoubtedly a must-buy. So, if you're looking for an energy-efficient model that will reduce costs in the long run, this one surely fits the bill.
And the fact that it's easy to use further adds to your convenience, especially if you're a kitchen novice. Plus, it includes two burners with multiple heat settings, which is a win-win in our books. Whether you want to experiment, cook faster, or simply seek the benefit of hassle-free meal preparation, this model is bound to impress.
So, go ahead and give it a shot. Don't forget to share your experience with us in the comments section below.
Most new cafes now-a-days boast of a wall mounted toilet. They have become a fad because of their small sizes and how they can help small bathroom spaces seem bigger. The fact that they're easier to clean than regular floor toilets is another plus, that has made businesses adopt them very fast.
This new style has its fair share of critiques though, with people claiming that when it goes wrong, you need professional help. In defense of it though, we have to understand, that most of us are not experts in dealing with standard toilets either, and we do need help with plumbers. However, wall-mounted toilets are costlier than their floored counterparts.
Why the costlier alternative? What makes wall mounted toilets so great at working through our days? Is minimalism going to be "in" forever? These are questions worth answering, but, for now, it seems that wall-mounted toilets are here to stay.
History of the Wall-Mounted Toilets
Flush toilets have been around since centuries. However, wall mounted toilets have started finding its way to the U.S. homes fairly recently. There is no need to worry though, across the Pacific, the Europeans have adopted the wall-mounted toilets readily.
This is because most European homeowners usually live in multi-family housings rather than single-family ones. Hence, easy cleaning and small toilets are the obvious choices. This is also why airports and businesses with a high amount of traffic often prefer the easy-to-clean wall-mounted toilets. The easy cleaning, small space taking toilets are preferred by people who know that they can save a lot of time and add to the entire house.
What makes wall-mounted toilets so different is that unlike the other toilets, here the tanks are mounted on the wall, thus, reducing the space the toilet takes. So, it is no surprise, which it is being adopted by new homeowners who live in a space-crunch.
What creates derision among the homeowners is the fact that wall-mounted toilets are not easy to install. For people living out of apartments, this means the monumental task of getting their entire bathroom wall renovated. However, this could mean you get to build new designs for yourself
The whole idea of wall-mounted toilets is confusing though, hence, the pros and cons list that follows. So, here we go.
Why love Wall mounted toilet?
There are loads of reasons to love wall-mounted toilets, but, here we list the obvious ones.
It saves water
The environment concerns all of us, and with wall-mounted toilets, we can give back. Most wall-mounted toilets actually follow the EPA directions for water-use and significantly reduce your water use.
Gravity-based wall-toilets for example, minimize water use by reducing the pressure that the water usually needs. Also, since, cleaning is easier, you are going to toil that much less on the weekends on your toilet and save on water.
It is easy to clean
Cleanliness is a scary thing. If there's one thing a guest is to notice at your home, it is the condition of your toilet and how clean it is. For most people with day jobs, cleaning toilets become more of a chore.
With wall mounted toilets, which handle the ongoing flow of public at huge businesses, this is an easy fix. Wall-mounted toilets offer a space under the toilet which you can mop easily and hides a large part of the toilet behind the wall, de-cluttering your toilet space.
De-clutter your toilet
Wall-mounted toilets can easily be minimalist designer pieces, and while, bathroom and designers are not really words that go together, in this case, they are a fantastic combination. Take for example the Ilbagno collection designed by Robert Lazzeroni which marries the classic and modern looks.
Or simply go for Studio Triplan's new beautiful line which works its way around minimalism. The line offers elegant curvatures and beautiful pieces to compliment your wall-mounted toilets and your entire bathroom.
You can couple your toilet with a corner shower and you would be saving many a square-feet as you go along.
It saves a lot of space
Builders love wall-mounted toilets. Why? Because it means that they do not need to compromise on living space to provide more space for the bathroom. It also goes forward to explaining why the entire idea of wall-mounted toilets is perfect for small homes.
Wall-mounted toilets barely take up space in the bathroom allowing you to go about your daily activities without worrying about getting your clothes soiled or anything else.
Aesthetics! Aesthetics! Aesthetics!
Today's homeowners cannot be content with keeping toilets simply clean and spacious. Bathrooms are valuable spaces. People spend a long time in their bathrooms, cleaning up, preparing themselves and even solving crosswords!
Hence, it is necessary as a whole to have a bathroom that does not compromise in space and showcases a positive vibe that people can feel attracted to. It aids concentration and mindset.
With these pros in the bag, what about the things that make wall-mounted toilets a bit unacceptable in the lives of the modern homeowner? Well, here it goes.
Reasons to hate the Wall-mounted toilets
Very hard to build
This is not your weekend Do-It-Yourself project. Wall-mounted toilets are notoriously hard to install because of the work that goes into it.
Wall portion needs to be removed and put together again to fit in the tank within and work needs to be put in for bolting the toilet in. They require a lot of renovation which might not be allowed by the landlords of your apartment.
Wall support
Well, you are going to sit on these toilets, so, it is really fair that the support from the walls needs to be solid. At best, you have to look forward to no changes at all, but, sometimes this means entire portions of the wall need to be rebuilt to support the toilet structure.
This means that the entire cost of renovation increases, and the wall-mounted toilets become hard to install in regular homes.
Hard to repair
Remember the main parts of the wall-mounted toilets are behind a wall. So, while, this means the ugly pipes and other things would not be sticking out, the repairing is very difficult without professionals.
If there are any ways in which your toilet malfunctions, there would be a need to call a professional and troubleshoot. Oftentimes, if the problem is with the setting this might mean another set of renovations for the walls too.
So, what's the verdict?
Wall-mounted toilets are really good for the modern homeowner but, they need that extra care going in. While they have some noteworthy features that add to their comfort and cleanliness levels, they are not very economical in the long go. So, it is up to you.
It comes down the question of saving the environment and being fashionable while minimizing work, versus paying a lot more and having the threat of rebuilding entire walls to suit your bathroom. This is a dilemma I suppose for modern living itself, but, this is as it goes. You might love or hate the wall-mounted toilets, but, they are here to stay.
All images displayed are the property of their respective owners, image discovered via Pinterest.
Don't you love a delicious smoothie, shake, or healthy soup to start your day? Having the right blender can help you enjoy them regularly.
Most fitness freaks around the world may already be acquainted with the family-owned brand known as Vitamix. However, for those who don't know about it, let us tell you all you need to know.
Vitamix blenders have been around for almost 100 years. This goes to show how reliable and loved their products are amongst customers. However, with several options to choose from, finding a suitable one for your needs may become tricky.
Fortunately, we have created an in-depth comparison and review of the Vitamix 5200 and Vitamix 5300. Hopefully, it will help you make an informed choice about the right blender for your needs.
So without further delay, let's get straight to the deets!
Let us begin this guide by introducing the evergreen Vitamix 5200.
The Vitamix 5200 blender came out in October 2007. Initially, it was set out to replace the flagship model of the same brand - the Vitamix 5000.
This superb blender features a large 64 oz. glass pitcher that effortlessly blends juices, smoothies, shakes, soups, ice creams, and a multitude of other creamy, soupy edibles. The large-capacity pitcher provides adequate quantity for a family of four to five, so you don't need to worry about frequenting the blender during busy days.
An expert eye will observe that the shape of the pitcher is strategically designed to help push food more easily towards the blades. This ensures an even texture during the blending process so you can achieve professional-quality, creamy foods and drinks within minutes.
Most users appreciate the color options provided by the manufacturer. Those who are picky about purchasing matching or complementary items will love the color options, as you can pick and choose a product color that best fits into your decor.
A major selling point of the Vitamix 5200 is its ease of use. No customer wants to spend hours trying to figure out how to use a blender, and Vitamix 5200 makes it convenient for you with its super easy controls.
The sturdy build quality, reliability, and ease of use are the primary reasons why it has become so popular amongst customers.
All said and done, there were a few minor drawbacks with the 5200 which customers pointed out after using the product extensively. Fortunately, none of them were significant enough to affect its sales, and it remained a top-rated product in the market.
The next release, which is the Vitamix 5300 blender, came out in November 2016. It was nearly a decade later that the manufacturers released the new model.
The first noticeable difference in the Vitamix 5300 is its size. This model is around 3 inches shorter than its predecessor, which you may think is a disadvantage, but it's not. We will delve into the details of its size and functionality in just a bit.
The Vitamix 5300 is visibly different from the 5200, which is a direct result of the manufacturers' taking specific steps to address customer issues. This model addresses most of the complaints with aplomb, which gives credit to the manufacturers' listening skills.
Most customer complaints were addressed and required changes were made.
With a full-body plastic construction and a visibly smaller base and pitcher, the Vitamix 5300 soon began entering customers' homes. Furthermore, both models come with a 7-year warranty, which is excellent news for most users as it eliminates the need for costly repairs and replacements.
Another well-placed strategy employed by the manufacturers is the modification in the width of the pitcher and the size of the blades. Since the Vitamix 5300 is 3 inches shorter than its predecessor, many customers are worried about its blending abilities compared to the 5200.
Fortunately, this concern was quickly addressed by the implementation of a slightly wider pitcher base. Alongside this change, they also made the blades slightly longer so they could reach the ends of the pitcher with ease.
Comparison Of Vitamix 5200 Vs. Vitamix 5300
Now that you know a little bit about both blenders, it's time to dive into their comparison. We have divided each section according to its features and how they stand against one another. This detailed comparison should help you choose the right blender for your requirements.
Container Size
The first noticeable difference between the Vitamix 5200 and 5300 is its size and build.
Vitamix 5200
The Vitamix 5200 measures 7.25 inches wide, 20 inches long, and 8.75 inches deep. As you may well imagine, it is relatively bulky and takes up quite a bit of counter space. That being said, the 64 oz. the pitcher itself is not very heavy or bulky. You will be able to carry it easily or even hold it for extended periods without arm fatigue.
Furthermore, the cord wrap feature ensures that annoying cords and wires don't unnecessarily take up extra counter space.
Keep in mind that with the lid on, the 5200 measures 20.5 inches. Most customers reported being able to fit the blender into their shelves after removing the lid. Although it wasn't an ideal fit, it seemed to work better for most people.
The pitcher is relatively narrow and allows you to add a number of ingredients without running out of space. Moreover, the blades run smoothly and effectively to blend everything into a creamy consistency.
Vitamix 5300
Moving on to the Vitamix 5300, the first thing that comes to mind is its noticeably smaller size. The pitcher capacity has been kept the same - 64 oz. However, 3 inches have been shaved off the top to make it shorter and easier to fit into cabinets and shelves.
This change was made after continual customer reports and complaints about the blender not fitting comfortably into most cabinets. The skyscraper-like 5200 was efficient but too large for most kitchens. Its bulky appearance was not a favorite amongst most customers.
The manufacturer heard of these complaints and decided to take action, creating a shorter and wider 5300. This model fits far more comfortably into most kitchen spaces and cabinets. Furthermore, its noticeably sleeker design was a welcome addition into most customers’ homes.
Those worried about how this change affected its blending capacity - don't fret. Although the size was reduced, its pitcher capacity remained the same. To top it off, it became slightly wider to accommodate the same amount of ingredients (or more) in the pitcher.
The best part - the blades were also minutely changed so that the new model could blend perfectly without complaints.
Durability
For all intents and purposes, the Vitamix 5300 is marketed as a better and newer version of the 5200. In many areas, this account is accurate. However, when comparing the durability of both models, we found some surprising results.
Vitamix 5200
The Vitamix 5200 not only looks stronger and sturdier but quite arguably, it actually is. With a strong, polycarbonate construction and sturdy design, this blender has been known for its capacity to take a beating. In fact, the 5200 is the perfect blender for daily use - even if you accidentally knock it around a few times, it won't sustain much damage.
Another noticeable feature is the tamper. This model features a 12.5-inch tamper that is visibly larger and thicker compared to the one on the 5300. Not just that, it is also sturdier and easier to use, thanks to its significant size.
An interesting characteristic to note about the container is that it is completely heat-resistant and BPA-free. Also, the shape of the pitcher is strategic, enabling it to push the ingredients toward the blades organically, creating a smoother, finer blend.
Vitamix 5300
The Vitamix 5300 features an all-plastic construction that is robust and sturdy, but not as much as you might expect. The comparison is even starker when you place it beside the older 5200.
Although the 5300 is quite durable on its own, we noticed that its plastic body is prone to cracking. Of course, this is not something you need to constantly worry about if you purchase the blender, but it is something worth mentioning nonetheless.
Moving on to the tamper, the 5300 features a shorter and thinner one - 9.76 inches. Furthermore, its design has been changed entirely, giving it a unique shape and structure.
An observation we made while using both blenders was that we had to use the tamper more often for the 5300 than the 5200. This might be because of the shape of the pitcher or the power of the motor. Either way, we noticed that food particles tend to float around the 5300 more often than its predecessor.
Motor Power
One of the most vital aspects of a blender is the power of its motor.
Vitamix 5200
The 5200 does not fall short of our expectations. Not just ours, customers who have reviewed the product have generally been happy with its blending power.
Getting down to technical details, let's talk about the actual power of its motor. The 5200 features a 2-peak horsepower motor that has been both designed and manufactured by a Swedish company.
Its powerful motor enables the razor-sharp stainless steel blades to spin at an astonishing speed of 37,000 rpm. The 3-inch blades are excellent for blending, pureeing, grinding, and breaking down all kinds of food.
Vitamix 5300
Comparing the 5200 and the 5300, there isn't a significant difference between the motors - at least on paper. The 5300 features a slightly better 2.2-peak horsepower motor and 4-inch laser-cut stainless-steel blades. These blades are powerful and have adequate friction to help you make hot soup without the need for a stove.
You may be wondering why the 5300 has blades that are an inch longer than the 5200 when the total size of the container is smaller. Well, keep in mind that although the 5300 is shorter, it is slightly wider than the 5200.
To compensate for its additional width and enable the blades to reach the edges of the pitcher, the powerful blades have had an inch added to them.
Now, you may be wondering if the .2 horsepower makes any difference to the new model. To be honest, the difference is not significant. You may notice some differences when blending harder substances like ice, which is noticeably easier on the 5300. However, for other blending purposes, both models work as well as each other.
Noise Levels
Have you ever faced the issue of cranking up your blender early in the morning only to wake the entire household up? It can get pretty distressing, especially when all you want to do is make your morning smoothie.
Well, let's compare the noise levels of both blenders and see which one is quieter, thus, better.
Vitamix 5200
The variable speed control feature is one of the best aspects of a blender - at least most users seem to think so. The range of speed offered is from 1 to 10, with 1 being the slowest and 10 being the highest.
At the lowest speeds, the blender is relatively quiet, so you won't risk waking your family up early in the morning. However, it can get pretty loud at the highest speed setting and is sure to disturb people around you.
Vitamix 5300
Although it may sound odd, the Vitamix 5300, even with its more powerful motor, is quieter than the 5300. That being said, it is definitely loud enough to create some disturbance, especially in a quiet environment. However, what surprised us was that it was relatively quieter than its less powerful counterpart.
Those who prioritize low noise levels might find peace with the 5300, especially comparing it to the 5200. Keep in mind that it is virtually noiseless at its lowest settings (1, 2, and 3), which is excellent.
Controls
What is a good blender without easy controls? Well, both models of Vitamix are known for their superb controls, which are intuitive and easy to use. However, here is a detailed comparison of both, so you understand each machine better.
Vitamix 5200
The controls on the Vitamix 5200 are minimalistic and intuitive. Right in the middle of the base, you will see a speed dial that enables you to control the speed of the motor easily. It is an old-school dial with numbers featured around it. They are relatively easy to spot and don't require a deep understanding of the machine.
This speed dial allows you to control the speed levels from 1 to 10, depending on what you're blending and what consistency it should be.
On the left of the speed dial is the high/variable speed switch. Turning it to the "high" position enables the motor to run at its most powerful speed - which is 10. You will not be able to control or change the speed once it is in this setting. It works excellently when you want to blend something without having to watch over it constantly.
However, switching it to the "variable" speed option allows you to control the speed manually. This option is fantastic when you want to blend large chunks of food or reach a specific consistency.
Furthermore, you don't need to stop the machine to add more ingredients. The handy tamper allows you to add them effortlessly without having to turn off the motor constantly.
Lastly, you will find the power switch on the right side of the speed dial.
All said and done, Vitamix failed to include the "Pulse" setting on this model, which several customers complained about. To achieve the same effect, customers had to turn the on and off the machine repeatedly, which can get annoying after a certain point.
Fortunately, the manufacturers paid attention to customer reviews and complaints and integrated this into the next model.
Vitamix 5300
One of the aspects which most customers, including us, were excited to test was the "pulse" feature. This small but significant addition has completely changed the way we experience the blender - and it is a welcome change.
Instead of the high/variable speed control switch on the left-hand side of the speed dial, you now have the "pulse" switch.
This feature will change how you blend your food items and drinks, turning them into a thick, creamy consistency instead of a thin, watery liquid.
The “Pulse” feature essentially produces short bursts of power that automatically turn on and off without your intervention. This helps you achieve a certain creamy consistency which can be otherwise hard to achieve.
Without this excellent feature, customers were forced to manually turn on and off the power to replicate a "pulsing effect." Although it was effective, it cannot be compared to the convenience of the "pulse" button on the 5300.
Moving on, the rest of the controls are pretty much the same on the 5300 as it was on its predecessor. On the right side of the speed dial, you will find the power button. Of course, you can control the speed of the motor using the dial in the middle, which is exceptionally effective when you want more control over the blender.
Cooling System
As you may remember, we mentioned how it is possible to make hot soups in a blender without the requirement of a stove. Moreover, the powerful motor and blades often create enough energy and friction to heat the inside machinery of the blender.
It is vital to place an effective cooling system that ensures that your blender works seamlessly without overheating. Well, here is what we found about the cooling systems in both blenders. Check it out below.
Vitamix 5200
The Vitamix 5200 features an efficient radial cooling system that uses cooling fans to prevent the motor and blades from overheating. This feature is crucial, without which the blender and its motor can significantly overheat and experience burnout.
Furthermore, overheating can cause a ton of other issues for the machine. By the end of it, customers will be forced to make costly repairs and replacements.
Fortunately, most of these overheating issues are eliminated thanks to the cooling fans. The heat-resistant material of the container is also conducive to this process, allowing you to blend hot, creamy foods with ease.
An important point to note here is that although the cooling fans are excellent, they do not completely protect the machine from overheating. For this, the manufacturers should have added a type of thermal protection system, which is, unfortunately, missing from this model.
Vitamix 5300
Similar to the 5200, the Vitamix 5300 also features built-in radial cooling fans that prevent overwork and overheating of the motor. This reduces the strain produced by the machine, thus, increasing its service life and ensuring that it works at its optimal condition for years.
Fortunately, the manufacturer provides an excellent 7-year warranty which covers most of these essential items - like the motor. So, if you face any issues with the motor or blades, be sure to turn to customer support for assistance.
Moving on, the 5300 features an additional system that further enhances its functionality and longevity. This feature is the built-in thermal protection system. Again, this is a new feature that has been added only to the 5300 and is missing from its predecessor.
The thermal protection system enhances the durability and power of the blender, enabling you to make hot, creamy foods like soups right from the blender. It can be difficult for most people to imagine making soup without a stove. However, the powerful motor and blades make this possible, which is why having an overheating protection system is imperative.
Cleanup
What good is using a blender daily if cleanup is a nightmare? Imagine if you had to manually wash your blender after every use. Most people might be dissuaded from using the machine daily if that were the case.
Well, let's talk about the cleanup process of both blender models to see if they are convenient for daily use or not.
Vitamix 5200
One of the great things about the Vitamix 5200 is that it is dishwasher-friendly. Every time you blend, puree, or grind something, you can place it in a dishwasher and forget about it till the next time it's required.
Moreover, you can also choose to manually clean it using most commercial cleaners and soaps. Of course, make sure that you use the right dishwasher soap that will remove food residue, food stains, and odors.
The tamper provided also helps you clean the stuck, stubborn pieces of food residue from the blender with ease.
However, the best part about cleaning this blender is the self-cleaning mode it comes with. This patented "Easy Cleaning" system is virtually effortless and helps you clean the blender without hassle each time.
Add some water and a few drops of dish soap into the blender. Then, run it on its highest speed setting for 60 seconds. If needed, repeat the process, dump out the contents, and allow the blender to try. Cleanup has never been easier!
Vitamix 5300
Similar to the 5200, the Vitamix 5300 also features a handy tamper that enables you to reach the edges and corners of your blender. Use this tool to manually clean any bits and residue of food that are visible.
Then, you can pop it into your dishwasher and allow it to clean automatically.
If not, you can also use the "Easy Cleaning" feature, which you will find on both models. Using this feature is the same as the 5200. It makes cleanup extremely easy, convenient, and hassle-free for daily use.
Which Blender Is Right For You?
There are several factors to consider when picking the best blender for your needs. As you may have realized from our detailed comparison, both blenders have strong and weak points. However, depending on your requirements, the "best" blender may vary from person to person.
So, what are the factors to consider when picking the right blender? Let's have a look.
Durability
If you are looking for durability, there is one clear winner here. In our opinion, the Vitamix 5200 wins hands down. Its strong polycarbonate material with heat-resistant characteristics makes it an extremely robust blender for daily use. You don't need to worry much about knocking it around accidentally during use.
Compared to the 5200, the Vitamix 5300 scored slightly lower because of its all-plastic body. Although the body is heat-resistant as well, it doesn't match up to the same standards as the 5200 in this regard.
Space
Those who don't mind the additional counter space of shelf space taken by the 5200 may find it the best option. That being said, most customers faced an issue with storage and complained about it.
After hearing these complaints, the manufacturers decided to design a slightly shorter model that would fit into most storage spaces easily.
However, keep in mind that the 5200 may be ideal for those who want to blend smaller amounts of ingredients at a time. The large-capacity pitcher of the 5300 is excellent for big families but may cause wastage for smaller ones.
Moreover, you may be required to store the excess food you make as it isn't possible to consume the entire contents of the pitcher in one go.
If storage space is of utmost importance to you, then go for the 5300. Furthermore, if you don't mind blending a lot of ingredients and ending up with excess food, this may be the best option.
Pulse Feature
One of the most significant drawbacks of the 5200 is the absence of the "Pulse" feature. If this is important for you, the 5300 is, without a shadow of a doubt, the clear winner.
Container
The Vitamix 5200 features a classic container that is large, and slightly bulky but does not have a large capacity. On the other hand, the Vitamix 5300 has a low-profile container with a wide base. This enables you to add more ingredients compared to the 5200.
Depending on which aspect matters more to you, the choice between the two is clear.
Budget
The Vitamix 5200 is almost $100 cheaper than the 5300. If budgetary constraints are a concern for you while choosing the best blender, we recommend the Vitamix 5200.
However, if you are willing to spend about $100 more to enjoy the advanced features and low-profile design of the 5300, this might be a better option for you.
Summing It Up
And with that, it's a wrap.
In our opinion, if you are looking for a budget blender and don't necessarily mind the extra space it takes in the cabinet or shelf, opt for the Vitamix 5200. But, if storage space is important to you, and you want to try out the features offered by the newer model of the same brand, consider the Vitamix 5300.
Leave a comment below to let us and our fellow readers know which Vitamix model you prefer and why. Stay tuned for more reviews and guides.
Do you want to try your hand at gardening but simply don't have enough room at home? Consider vertical gardening - a trend that's becoming increasingly popular!
Many people struggle with space in their homes, whether it is to introduce a new gaming center, kitchen island, or even just a few plants. If you have been considering trying the art of gardening but can't find enough space for it, we've got the solution for you.
Vertical gardening is a recent trend that is becoming popular because of its practicality and aesthetics. This trend involves planting upwards instead of downwards. Vertical gardens are space-saving, look great, and most of them can be fun DIY projects to enjoy.
You can recycle almost anything - from old cans to teapots, birdhouses, pencil stands, and so much more. So, if you're ready to take the next step but are stuck with ideas, we've got 59 creative picks for you.
Now, without further ado, let's begin!
Best Vertical Gardening Ideas
Landscape Fabric Garden
For our first vertical garden idea, we decided to use landscape fabric as planters. The material is soft and breathable, allowing the soil to breathe freely without restriction. Moreover, this idea packs quite a visual punch. You can choose to create more than one' pocket' vertically and pot different types of plants for added aesthetics.
This vertical garden idea is relatively simple to recreate at home. All you need is some landscape fabric, needle, thread, and scissors. Assuming you don't already have your seedlings purchased, you can buy different colored plants to add appeal to the vertical garden.
Pastel Planters
Our next idea involves using planters you already own (or getting a couple of new ones, if you don't have any at home). They are relatively inexpensive and will not create a dent in your expenses.
Of course, you can also use old cans that you can easily recycle. Bring out your acrylic paints and use pastel shades for this idea. The result is something sophisticated, minimalist, and simply gorgeous.
Use ordinary rope and a puncher to create holes in the can or planter. Thread the rope through them and hang your planters, complete with your new seedlings.
Recycled Plastic Containers
Let's face it; all of us have one too many plastic containers lying around the house. For our next vertical garden idea, how about recycling some of these old containers to create a beautiful vertical garden for your home?
Paint the plastic containers with any shade you wish - white, black, or multicolored. Make sure to choose a shade that complements the color theme of your home.
You can even punch a few holes in the containers to allow proper air circulation. It's really that simple! Plant a couple of succulents or evergreens for your indoor vertical garden.
Old Wooden Boxes
Do you enjoy spending time on DIY projects? If yes, then you'll love our next vertical garden idea that you can make entirely from scratch.
For this idea, pick out a few old wooden boxes (could be jewelry boxes or anything you think is usable). If you want to get really creative, take a saw and a hot glue gun, and create shelf-like inner borders in various shapes. If not, just glue a couple of boxes together to create a unique geometric shape.
Place cactus potting mix and your plants, and your vertical garden is ready to be hung!
Ceramic Pots
If you find yourself constantly running to the market to buy herbs for your dishes, how about growing them instead? For our next creative vertical garden idea, we present ceramic pot vertical gardens that are ideal for your kitchen herbs.
The best part about this DIY project is that you can customize the pots in any color. Paint them a classic white or black that will complement most interiors, or opt for a more creative project by painting designs and patterns using acrylic paints. Remember to use safe paints that will allow the soil to breathe easily.
Chicken Wire Fence
Our next idea features a time-consuming yet straightforward DIY project that is fun to create and looks super aesthetic. If you have an extra chicken wire fence lying around the backyard, it could be the perfect vertical garden setting for an outdoor garden.
You'll need a few pots (or as many as you wish to hang on the fence). Attach wire around the necks of the pots, hanging them vertically from the wire fence. Pot all your favorite plants in this outdoor vertical garden, remembering to trim off any excess wire to avoid injury.
Tin Can Planters
We all have old tin cans lying around our homes. Maybe you might have old beer cans, paint cans, or even canned fruit and other foods lying around. Well, these cans are perfect for making an innovative DIY vertical garden.
Get your paints and brushes out because this idea requires some creativity on your end! Paint the recycled cans in bright shades that will add a pop of color to your indoor or outdoor garden. Use wire or ropes to hang the cans from a fence or your walls. Place your favorite potted plants, and voila!
Diamond Hanging Planters
Here is another great DIY project for the creative bugs among us. Create your own hanging planters using old hangers, plywood, hooks, a drill, some screws, and finally, your pots and plants.
Using the correct dimensions, cut out a circular base on which you will keep your ceramic or plastic pot. Cut off the horizontal base of the hanger and add a diamond-shaped base instead. Stick the rounded pot base, spray paint the pot in your favorite color, and that's it!
Vertical Box Garden
Our next vertical gardening idea looks extremely simple and elegant. The color theme can be decided by you (you don't need to follow out color combination exactly if you don't wish to).
This vertical gardening idea uses planter boxes painted in bright, eye-catching colors against a neutral colored board. You can change the color combination or even add planters in different shades for a bold effect.
This planter fence can be placed indoors or outdoors, depending on the style you have in mind. Place it next to the entryway of your home for a warm, welcoming feel.
Rustic Garden
If you like the old, rustic appeal of slightly chipping paint, wooden borders, and the use of classic whites, you'll love our next idea. Creating this is quite simple as long as you have the right tools.
You'll need a couple of poplars, white paint and terracotta pots. Cut the poplar into symmetric pieces and connect the pieces using nails and screws or glue. Paint the planks white, and apply petroleum jelly on small areas before painting it entirely in white.
Once it's dry, rub off the areas with a paper towel to create the 'chipping off' style. Finally, add the terracotta pots with pot hangers, and you're done!
Wall Of Green
This vertical gardening idea is relatively bold and may take slightly more effort to maintain and upkeep. However, as you can see by the image, the result is eye-catching.
You can create a literal 'wall of green' by potting plants in close proximity along a vertical wall. It is crucial to ensure that these plants are sun-friendly (if you plan on keeping this wall outdoors).
The result is striking, as your wall of green welcomes your guests with warmth and brightness. The leaves tumble downwards in a kind of waterfall effect.
Brass Ring Hanging Vertical Garden
Here is an excellent idea for a vertical garden that looks extremely classy and sophisticated. The brass ring hanging vertical garden can be placed anywhere in your home or even outside. In our humble opinion, this design looks best against a neutral colored wall, but you might be more creative and figure out a different setting for it!
This piece looks best when complemented with terracotta potted plants. However, you can also experiment with plastic or ceramic pots. Opt for a plant with long, beautiful leaves for the best effect.
Clay Hanging Pots
Clay pots have an inherently minimalist appeal to them. However, you may not have enough room in your home to place all your beautiful plants.
We ask you to consider hanging the clay pots vertically instead of placing them on the floor for our next idea. You can opt for rope, wire, or even buy a hanging kit online for hanging the pots. Depending on the rest of your decor, the material you choose for hanging the pots can make a huge difference.
Upcycled Ammunition Cans
This is probably one of the wackiest ideas out there, but have you considered using upcycled ammunition cans as planters? If you can get your hands on them, these could add a unique and attractive appeal to any home.
The best part about this idea is that you don't need to paint, varnish, or make any major additions to these cans. Even if they are worn out or chipped, they will work great. In fact, this might even add to its appeal!
Plants Not Pipes
Some people can be really creative, and the proof lies in how brilliantly someone designed this metal pipe planter. Each pipe has been painted in metallic shades of gold, silver, bronze, and copper.
The addition of beautiful succulents has brought together the entire look to create a unique ensemble. When creating this at home, remember to use thin wires to attach the pipes in a ladder-like formation. Of course, you can choose to use just one pipe instead of multiple, if that's the look you're going for.
Wooden Diamond Vertical Garden
Does the name sound confusing to you? How can wood and diamonds possibly be integrated to create a vertical garden? Well, it's actually quite simple.
This wooden diamond vertical doesn't use any real diamonds, but diamond shapes created using wood. Now that sounds do-able, right? To create this unique trellis, you'll need a couple of power tools at hand. Use different varieties of plants against a neutral colored wall to create the most astonishing effect.
You can choose to cover an entire wall with this vertical garden design. Alternatively, you can experiment with a smaller area first and then move on to the entire wall design.
Pallet Gardening
Here is an excellent idea where you can recycle old pallets that can be found in abundance in any stacking inventory. If you want, you can add your unique spin by painting it with bright colors or patterns. But even if you decide to use it as it is, the result can be quite simplistic yet intriguing.
The pallets can be used as horizontal planters where you place your potted plants. Add a different species of plant in each row to add variety to your vertical gardening design.
Steel Mesh Wall
By looking at this steel mesh wall, you'll realize how simple yet effective this idea can be. With this wall design, you can choose to make it as large or small as you wish. In fact, this design hardly takes up any space on the wall because it is almost flat!
Again, you can place as many or as few plants as you wish to - depending on how you envision your vertical garden. Add terracotta pots, ceramic, plastic, or old recycled bottles turned into planters on your wall.
Living Sculpture
Our next vertical gardening idea is another unique and extremely striking piece. This one features a living sculpture - and yes, it's precisely what you're thinking. This wall panel is created by using a fascinating interplay of wood, greenery, and moss.
The best part about this idea is that it can be placed on the wall, as a centerpiece, in the entryway, or anywhere else you wish. It is a versatile piece of artwork that will look stunning in any place in your home.
Plant the miniature forest on a metal tray to allow easy portability.
Copper Pipe Hanger
Coming to our next vertical gardening idea, we bring you the copper pipe hanger. This one is made using ordinary curtain hangers, but we decided to give it a copper paint job that would entirely transform its appeal.
You will need some hardware to install this one, but it is a fun DIY project, and the result is super aesthetic. Remember to use strong wires or wool thread to hang the small planters. We recommend using light pots and plants as you don't want to risk creating a mess in case the entire piece falls due to excessive weight.
Mason Jar Kitchen
This next vertical gardening idea features extremely compact 'gardens' in mason jars. Attach each jar to a wooden plank and decorate it in your kitchen for quick and easy access to all your favorite herbs.
All you need is a few mason jars, soil, and your favorite herbs for this DIY project. Get hold of a couple of cedar fence boards, and you're done! You can label each tiny 'herb garden' using chalk (to make it easy) or opt for a more creative approach to labeling.
Hanging Herb Garden
We have already featured a couple of hanging hear gardens on our list; however, this one is super easy and looks exceptionally classy when it is done. This hanging herb garden has been created with the help of a shower curtain rod, clay pots, and curtain brackets. The other items, like the herbs and soil, can be purchased later.
While you can hang this absolutely anywhere that has space to hang curtain rods comfortably, most people tend to use this idea in the kitchen. It gives you easy access to all the herbs you need to use without having to run outdoors constantly.
Basket Blooms
A basket full of blooms sounds like a sweet deal right off the bat. The countryside inspires this next vertical gardening idea. Using a lumbar wall fence as a background, hang as many wooden baskets as you can, covering the entire facade of the wall.
Plant the season's most vivid blooms or opt for a variety of herbs, creating your very own herb basket garden. This works best against a neutral wall that'll draw all the attention to the colorful blooms.
Crates And Foliage
Old crates are plentiful, and you might even find some lying around your backyard. Well, how about transforming these old crates into a DIY vertical gardening project? This project looks aesthetic and is super functional for growing most types of plants and herbs.
Find some space in your garden and create a pyramid structure using old crates stacked on top of each other. If their positions look too precarious to you, reinforce its stability by using wooden planks for support.
Rustic Planter Gardening
Our next vertical gardening idea is similar to our previous one but has an entirely different, rustic appeal. This one has been made using pallets and reinforced with iron bars. Two buckets have been hung using chains for support on either side of the structure, creating a completely antique appeal.
The tin buckets can be used for planting other varieties of plants or herbs. Label each planter with the name of the herb or spice you have potted. Place this outdoors to create your vertical garden or indoors for a herb garden inside the home.
Minimalist Wood Garden
Moving over to our next idea, we have the minimalist wood garden. This one features cedar boxes stacked in a 'boxed' design to add appeal while saving space in your home. The vertical garden can be filled with beautiful, small plants and using the appropriate soil needed.
You can even choose to plant succulents that require less maintenance and watering. This will ensure that the cedar does not rot due to excessive watering. Place it against a neutral background for the best effect.
Muted Terracotta Pots
If you have a dull, neutral-colored wall in your house that needs some sprucing up, then consider our next idea for your vertical gardening project. To create this look, get a couple of terracotta pots and paint them in muted, pastel shades of your choice. This image features muted blue shades hung against a white wall.
The uniformity of the blue terracotta pots against the brightly colored flowers provides a striking appeal. It can transform the look of any dull wall, making it a wonderland of bright flowers.
Soda Bottles
Almost all of us drink soda or some kind of drink that comes in plastic bottles. Most of the end, we end up throwing the bottles away. However, you can turn this trash into treasure with our next idea in a few simple steps.
Using a paper cutter or a sharp knife, create a large gap in the plastic bottles. Fill it with soil and plant flowers or herbs of your choice. Finally, hang them using ropes, wires, or a clothesline.
Shoe Rack Vertical Garden
Ever thought of repurposing an old, cloth shoe organizer into a vertical garden? Well, most of the work is already done for you, as the shoe organizer features multiple 'pockets' for planting your fresh flowers and plants in.
The size of these pockets is ideal for planting individual flowers and herbs. Place the vertical garden outdoors for a mess-free planting and watering experience. You can get a little more creative and paint some of the pockets in bright colors or patterns.
Dresser Garden
If you have an old drawer that you were planning on throwing away, keep it for this next vertical gardening project. The clever use of these old drawers for planting colorful blooms can be eye-catching and functional at the same time.
Use spray paint or traditional painting tools to add a splash of color to the old drawers. Place it outside your home in the garden or your entryway for a great addition to any home. Remember to varnish the paint, so it doesn't suffer damage through pollution, dust, or sun damage.
Driftwood Sculpture
Do you love succulents but can't find the appropriate place to adorn them in your home? You can make a living sculpture out of pieces of driftwood and beautiful red and green succulents for our next idea.
The living sculpture is exceptionally aesthetic and can turn any bare wall into a masterpiece within seconds. Succulents can be an ideal choice of plants for this idea, as they require low maintenance and are not excessively thirsty for water or sunlight.
Self-Irrigating Vertical Garden
As the name suggests, this vertical garden is self-irrigating and completely low maintenance for those gardeners who can't make time to tend to their plant pets.
Of course, creating this will take about 3 to 4 hours, but it can be an enjoyable DIY project for those who like to do things with their own hands. Overall, the result will be something magnificent that works as a great addition to your garden.
Tree Trunk Planter
There is no end to some individuals' creativity, which can be seen from our next vertical gardening idea. Using a desiccated tree trunk and some beautiful succulents, this next piece looks like something straight out of an art vault.
You can make this yourself by using a part of an old tree trunk and some of your favorite plants. Opting for succulents will make maintenance and upkeep easier, as they are inherently low-maintenance plants. Place it against a neutral board for added effect and texture.
Bookshelf Garden
Using a couple of planks of wood and cedar troughs, you can create a kind of leaning bookshelf that features all of your favorite plants. Making this bookshelf is relatively simple; all you need are a couple of basic tools, wood, and plants.
Place this leaning bookshelf against a neutral wall to draw attention to this new addition. Alternatively, you can also paint the wood in bright colors and add beautiful green foliage.
3D Wall Garden
We have a 3D wall garden that looks stunning against almost any backdrop for our next vertical gardening idea. Use metal frames to border to bulging, green leaves to create a contemporary meets vintage appeal for this one.
It is best to use ferns requiring minimal attention and care, as it may not be practical to regularly water these plants. The modern aesthetic of this wall garden looks best when placed against wooden backgrounds. However, don't keep that from experimenting with your own style.
Bird Bath
This is a perfect addition to any garden, as it works as a birdbath and a vertical garden in one. Although it looks complicated, it is relatively easy to create and will not take too many tools.
It is best to use different sizes of terracotta pots for this one, as you will need to stack them on top of each other. Paint them in bright colors and place a large plastic container on top filled with water for feeding visiting birds.
Zen Garden
If you are looking to take a minimalist approach to your vertical garden, then this idea might be perfect for you. Take a couple of zinc plates, saucers, bowls, and anything else that catches your eye. You can use a variety of shapes and sizes for this one.
These planters bring all the attention to its minimalist appeal and look stunning against almost any backdrop. Use plants or succulents with minimal foliage for this idea if you want it to match with the rest of the minimalist decor. Of course, you can also choose to plant bright flowers if you wish.
Birdhouse Garden
This next vertical garden idea is perfect for nature lovers, as it brings together all the beautiful elements of nature. If you have birdhouses lying around your home, then you already have most of the work done for you! However, if you don't have any, don't worry. You can still create this beautiful piece without much hassle.
Plant your succulents or herb garden by using birdhouses as a planter. Paint them in bright shades or keep the old, worn-out look for a slightly different appeal.
Hanging Bucket Garden
Looking to save space while recycling old materials around your home? This tin bucket hanging garden can be a perfect addition to your home, office, or any space you can spare. Of course, it doesn't take up too much space in the first place, making it ideal for gardeners looking for a compact vertical garden solution.
Adding a door frame for the border can add a unique touch to this hanging bucket garden idea. Make sure to use plants that require low maintenance, so you can keep the vertical garden looking fresh all year long.
Seed Containers
Coming to our next vertical gardening idea, we have decided to use old seed containers as planters. This is relatively easy to find, especially if you have a farm and buy seeds in bulk. The containers can be stacked on top of one another or hung on a wall to create your vertical garden.
Clean the inside of the container thoroughly before proceeding. Place the soil and plant your flowers, herbs, or other plants carefully. Arrange the seed containers indoors or even outdoors. You can keep the front label as it is for added appeal.
Vintage Dressers
Sure, many of us have antique-looking dressers at home, which we don't plan on using anymore. Throwing these away can be difficult, as they might have sentimental value. With our next idea, you don't need to worry about throwing away your old dressers. Simply repurpose them into an outdoor vertical garden!
Simply haul your vintage drawer outside, fill it up with soil, and place your favorite plants inside it. You can even decorate a couple of pots and planters on the tabletop to add more foliage to your vertical garden.
Exposed Root Vertical Garden
Our next vertical gardening idea features tiny plants with exposed ball roots. You might be skeptical about its appearance while reading about it, but trust us, it can add an elegant appeal to any home corner.
These tiny plants are hung by wires or threads from the ceiling. They act as a focal point to any room which is otherwise looking dull or bare. Opt for plants that grow slowly, as they are perfect for this hanging vertical garden idea. Adding some moss to the roots will provide the plants with optimal moisture and minimal maintenance on your end.
Futuristic Garden
Do you enjoy a futuristic and sci-fi appeal in your home decor and art? This next idea features protruding shelves arranged in neat vertical rows from top to bottom. Bright green moss is tucked into the shelves, making it look like the foliage is pouring out from the mouth-like shelves.
This idea is perfect for any modern or contemporary house setting. Using singular colored shelves adds definition to the entire structure, making it look like something out of a sci-fi film.
Coffee & Soup Tin Planters
Before throwing out your old coffee and soup tins, consider recycling them into DIY planters for our next idea. Collect as many coffee and soup tins as you can. They can be of different sizes, so don't worry about them not matching. You can even collect painting tins or anything else you can find around.
Take a couple of brightly colored paints and go wild! Paint all the tins in different, vivid colors. Plant some soil and add your plants, herbs, and flowers. Now, stick them to the walls, a fence, or even hang them using wire or ropes.
Grid Pots
Adding a grid will immediately ensure that whatever art piece you are planning looks symmetrical and clean. Create grids (as small or as large as you wish) along the walls using metal bars, rusted metal, or even wood if you wish.
Now, add lightweight terracotta planters to the grid using wires or by sticking them securely. Ensure that you do this correctly, as you don't want the pots falling and creating a bigger mess. Add your plants, and voila! A desert-themed vertical garden for your home is made easily and efficiently.
Scrap Wood Stained Planters
Do you have any old wooden boxes around your home? If not, don't worry. You can find these almost anywhere without even having to spend any money on them.
Get hold of a couple of similar sized wooden containers or boxes. Cut off one of the sides, so that it is entirely open with only three sides (a three-sided wooden box). Now, carefully stick these to the wall, add soil, plants, and you've got your vertical garden ready!
Stain the wooden boxes using natural dyes such as tea, coffee, vinegar, beet, spinach, etc. This will add a beautiful tint to natural wood.
Modern Art Vertical Garden
If you want your vertical garden to look like something straight out of a modern art museum, this next idea may be perfect for you. Although it seems complex, the idea behind it is extremely simple. You need two elements to create this piece - white frames and bright green moss.
This eye-catching decor is perfect for an office, a home-study, the partition between the living room and dining room, or even a modern bedroom. Use delicate wires to hang the frames from the ceiling, so it looks like they are floating in mid-air.
Ikea Lack Table
No space is too compact for introducing a garden. This is our motto. Hence, we have provided almost five dozen ideas for vertical gardens ideal for compact spaces. For our next inspiration, we decided to use the Ikea lack table hack.
For this, you'll obviously need an Ikea lack table, some chains, paint, and sonotubes. The sonotubes will act like miniature planters that you place inside the design.
This DIY project forces you to think out of the box. The result is something thoroughly breathtaking and something that looks like it's been purchased from a modern-art gallery.
Hanging Wall Gardens
This indoor hanging wall garden looks extremely simple and even a little rustic. However, it may be the perfect addition to your kitchen, living room, or any other space of your home.
You can choose to do a DIY project out of this idea by cutting up wood and creating this shelf yourself. Of course, you can also choose just to buy the hanging bracket and attach it to any wall. Place small (lightweight) plants on each shelf. Add a salt and pepper shaker and create a herb rack for your kitchen in no time!
Ladder Garden
Here is our next vertical gardening idea that makes use of a discarded ladder to create your garden. The idea behind it is extremely simple - just create a ladder with shelves using basic cutting tools and some wood. If the wood is pre-cut, then most of the hard work is already done!
This ladder garden can be placed anywhere - outdoors or indoors. Plant all your favorite flowers, herbs, or succulents along the shelves. You can even use this one as a quick herb garden for your kitchen, so you don't need to keep running to the garden to pick fresh herbs for your cooking.
Tiered Potted Garden
This next vertical garden is perfect for those beginner gardeners who are never too sure of how much water their plants need. Well, this planter takes out all the guesswork from it. The vertically stacked pots are pre-made (so you don't need to create one yourself). Buy this tiered potted garden online and place all your favorite plants in the pots.
Now, as you water the top plants, let gravity do its business. The excess water drips downwards, saturating the plants below.
Pyramid
Pyramids always look super aesthetic, right? Well, for this next vertical garden idea, create a pyramid where you can neatly stack herbs and spices or plant different varieties of seeds for each row in. Turn the pyramid into your herb rack by using each row for a specific kind of herb.
You can make this pyramid structure on your own using stacked wood pieces or buying a readymade piece online. You can even choose to get this made by a handy carpenter if you know one!
Stacked Raised Bed
This stacked raised garden bed is relatively simple to create on your own. You can even use old drawers, containers, or wood pieces to build this by scratch. Of course, you will find several of these ready-made raised beds in the market if you wish to purchase one instead.
Fill up each stack to the brim with soil, and plant your seeds, seedlings, or plants and flowers carefully. Water them as required and watch your vertical garden bloom.
Monogram Wreath
Many homeowners like to hang monogrammed designs in and around their homes. For our next idea, you can create a living monogram wreath using a monogram planter, some moss and succulents, and paints if you're feeling adventurous.
You can create the monogrammed planter on your own or buy one from a store or online. Spray paint (or use ordinary paints) in a bright color of your choice. Fill the inside of the planter with moss and your favorite succulent plants, and voila! Your living monogram wreath can be decorated in your entryway, inside your home, or in the garden.
Plumbing Pipe Garden
Plumbing pipes that are shaped vertically can be the perfect DIY planter for your vertical garden. Make sure you clean out the inside of the pipes thoroughly before you begin planting the soil and seeds in them.
If you feel that the pipes look old and washed out, spray paint them using bright neon shades. This can be a wonderful addition to your garden or patio. The plumbing pipe garden is sure to be an eye-catcher and can be used to create an industrial-looking aesthetic.
Trellis Garden
You may already have a trellis in your home, and if you do, this idea is perfect for you! That being said, if you don't own a trellis, it is pretty straightforward to make one without much hassle.
Use holders to secure tin buckets along the trellis wall. Add soil and some of your favorite plants in the tin buckets to create a DIR trellis vertical garden. This idea has a striking appeal and can provide a splash of color and nature to your home.
Floating Pot Garden
Our next vertical garden inspiration is ideal for homes that struggle with space. This idea is both compact and practical and also looks super aesthetic.
Cut out holes in wooden planks that will accommodate terracotta pots. Ensure that the holes are big enough to allow the pots to slide down only midway and not entirely. Use ropes or wires to hang the planks in as many rows as you wish, and add your plants to create a compact, space-saving vertical garden.
Teacup Garden
Our next vertical garden idea features a mosaic wall and teacups made into planters. You can choose to create the entire mosaic wall yourself or even opt for a wall you already have at home.
Use old (or new) teacups as planters by gluing them against the wall. Add soil and plants, and you're done. You can even add a few additional items like teaspoons, small saucers, or the tops of the teacups by sticking them against the wall. This creates an impressive design to the vertical garden that is sure to turn heads.
Ladder & Bucket
Surely you have a ladder and a few buckets lying around your home. If you do, then you can upcycle these items to create a unique vertical garden. Place the buckets horizontally against each rung of the ladder, and fill them with soil and plants or seeds.
If you're feeling creative, you can even paint the buckets and ladder in bright, complementary colors for extra appeal. Place this vertical garden outdoors for everyone to see.
Conclusion
Phew! We are finally done with our comprehensive list of 59 vertical gardening ideas.
While most of these DIY vertical gardening ideas are easy to create, some may require additional tools and expertise. Nonetheless, each one of these is unique, space-saving, and extremely functional.
The most important thing to keep in mind when creating any of these is to have fun with it. You may even come up with some interesting and unique ideas of your own. Please don't forget to share your ideas with us in the comments below, and let us know which idea was your favorite.
Are you tired of food going stale sitting in your fridge? If so, we might have the perfect solution for you.
Even though most of us like the idea of going to the supermarket every other day, it isn't a feasible idea. We usually buy many things in a single go, which quickly develops into a spiral where produce starts going stale.
Yes, there's always the option of meal prep, but cooked food starts tasting bland after a while. Hence, many people use zip lock bags to freeze food, but vacuum sealer bags might be a better option.
By vacuum sealing your food, you can retain the taste as well as its freshness. And, it works well for cooked and uncooked food items. However, finding the right vacuum sealer bags can be challenging, so we came up with some great suggestions.
Are you tired of meat going tasteless after storing them in zip lock bags? Don't worry, as these bags from FoodSaver will help you retain the taste of all food items for months. FoodSaver is a company making multitudes of vacuum sealer bag options along with a very own sealing system. So, let's check out the features of this product.
The first thing you will notice about this product would be its quality. The thickness of these plastic vacuum bags makes sure to lock in the freshness of cooked and uncooked foods. On top of that, it can stand temperatures of up to 195° F, making it microwaveable as well as great for sous vide water baths.
When using the FoodSaver vacuum sealing system, the plastic bags become completely airtight and watertight. Don't worry about tearing the bags, as the material is meant to resist it. Moreover, it won't get punctured even if it is in contact with sharp objects.
One of the common complaints about vacuum sealing bags is the complicated usage process. But, that's not the case with these FoodSaver vacuum bags. You can even customize the length of these plastic bags to fit any food according to your preference.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Overall, this is undoubtedly one of the best vacuum sealer bags we have come across. However, it does come at a high price compared to the other options available on the market. But, the quality of these bags is impeccable and keeps your food considerably fresher.
When getting the best vacuum sealer bags, FoodSaver is a company you can trust. Alongside the several variants of vacuum sealer bags produced by the company, these pre-cut ones are good for storing individual portions. So, let's look at the specialty of these plastic bags.
First of all, let's talk about convenience. These vacuum sealer bags are specifically pre-cut to fit around 1 quart or 946 ml of food. Hence, these are great options for people who live on their own or those who like to meal prep by dividing portions.
Furthermore, because of its multi-layer protection and high-quality plastic, these bags can be used for cooking. So, cooking your meat in a sous vide bath wouldn't be a problem with these bags. Similarly, the thickness of this plastic makes it good for storing food in the freezer for a long time, sometimes up to three years.
What's more, the plastic used in these vacuum seal bags is BPA-free. Therefore, you can store food for your kids or pets in these bags without worrying about the harmful effects of plastic. Plus, it locks in the freshness of your food, making them healthier and nutrient-rich.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This isn't really a negative thing about this product, but you must realize that it's only suitable for storing single portions. Because of the 1 quart size, storing big steaks or a large amount of food can be challenging. Moreover, when storing liquid food, try to freeze it beforehand to avoid spills while vacuuming.
Are you tired of using vacuum seal bags that cause freezer burn to your fish and meat? Don't worry, as these rolls from Wevac are the perfect solution to the problem. Along with outstanding quality, the company provides a combo of two rolls to let you pack a lot of food at the same time.
HEAVY DUTY AND PUNCTURE PREVENTION - 2 pack of 8 inch by 50...
INCREASE STORAGE TIME FOR NUTRITION AND FLAVOR - 3-6 times...
Why Did We Like It?
As someone looking forward to vacuum sealing your food to increase its shelf life, you will want plastic bags that will retain the freshness and nutrients of each item. These Wevac vacuum sealer bags let you achieve that with ease as it's pretty simple to use, even for a beginner.
Apart from that, these are commercial vacuum sealer bag rolls. Hence, the superior quality of the plastic allows you to store the food items for a longer duration. The packets even have specialized grooves to prevent the foods from developing burns from the cold surface of commercial or home-use freezers.
Furthermore, Wevac follows a no-questions-asked return policy. So, if you happen to face any issues with the vacuum sealer bag rolls, don't forget to contact customer care. We found them to be quite prompt at dealing with quality or delivery issues of the products.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the things that could have been better for this product is the sealing process. It supports most of the vacuum sealing devices available on the market, but it can take you some time to figure out the right way to get the best seal. A trick is to take the right measurement and seal the bag keeping the rough side facing up.
Tired of using expensive yet thin vacuum seal bags that don't seem to work? Try this combo from Simple Houseware that makes storing your food affordable and keeps it fresh for a long time without a constant need to check on it. And, the best part is that these rolls are compatible with the most common vacuuming systems.
Safety: BPA Free, Simmer and Microwave Safe, Great for Sous...
One for All: Designed for use with all vacuum packaging...
Why Did We Like It?
This pack of vacuum sealer bags rolls from Simple Houseware is by far one of the premium quality plastic bags we have seen on the market. Even though the material is thick, it seamlessly melts while sealing and keeps your food airtight. And, the multi-ply plastic keeps your food from getting dehydrated when kept in the freezer.
That's not all, as simmering or cooking via the sous vide method was especially simple with this bag. It's easy to seal the mouth of these bags, irrespective of the length you want to keep. If you follow the proper sealing method, the bags won't open while in the bath.
Moreover, you don't need to worry about safety as the plastic used in this bag roll is BPA-free so it doesn't react with the food. It's also safe to be used in the microwave and doesn't melt even at relatively high temperatures.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We have to say that this is one of the best vacuum sealer rolls we have tried out. While going through the past reviews, we found out that the bag doesn't perform well in high temperatures like 195° F. Don't get discouraged as it supports microwaving, but you will need to use a lower temperature setting.
Are you planning to pack a huge amount of food in one go? If yes, these vacuum sealer bag rolls from WishDirect might be the best option. It comes in a pack of four, which makes it perfect to keep the annual stocking of food in your pantry or freezer absolutely safe.
GREAT VALUE: Half of the money to buy 4 pack of 11 inch x 25...
HEAVY DUTY & STABLE: Two layers 4 mil heavy-duty vacuum seal...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, we have to say that a combo of four vacuum sealer bag rolls is an excellent product for those with big families. On top of that, each roll has a length of 25 feet, so you can easily customize the size of each bag. And, the length is pretty manageable for a single person who is vacuum-sealing the bags.
However, the best part about this plastic bag roll combo is that the material has texture on both sides. Hence, your meat wouldn't get freezer burns even when stored for a long time. We also felt that the quality of these rolls was better than other plastic bags available in the market.
Furthermore, you can seal these plastic bags with the best vacuum sealers available in the market. The bags can stand high temperatures and are compatible with microwaves, sous vide baths, and dishwashers.
What Could’ve Been Better?
A common complaint we came across while reading the customer reviews was about the rolls being a bit tight in the FoodSaver machines. Hence, if you happen to use one of the FoodSaver vacuum sealers, try to measure the inside to check its compatibility with these vacuum sealer rolls.
Pros
Simple to use
Fast and tight vacuum sealing
Good for microwaving food
Value for money
Cons
Might need to adjust for fitting into FoodSaver machine
As soon as we got hold of the Avid Armor vacuum sealer bags, we knew that it would be helpful for many people. We suggest these vacuum seal bags to those who have to pack food for commercial purposes or stock up food for a small kitchen. So, let's check out the features.
Preserves Food Quality - Keep your food fresh and delicious...
Tough Enough for Any Job - Need a trusty packing solution...
Why Did We Like It?
Let's start by talking about the size of these bags. You can get the 8 inches x 12 inches or quart-sized bags in a pack of 200 or 300 units. The size is perfect for individual portions and can even fit a good amount of cooked or dry foods.
One of the best features of this product is the cross-hatch pattern present on the plastic. This added texture allows you to store moist foods in these bags and to vacuum seal them easily. It's often hard to seal bags that lack texture as the liquid tends to escape from the packets. And, the bags are compatible with most commercial vacuum sealers.
When it comes to the quality, one side of the bag has a thickness of 3 mil, while the back has a thickness of 4 mil. So, you can be sure that the vacuum-sealed food will stay fresh and nutritious for long.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Before saying the negatives, we do have to mention that this is one of the best individual-sized vacuum seal bags available. However, the only problem you may face with it is that learning the right way to seal the bags may take some time. So, you may need to try a couple of vacuum sealers for the bags.
Do you vacuum seal foods for commercial purposes? If so, then buying a multi-pack of vacuum sealer rolls might be better to save a few bucks. This product from O2frepak comes with six plastic rolls to let you store a lot of food without needing to rebuy the vacuum bags.
Universal Design:Compatible with Any Types Vacuum Sealer...
Economical and Customized Size :6Pack 8"x20'(3Rolls) and...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this multi-pack of vacuum sealer bags contains rolls with two width variants. Hence, it allows you to portion the food according to personal preference. It's also suitable for storing dry and cooked foods as the volumes are often different.
Coming to the quality, the plastic used to make these vacuum sealer bag rolls is pretty good. It even has embossed lines to prevent freezer burn as well as any liquids from escaping the bags. If you want to store raw meat, don't worry, as the bone guards make these bags strong against accidental cuts.
As we have said already, this pack is perfect for those who want to pack food for commercial purposes. The bags can be closed with the most common vacuum sealers available on the market. On sealing, the plastic forms a strong bond that doesn't break easily, and the food stays fresh for long.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This isn't really a drawback of the quality of these vacuum sealer bags, but it does take a lot of time to prep the bags. You will need to spend a considerable amount of time measuring and cutting the bags. A small tip, prepare the bags before you start assembling foods to save time.
Compared to other vacuum sealer bag rolls available in the market, this combo from Nutri-Lock is one of the most affordable options. However, the brand doesn't compromise on the quality and instead provides superior quality plastic bags that let you store food for a long time. So, let's check it out.
Universal - These bags are compatible with almost all...
Why Did We Like It?
As you might have noted, these vacuum sealer rolls come in a combo. The rolls have a similar length of 50 inches but vary in the width of 11 inches and 8 inches, respectively. This allows you to customize the length of each bag according to your need, making these rolls perfect for storing large pieces of food, like pork ribs or lamb shanks.
Now, coming to the quality, one of the best things about this product is the thickness of the plastic bags. At 3.5 mil, the bags contain the freshness of food items for a long time. It also makes these bags excellent for storing food in a freezer, pantry, or even for sous vide cooking.
Moreover, these vacuum sealer rolls are compatible with most clamp-style vacuum sealer machines available on the market. So, you need not worry about buying any specialized vacuum sealing system.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Even though it's pretty easy to use these bags, you will have to spend considerable time measuring and cutting the rolls. This does give you the ability to store any amount of food items according to your preference. But, based on the extent of your needs, it may take you a whole day when using these vacuum sealer bag rolls.
Last but not least, we have some pre-cut vacuum sealer bags from Wevac. The pint-sized plastic bags are perfect to portion out single servings of fish, meat, or even soups, especially while meal prepping. And, the thick plastic with an airtight seal protects the freshness of each meal. So, let's see the features.
HEAVY DUTY AND PUNCTURE PREVENTION - 6x10 pre-cut pint bags...
INCREASE STORAGE TIME FOR NUTRITION AND FLAVOR - 3-6 times...
Why Did We Like It?
There are many reasons to get these vacuum sealer bags, the first one being the commercial quality. Along with being thick, the embossed micro channels on the plastic bags help them to seal efficiently without developing any leaks. So, these bags can be easily used for sealing meat or even for sealing delicate items.
Additionally, these bags come with bone guards to prevent the plastic from tearing. Hence, you can use the bags for sealing steaks like T-bones and even ribs that have sharp edges.
Furthermore, cooking meat in sous vide baths is easier with these bags due to its watertight seal along with the ability to stand warm temperatures. Don't worry about the taste of your food, as Wevac bags are meant to keep the freshness intact, with the ability to prolong shelf life.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the things you need to remember while ordering these vacuum-sealed bags is a small size. As it's pint-sized, each bag can hold up to 473 ml of food. On top of that, you'll need to leave some space for sealing the bag. The good thing is that it's available in larger sizes.
Pros
Easy and convenient to use
Takes less time to assemble
Works well for sous vide recipes
Strong and durable plastic
Cons
For small sized portions only
Vacuum Sealer Bag Buying Guide
Are you still confused about which vacuum sealer bag would be best for your home? Don't worry, as we have gathered some important points to help you select the right product. We have also used these points while choosing the vacuum bags present in the list. So, do remember this before making the final purchase of any vacuum bag for storing food items.
1. Quality Of Material
The first thing to remember while getting any vacuum seal bag is to check the quality. As your aim is to store food items, the bags should be made of food-grade plastic. On top of that, it's a prerequisite to choose BPA-free material so that the plastic doesn't react with the food.
Another key point is to opt for heavy-duty material if you're looking forward to storing food for a long time. This is also true for keeping meat items in the freezer to avoid burns from the cold temperature. Moreover, a multi-layer material ensures that the food remains safe in high temperatures.
An easy way to know if the bags are made of quality material is to check the thickness. In vacuum seal bags, the value of thickness is defined by the unit of "mil." And, most brands will mention it on the packaging. Also note, that some vacuum sealer bags from brands like FoodSaver call for the use of special machines because of their thickness.
2. Size Of The Bags
A common mistake that people make while buying vacuum seal bags for food is to pick the wrong size. This is especially true for instances where a person goes for pre-cut bags. Apart from following the size of the bags according to their width and length, pay attention to the volume. This would give you an idea about the amount of food that might fit into the bag.
Moreover, if you want to store a lot of food at once, try to opt for a bag roll rather than individual vacuum seal bags. The plastic rolls typically have a length of 25 - 50 feet. But remember to leave a few inches for sealing the bag.
Furthermore, check the height of a roll to ensure its compatibility with any vacuum sealer machines you might have for sealing the bags.
Verdict
So, that's everything we had to tell you about getting the best vacuum sealer bag for storing your food. We hope that this guide will help you get the right product to keep your food fresh and nutritious for a longer time.
Among our recommendations, we will suggest the FoodSaver 11" x 16' vacuum seal roll to anyone looking for the best-quality plastic bags to seal their food items.
On the other hand, the FoodSaver pre-cut vacuum seal bags are best for storing small portions of food. However, it's a bit expensive to get these individual-sized bags.
Having said that, remember to read the proper procedure of vacuum storing any food item before attempting to keep it for long. And, don't forget to let us know about the vacuum sealer bag you like the most.
Every DIY enthusiast will encounter the unavoidable need to collect several types of UV glues at some point.
UV glues fall under the category of special adhesives and have a different function than regular superglue. The best UV glue is one that cures fast and hard while resisting scratches and stains. And since UV glues are often used to create beautiful resin designs, it would help if they were clear and tint-free after curing.
With an abundance of UV glue brands on the market, selecting the right one might be challenging. So, we compiled a list of the best products to help you discover the perfect adhesive for your project.
Without further ado, let us see some of the best UV glues available right now.
Best UV Glues
Here is the list of the 6 best UV glues that you can use to bond virtually any material together quickly and efficiently.
The first option we have for you is the UV resin glue by the brand ONGHSD. This product is available in four different bottle sizes, ranging from 25 grams to 200 grams per bottle. The glue comes in compact bottles complete with nozzles and can be squeezed directly on the surface of choice.
Resin Material - It's made of excellent harmless clear...
Widely Used - UV Resin can be used for small items...
Why Did We Like It?
Firstly, we decided to go through all the possible glues available on the market and shortlist them based on our needs. We were looking for an adhesive that was made of good quality epoxy resin or acrylic and had a short curing/drying process. And we were glad to stumble across this option which was a UV resin glue that turns completely transparent after drying.
One good thing about this light-curing glue is that it does not form bubbles and takes smooth, clear shapes upon curing. This makes it an excellent option for decorating, DIY jewelry, castings, and coatings for crafts. In case you need colored glue, you can also mix it with other solutions to get the color required.
Furthermore, the glue can cure quickly with UV light, like LED UV lamps, blacklight, and flashlights. However, make sure to store it in a dark place away from sunlight.
What Could've Been Better?
Even though this glue is quick-drying, there may be variations depending on the material to the glue is applied on. Wood and paper projects will dry and cure much sooner than other materials like plastic. Also, if the temperature is too low and the atmosphere is humid, the curing will take much longer.
Next, we have a transparent adhesive UV glue that can be used to bond, build, fix, repair, and fill most surfaces. Whether you need to fix the ends of phone chargers, jewelry, glasses, children's toys, or even shoes, this UV glue can do it all. Meaning, it is ideal for any household DIY project.
BOND ANY MATERIALS IN SECONDS - Our Bondic UV welding glue...
STAYS LIQUID UNTIL CURED - Unlike traditional glue, Bondic...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this option is 100% waterproof and heat resistant upon drying. This means that you can use it in various locations, no matter the climate and it could even hold well on surfaces that are prone to leaks or water seepage.
Apart from that, the glue dries clear and can be painted over or sanded down once it hardens. That’s why it can be used for carpentry and woodworking projects. Apart from wood, this UV glue cures on a number of surfaces like rubber, ceramic, metal, PVC, leather, and steel wiring.
To add to that, the glue pen has an incorporated LED UV light that has an easy press button. When the Bondic UV glue is exposed to UV light, it takes a few seconds to form a permanent bond and hardens. Using this UV light glue, you can conveniently pull off multiple home decor projects.
What Could've Been Better?
This product is a good option for everyday repairs and fixes, especially since it has its own UV light. Also, it is non-toxic, so you can use the glue pen often. However, if you happen to run out of glue, the replacement comes at a pretty steep price.
Next, we selected the 4336846259 model by the brand DecorRom. While looking for the perfect DIY glue, we found this UV adhesive that dries clear and has a simple, quick curing process. This solvent-free formula is also non-toxic and great at creating durable bonds.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this product contains ultraviolet resin, which cures to form a clear, glassy finish that is much more durable than other UV light glue. The formula contains epoxy resin which hardens to form a scratch-resistant surface, while also being resistant to stains and yellowing.
Once you apply the product from the nozzle, it self-levels and self-degasses, meaning the end result will be even and bubble-free. Understandably, it has a wide range of applications ranging from casting and coating to crafts, jewelry making, and resin paintings. You can also use glue on fabric and attach accessories safely to garments.
Now, the good part is, the UV adhesive requires no preparation and is ready to use from the tube. You can use a UV lamp to provide UV light to cure the glue, but sunshine does the job just fine too.
What Could've Been Better?
We thought this product delivered on most of the aspects we were seeking. And yet, we wished the brand released a variety of packaging sizes. The UV glue comes in only one size - a bottle that holds 60 grams of the product, but this quantity might not be enough for extensive resin-making projects.
The search for the best UV glues leads us to another brand QIAO QIAO DIY. This product is available in five sizes, ranging from a 25-gram to a 500-gram bottle. Requiring merely sunlight or a UV lamp to harden, this option is relatively easy to use for household repairs and DIY projects.
This UV resin can be cured under UV or direct sunlight...
Made of non-toxic and high-end materials,harmless and low...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, unlike other low-quality UV adhesives, this option is suited for gap-filling because of its short curing time. No one wants to wait around pressing two surfaces together just to apply a coat of paint or sand wood. Thus, this product is the perfect option for quick fixes and small repairs in fabric and carpentry projects.
Also, this product has an easy curing process and dries clear under UV light. While other products might turn yellow or not be able to repair plastic correctly, this UV glue emerges as a reliable option for DIY builds. Although it requires ultraviolet light to cure, the UV adhesive forms durable bonds under sunlight as well.
Furthermore, you can mix UV glue with other materials like dye and pigment to create jewelry and craft projects. The squeezy bottle combined with the pointed nozzle design makes it easy to pour and apply over surfaces precisely.
What Could've Been Better?
Going through the online reviews, we found some customers stating that their projects needed rework because the glue formed bubbles. Also, if you live in cold climates with little sunlight, the adhesive will take a long time to set. For best results, it is recommended that the mold is exposed to UV light for curing.
Pros
Non-toxic formula
Anti-yellowing feature
Cost-effective
Precise nozzle for better application
Cons
May form bubbles
Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 0.88oz | UV Light Included: No | Cure Time: 30 to 90 Seconds (6W to 9W 405nm UV LED Light & Direct Sunlight), 2 to 4 Minutes (UV Lamp), 20 to 40 Minutes (Cloudy Day) | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Resists Yellowing
We decided to wrap up our list with premium UV resin glue by Limino. This product does not require measuring, mixing, or wasting time with ratios. It is a ready-to-use UV resin formula that sets to form a hard surface and is available in 200-gram bottles.
CONVENIENT & EFFICIENT - Do not need to measure, mix the...
PREMIUM - Crystal Clear UV resin with self-leveling and...
Why Did We Like It?
Straight off the bat, this UV glue comes in a handy bottle with a spout that is ideal for poring just the right amount of glue. This is one of those UV glues that self-level and de-gasses, so you do not have to worry about bubbles appearing after UV curing.
Comparable to liquid plastic, even a thin layer of this glue is enough to form a durable bond between two dissimilar surfaces. This formula falls under the category of hard UV adhesives, and it easily bonds plastic together. Its fast-curing, anti-staining, anti-scratching properties make it a popular choice for creating resin art.
With this option, it is easy to make castings, jewelry, craft decorations, figurines, and resin paintings. To add to that, this formula does not show any signs of yellowing under visible light. And you can always mix it with mica powder, colorants, and glitter to get finishes in colors of your choice.
What Could've Been Better?
Incidentally, most UV glues with an acrylic base are ideal for small repairs or decorating small projects. This also means that the formula cannot be used to make larger resin objects. For example, making an ashtray using this UV glue is not recommended as any amount of curing time will not be enough.
Pros
Ready to use formula
Non-toxic
Resistant to scratches
Anti-yellowing feature
Cons
Not ideal for larger projects
Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 7.05oz | UV Light Included: No | Cure Time: 1 to 2 Minutes (UV Torch), 10 to 15 Minutes (Sunny Day), 30 to 60 Minutes (Cloudy Day) | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Withstands Temperature Up to 248°F, Resists Scratching, Staining, Yellowing
The Aventik Edison Bonding UV Glues Combo Tool Kit is a versatile and essential tool for DIY enthusiasts and professionals alike. It includes three types of UV glues, each designed for different materials and purposes, making it a one-stop solution for various bonding needs - whether you're fixing household items, creating jewelry, or working with electronics. The kit also features a 395nm UV pen to streamline the curing process and ensure a strong bond.
Combo tool kit of three best selected bonding function UV...
Fast Cure within 10 seconds under Aventik zoom-able 395nm UV...
Why Did We Like It?
The Aventik Edison UV Glues Kit sets itself apart with its wide range of applications, providing a solution for almost any material. Whether you're working with acrylics, PVC, glass, ceramics, metal, or PET, there's a specialized glue to suit your needs within the kit. The all-purpose UV glue is particularly helpful for tackling miscellaneous repairs. The kit's compatibility with many materials makes it an essential addition to any DIY toolbox.
The 395nm zoomable UV pen is another standout feature, turning a traditionally tedious waiting period for curing into a quick 10-second process. With a specialized UV-through lens and a high-quality LED head, the UV pen ensures fast and reliable results, offering convenience and efficiency.
What Could've Been Better?
While the Aventik Edison UV Glues Combo Tool Kit excels in many aspects, one slight drawback is the sticky residue it may leave, particularly if a thicker layer of glue is applied. Being mindful of the application amount and taking the time to clean up any excess glue will help to alleviate this issue.
Now that you have had the chance to see the kind of brands out there, it might be time to narrow down to one option. Here are a few factors you can consider before buying any new UV glue-
1. Type Of UV Glue
A. Acrylic UV Glue
Acrylic UV glues are known for their adhesion to glass, metal, and various plastic elements. The good thing is, acrylic UV glues do not shrink in size even if they are exposed to extreme temperatures or chemicals.
Furthermore, they are quick to dry and seal. However, there is a chance of the glue changing color and developing a yellowish tinge over time.
B. Epoxy Resin UV Glue
This type of UV adhesive forms some of the strongest bonds possible. It can bond to most surfaces, including wood, plastic, metal, and even glass. Epoxy resins are generally fast curing when exposed to UV light and are perfect for filling cracks in surfaces.
Upon use, you will find that epoxy UV glues emit a strong odor while curing, which is relatively harmless. This glue is often resistant to heat, and water but it is known to shrink slightly upon curing.
2. Durability
Over time, the glue can undergo various changes that diminish the appearance and integrity of the adhesion. You want to make sure to select an adhesive that does not wither over time. The best way to better understand the product is by checking customer reviews regarding durability.
3. Resistance To External Factors
Ideally, you'd want a glue that works just as well in cold climates as it does in warm ones. When it comes to epoxy UV glues, temperature, and humidity might affect the curing time if the UV light is incorrectly applied. Generally, this issue does not arise in acrylic glues since it is not sensitive to temperature.
UV Glues FAQs
What are the advantages of using UV glues?
UV glues offer several benefits, such as rapid curing time, strong bonds, no solvents, and precision application. UV glues can harden within seconds, depending on the wavelength and intensity of the UV light, and create durable and stable bonds that resist heat, chemicals, and moisture.
They are also solvent-free, making them an environmentally friendly option, and allow for a selective application and precise control over the bonding process.
Are there any limitations to using UV glues?
There are some limitations to using UV glues, such as the inability to cure through opaque or UV-absorbing materials, limited bond strength on certain plastics (e.g., polyethylene and polypropylene), and a higher initial cost compared to traditional adhesives. Despite these limitations, UV glues are extremely versatile and effective in many applications.
Are there any safety precautions to follow while using UV glues?
When using UV glues, adhere to safety guidelines such as wearing protective gear (gloves and safety glasses), avoiding direct skin and eye contact with the glue, working in a well-ventilated area, following the manufacturer’s instructions for UV light exposure and proper curing times, and not looking directly at the UV light source.
Can UV glues be used outdoors?
Yes, some UV glues are formulated to be resistant to sunlight and weather conditions, making them suitable for outdoor applications. Check the manufacturer’s specifications before using a UV glue outdoors.
How do I apply UV glue?
To apply UV glue, first clean and dry the surfaces to be bonded. Then, apply a thin layer of UV glue to one surface, align and press the surfaces together, and expose the glue to a UV light source (wavelength and intensity should follow manufacturer’s guidelines) until it cures.
How can I remove cured UV glue?
Fully cured UV glue can be difficult to remove. Some methods include gently scraping or using a razor blade to remove the glue, applying heat to soften the adhesive and then scraping it off, or using solvents or commercial adhesive removers with caution.
What is the shelf life of UV glues?
The shelf life of UV glues varies depending on the formulation and storage, typically lasting between 6 months and 2 years when stored in a cool, dark, and dry place. Always check the manufacturer’s guidelines for specific shelf life and storage instructions.
Conclusion
Here we conclude our list and guide for the best UV glue options available. Even though all the options presented are great choices in their own right, we did have a couple of favorite products.
The UV resin glue by ONGHSD was by far the most complete option with quick-drying abilities and plenty of DIY uses. Another product that we liked was the Bondic UV glue which came with a complete kit, including a small UV light.
We hope this guide assists you in figuring out the best UV glue for your home and DIY needs. Until next time, bye!
Cleaning upholstery fabric is quite a task, and calling up for professional services means spending a lot of money. But there is a way out.
Steam cleaners can be bought and kept in the house, and they will help you maintain fabrics, floors, and other surfaces. Now people have different needs, and while some might want to clean large expanses of fabric, others might want to spot clean parts of the surface.
Remember that the best upholstery steam cleaner will be able to take care of all your needs without being too bulky. It should help in deep cleaning as well as serve any extra purposes that you might have in mind.
In the next section, we will discuss the top 11 products and their benefits. We will then talk about the pros and cons in detail so that you can make an informed choice.
If you are looking for a versatile upholstery steam cleaner, then the McCulloch MC1275 will work perfectly well. It offers a host of benefits and comes with a large tank. You will be able to clean all areas of the house easily without having to hire professional services.
18 VERSATILE ACCESSORIES — Equipped for steam cleaning...
CHEMICAL-FREE CLEANING — Naturally deep clean without the...
Why Did We Like It?
A good upholstery cleaner should be able to clean all kinds of hard surfaces, and this one will fit the bill.
It can completely clean the grime, dirt, and greases off wood flooring, ceramic tile, grout, granite, sealed surfaces, grills, laminate, autos, and more. This option will offer you chemical-free performance, and you will not need harsh chemicals to see results. Instead of that, pressurized steam is used to clean the areas.
Moving on, you will get the benefits of a 48-ounce tank that can heat water within 8 minutes. Then you can constantly clean with steam for 45 minutes at a go. The steam cleaner also has a lockable steam option, and that will ensure a steady flow.
That’s not all, as you will be receiving 18 different accessories. These include a scrub pad, floor mop pads, nylon brushes, window squeegee, and a brass brush, to name a few.
What Could've Been Better?
This portable steam cleaner works very well, and you will not face any difficulties with the functioning. However, there is no extra space provided to keep the cords, and they will be hanging out when stored. While this does not affect productivity, you will have to be a little careful while storing it.
Up next is an upholstery steam cleaner that will clean stains in a jiffy. The Bissell 3624 is known for its superior suction ability, and it is perfect for houses with kids and pets. All the stains and marks that they leave behind can be cleaned easily with this option.
Every Bissell purchase helps save pets. Bissell proudly...
Our most powerful portable spot and stain cleaner for...
Why Did We Like It?
This is a portable carpet cleaner that can be easily taken around without any issues. It weighs 13 lbs and comes with a 20 feet cord that will help you reach all the corners easily.
Plus, it is known for its superior cleaning action, and it can scrub any piece of fabric. It is an essential requirement for carpet cleaning, and will ensure professional results. Using this you can get rid of pet stains from carpets, rugs, upholstery, stairs, automobile interiors, and many other surfaces.
Next, this carpet cleaner can also be used for deep cleaning and will take out embedded grime and dirt. There is a 3-inch tough stain tool for spot cleaning and a 6-inch stair tool for wider areas. The brand also provides a tough stain removal trial pack, which you can use to clean and protect surfaces.
Moreover, the Bissell pet foundation is on a mission to save homeless pets, and every purchase made by you will help save pets.
What Could've Been Better?
When we received the package, we found that the hose had not been packed well and hence, it had cracked. Therefore, we were a little worried and called customer care immediately. They were of great help and sent us a replacement product within a few days.
One of our top recommendations for portable steam cleaners is the Dupray DUP020WNA. It will ensure chemical-free cleaning with the help of steam. You can use it for all types of hard floors, and the continuous steam will do a wonderful job.
Versatile -Piece Kit: Includes specialized tools for...
Why Did We Like It?
Steam cleaners are supposed to be easy to use and should be able to clean surfaces without using harsh chemicals. This machine meets all the requirements and is equipped with a kit with 17 pieces. You will get a window tool, floor tool, nylon and brass brushes, extension tubes, lance, and microfiber pads, to name a few.
Adding on, you will get a large tank, and it will enable you to use the steam cleaner for 50 minutes at a stretch. A long power cord of 5 meters will allow you to move around easily without having to worry about electric plug points.
Also, steam cleaners degrease and clean floors, but this option goes the extra way and deodorizes floors as well. You can use the Dupray neat steam cleaner with any cloth or towel, and there is no need to purchase expensive pads separately.
What Could've Been Better?
You should know that this steam cleaner will take time to fill up, and that’s why you should be prepared to give it at least 20 minutes. Some might find it time-consuming, but you would not need to deep clean every day. Find time to work on the weekends, and this should not be an issue at all.
A very good option when it comes to handheld steam cleaners is the Bissell 39N7V. It is small in size, and one can easily carry it to different areas of the room and the house. Eliminate the usage of all kinds of hard chemicals and replace them with this.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, we loved the color-coded brushes that come with the pack. These brushes have separate uses and are needed for different kinds of messes. The varied colors will help you identify the one that is needed easily.
Plus, you will get a grout tool, a flat scraper tool, and an angle concentrator tool in the pack. The grout tool will help clean grout in the bathroom and any tiled areas.
On the other hand, the flat scraper tool can be used to clear dirt, grease, and grime from stovetops, microwaves, and ovens. The angle concentrator will allow steam to flow in and clean hard-to-reach areas.
Moreover, steam cleaners are supposed to be able to clean up germs and bacteria, and this option will do a great job at it. It uses a powerful high-pressure mechanism that will not only clean but sanitize surfaces and will eliminate 99.9% of germs and bacteria.
What Could've Been Better?
The one thing that we noticed here is that you cannot work from far when you are using this steam cleaner. For the perfect steam cleaning, you will be required to hold the steam jet nozzle close to the surface, and then you can work with it. This way, you will not face any problems.
If you are looking for more options when it comes to portable steam cleaners, then the Hoover FH11300PC is a brilliant choice. It will help in cleaning up conveniently, and you can scrub, spray and remove stains easily. We were very happy with the performance and ease of usage offered.
PORTABLE CARPET CLEANER MACHINE: Featuring a lightweight...
CONVENIENT DEEP CLEAN: This spot and upholstery cleaner...
Why Did We Like It?
A major problem with upholstery steam cleaners is that they tend to get dirty, and molds can start growing inside. However, this product is equipped with self-cleaning technology, and it is extremely beneficial. It will flush the hose every time you use it, and that will immediately remove the bacteria and dirt.
Next, this upright upholstery cleaner is equipped with dual tank technology, and you will be able to keep the clean and dirty water separately. In the end, just empty the dirty water, and the machine will be clean. It can store 36 ounces of dirty water at one time.
Furthermore, you can use this upholstery cleaning machine for deep cleaning mess made by pets and kids. It is perfect for everyday usage, and one can reach every place with it. Take care of corners and hard-to-reach places with the long hose that this comes with.
What Could've Been Better?
While this new upholstery steam cleaner can clean spots and fabric on furniture easily, it is not suitable for cleaning large spaces in a short amount of time. It is small in size and is known to be a portable cleaning option. But if you want to use it in large spaces, then the process can be time-consuming.
Now that we have reached the middle of this list, it is time to introduce the AutoRight C900054.M steam cleaner. It will ensure that your car is always clean, and this option is used by a number of car repair and servicing shops.
CAR STEAM CLEANER: Uses pressurized, 212°F high-temperature...
VERSATILE STEAM MACHINE: Clean your vehicle’s leather,...
Why Did We Like It?
A good quality upholstery steam cleaner should be able to run long enough for you to clean all the parts of the house well. This option comes with a 40-ounce boiler tank, and it can provide 45 minutes of continuous cleaning.
Plus, there is a built-in handle that can be used to move the device around whenever needed. It weighs 9.75 pounds, and you can carry it around easily in your house. You can also use it for your cars, and they will work on leather, carpets, car interiors, upholstery, and dashboards.
Moving on, you will be getting 11 accessories in the kit, and that should serve all your purposes. You will also be able to take it across surfaces, and it will clean off all kinds of stains left by pets and humans. No chemicals need to be used, and hence, you do not have to worry about the color fading off.
What Could've Been Better?
The one thing we did not like about this product is that it did not come with a bag to keep the tools in. Hence, there is a chance of misplacing them, and we bought a separate bag to keep the tools in. The brand could take a look into this and provide an additional pouch along with it.
Do you have to take care of tough spots and stains? Then the Bissell 2837 is going to help you out with it. It is equipped with advanced technology, and it will work its way through stains and marks. We are very happy to see that it runs on battery.
Every Purchase Saves Pets. BISSELL proudly supports BISSELL...
Rotating DirtLifter PowerBrush. Our only portable carpet...
Why Did We Like It?
Pet accidents can happen at any time, and good upholstery steam cleaners should be able to take care of it. We used to get very worried when the mess was made on upholstered furniture. But this option uses a rotating DirtLifter PowerBrush, which works like a charm on the sofas. It loosens and helps clear off pet stains while keeping the fabric from fading.
Next, most upholstery cleaning machines need a power outlet to connect, but this one does not need that. It offers the convenience of a cordless option where you can use the lithium-ion battery to run the machine.
That’s not all, as you will be getting a ready-to-use PRO OXY spot and stain formula that acts as a cleaning agent. You can use both of them without mixing any water, and the process involves no hassle at all.
What Could've Been Better?
The one thing that you need to keep in mind regarding this upholstery cleaner is that it will only run for 20 minutes while it takes a few hours to charge. Now that means if you need to cover large areas, you will have to charge it in between and then continue using. That would take a lot of time.
There is no need to hire a professional cleaning service when you have got the LIGHT 'N' EASY Steam Mop 7688ANW in the house. This is one of the upholstery steam cleaners that stand out because of the ease of usage offered. It works best for houses with infants and pets.
On-demand HI, MED and LOW steam settings fit for various...
Detaches into a separate handheld steam cleaner for...
Why Did We Like It?
Garment steam cleaners are essential if you need to wear wrinkle-free outfits every day. This option is very similar and will give you the opportunity to remove wrinkles from clothes, as well as it will give you the benefits of a natural upholstery cleaner. Many customers also use it for cleaning bathrooms and kitchens.
Moving on, you can easily shift among high, medium, and low settings and the steam will flow accordingly. It can be used on various surfaces like vinyl, laminate, marble, grout, tile, stone, sealed wooden floors, as well as on fabric. You can slant and use it on any surface, or you can remove the handle and use it for garments.
Besides, the steam cleaner uses steam at 212 degrees Fahrenheit to remove sticky substances and stains. It will easily dissolve the dirt and grease and then suck it in. You can use it with tap water and distilled water, and it will work well to clean most home essentials.
What Could've Been Better?
We would have liked it better if the upholstery steam cleaner manual was a little more detailed. This one does not contain enough information, and you might face some challenges while using the manual. We will recommend calling up customer service and asking them for help.
Another very efficient and portable steam cleaner in the market is the Hoover BH12010. You can move it around and clean messes without having the device attached to a cord. We were able to carry it on vacations where our pet accompanied us. It can be stored easily and will not take up to much space.
ONE BATTERY. CLEANS ANYWHERE: Enjoy automatic cleaning and...
TOOLS FOR EVERY MESS: This spot and upholstery cleaner...
Why Did We Like It?
Good steam cleaners ensure convenience and power at the same time, and this option provides one with both. You can literally grab it and go, thanks to the less weight. It will only weigh 7 pounds and you can take it in your car easily.
Plus, the compact size makes it easy to store, and you can keep it in narrow storage spaces. That is not all, as the item has dual tanks that keep the freshwater solution separate from the dirty water. You can easily empty it without much hassle and then fill the other tank with a cleaning solution.
Also, you will get a scrubbing tool and a removable hose along with the pack. These will help in cleaning areas better. A trial solution will be provided so that you can immediately start working.
What Could've Been Better?
While you will easily be able to work on fabric and upholstered furniture, they have to be near you. The hose that is provided along with it is not very long, and you cannot reach far places. Keep this in mind before purchasing, and you should not face issues.
There are steam cleaners meant for cleaning as well as sanitizing a place, and the COSTWAY Steam Cleaner will work out for both. It features an ergonomic design that will ensure easy portability. We have been using it for multiple kinds of surfaces, and it has been working out great.
[Efficient & Deep Clean]Our Steam Cleaner uses up to 226 °F...
[Large Water Capacity]The Steam Cleaner includes a 1.5L...
Why Did We Like It?
Steam cleaners come with some accessories, and this one is equipped with 19 of them. We had tools to clean every kind of surface, be it tiles, carpets, metal, mirrors, or glasses. There is no need to use harsh chemicals as the device will take care of it all. You can work to eliminate 99.9% of pathogens, bacteria, molds, viruses, and bedbugs.
Next, the steam tank is large, and you will get a capacity of 1.5 liters. That will ensure that you can work for 45 minutes at a stretch. The steam reaches a temperature of 226.4 degrees Fahrenheit, and that would mean that the grease and dirt would dissolve completely.
You will also be happy to see that there is a pair of wheels that is attached to the body. A comfortable handle is provided so that you can drive it around easily. There is no need to lift it because the wheels will allow easy movement.
What Could've Been Better?
While the product worked out well for us, we were not very satisfied with the customer service. We wanted some more information about using the tools provided. But nobody picked our call when we reached out to customer care, and we ultimately took the help of Youtube videos.
Our final suggestion is the Kiato Handheld Steam Cleaner, which is known for its lightweight design and large tank capacity. This product has multiple uses, and you will be able to clean floors and fabric with it easily. We are also happy with the sufficient water tank that is provided.
Handheld steam cleaners need to be lightweight and easy to carry. You should be able to move one around, and this option will allow you to do just that. Once you have a target area set, you can spray continuously. The dirt will dissolve and then be sucked in by the machine.
Besides, the water tank capacity is 450 ml with a load capacity of 250 ml. So, you will not have to refill often, and you can concentrate on cleaning the place. Also, there is a power cord of 16.4 feet that is attached to the steam cleaner. You can work with it from a distance for 8 minutes constantly.
Moreover, you will be getting a 10-piece accessory set, which includes a nozzle with brush, fabric steamer tool, and wipers, to name a few. You will be able to clean countertops, kitchen ink, toilets, floors, pet mattresses, and sofas.
What Could've Been Better?
If you are trying to get rid of molds and mildew, then you will be required to scrub a lot. Although the steam will make it easier to get the molds off, you will have to use the scrubbing tool provided and put in some amount of effort.
Pros
Lightweight and portable
Long cord of 16.4 feet
Dissolves dirt easily
10-piece accessory set included
Cons
Molds will require scrubbing
Upholstery Steam Cleaners Buying Guide
Now that you know about the top steam cleaners on the market, it will be easier to select one for your house. But you must have realized that different options serve various purposes, and keeping your needs in mind is very important. To provide you with an example, the best upholstery steam cleaner may not work well for hard floors.
Let us make this choice easier by telling you about the factors that you need to keep in mind. Read on carefully to know all about them.
Purpose
There are some upholstery cleaners that work well for hard floors, and you can use them on granite, tiles, grout, and other concrete surfaces. However, they may not work well for fabric or rugs. You will find other options, which will work better for rugs and fabrics.
Some products may work better for dirty spots and for reaching narrow areas, while others may work wonders for larger areas. So, make a note of the needs that you have and purchase accordingly.
Tools And Accessories
You will be getting a set of tools and accessories with upholstery vapor steam cleaners, and you should check if the needed tools are provided. If pet mess needs to be cleared from upholstered furniture, then you will need a good quality scrubber and a squeegee.
Also, if you have to reach difficult corners, there are nozzles for that. Check the options well, and you should have a fulfilling experience.
Portability
A portable cleaner is the need of the day, and the one you purchase should be movable. There are handheld steam cleaners that can be easily moved by hand. Other heavier options may come with wheels for easy movement.
If you have stairs in the house, then a lighter one will be a good choice. But if you have a large surface area to clean, like a hall or a big one-floor house, you can use a product with wheels.
Verdict
The best upholstery steam cleaner should last for a long time, and you should not have to spend too much time and money on maintenance. We will always suggest purchasing these instead of artificial and harmful chemicals. There are other choices on the market too that you can look at. You can also use vacuum cleaners for this purpose.
Before we wrap up, let us take you through our favorite steam cleaners once more. The McCulloch MC1275 is a versatile option that can be used on large expanses. On the other hand, the Bissell 3624 is perfect for spot cleaning. And the Dupray DUP020WNA offers a very long hose to reach narrow spaces.
Let us know about your favorite options in the comment section below. And do not hesitate to call up customer care if you have any queries regarding any of the products.
It's already Christmas time, and you have probably filled your home with jolly and festive decorations. Starting the tone for the holidays in your home is really important if you want you and your family and friends to feel great. Christmas decorations have a huge impact on the way we feel, so don't miss decorating your home this year. Even small details make a big difference, so make sure you add something festive in every room in the house. I bet that most of you have skipped the bathroom and didn't decorate it in the jolly mood. Honestly, the bathroom can look pretty amazing for this lovely holiday, so check out the Unexpected Christmas Bathroom Decoration That Will Catch Your Eye. You will get hooked on them and will definitely want to decorate even this room with some Christmas decorations. There are plenty of ways to do it, so find your favorite one!
This soap dispenser with a Christmas tree inside of it is totally adorable and it's not going to leave you indifferent for sure. You will want to have it in the bathroom, and the good news is that you can make it on your own and you have the full tutorial on the link below.
Adding some garland, some Christmas ornaments, and some candles here and there will set the tone immediately. Your guests will be amazed at your awesome and careful decorations.
The Christmas berries are also a great addition to your bathroom, so if you have some think about adding them in some unexpected places which will bring joy to the room.
How do you see these rather simple but insanely effective Christmas Bathroom Decorations? We would love your thoughts and decor ideas in the comment section below!
We are all excited when it comes to choosing decorative pieces for our homes because they tend to make our living spaces more stylish, cozy and contemporary. Every empty wall gets a completely different dimension when filled with some majestic art. We seem to add those artworks in every single room except the bathroom. The bathroom is the last room in the house that we consider for wall decor, and this is completely wrong. The walls in the most intimate place in the house are waiting for displaying some amazing art, so get inspired from the photos below to add those lovely frame in the bathroom. Check out the Unexpected Bathroom Artwork That Will Take You Aback and see how people have incorporate it in the most controversial room in the home. Although there are lots of question about keeping those artistic pieces undamaged from the moisture and the steam there are some tips that you should follow to keep them in their original shape.
The biggest problem that we are facing in the bathroom is humidity and it can be a serious danger to your artwork. Keep the expensive pieces out of this room and go for the inexpensive ones. Also, make sure you keep windows and doors open whenever possible in order to let the room breathe.
If you are about to choose the frames for the artwork that you are going to hang in the bathroom we suggest you to go for wood because it's the material that can breathe and it's the most suitable one for this room in the house.
Are you in the mood for creating a gallery wall in the bathroom? Fill one wall with artistic pieces of different shapes and sizes to get a playful and vibrant look. You can also add empty frames too and they will complement the gallery wall in a wonderful fashion.
Black and white artwork will give your bathroom a feel of elegance and drama, so when you are in doubt what kind of art you should display here, this is one safe alternative that always works.
With the onset of winter, we welcome the misty mornings and chilly evenings, but it comes with its own set of woes. And, hot water is the bare necessity during this time of the year.
What is the breakthrough invention for home appliances? Without a blink, it’s none other than the most hardworking device in every home - a water heater. It was before the invention of this heating system that we used the open fire or the stove for making hot water. This was indeed a time-consuming affair back then, but water heaters are simple, safe, and convenient to use today.
At present, you'll find a wide variety of water heating systems in the market, with apparent distinctive features. This is how far, innovation has come to help make our daily lives simpler.
However, you’ll face quite a few challenges as you look for the right water-heating appliance for your home. We’ve compiled the best types of water heaters in the following guide to help you make a fully-informed decision!
Types of Water Heaters
Tankless Water Heater
The “tankless” water heater comes with a modern technology feature that gives your home an endless amount of hot water.
How does the tankless water heater function?
As the name suggests, the “Tankless” water heater comes without any tank. It has coils that get super-heated when filled with water. This helps to heat the water in an instant, no wonder it’s called the on-demand water heater. If you have a large family, then this product will be perfect for water heating purposes. It can heat a large amount of water quite efficiently.
Illustration by Doug Adams
The “Tankless” water heater is available in different sizes. So, you should be careful about selecting the appropriate size as per the needs of your family. For instance, if you choose a small water heater and the demand for it is huge, then you can expect to get cold or lukewarm water.
With the smaller water heater, you have the option to use natural gas to power the heater. But, if you’re opting for the larger size, you’ll need a gas line with a large quantity of gas to help the water heater function right.
However, for the larger models which run on electricity, you’ll need to increase the electrical capacity of your home. This can get expensive, mainly if the water heater is used frequently.
What type of maintenance is required?
Even your “Tankless” water heater will require some basic maintenance. You should get it cleaned at least once a year to avoid corrosion by removing the mineral scale deposits. You might find the parts of this heater to be pretty small which makes it more challenging to clean. If you can maintain this heater correctly, it will last you anywhere between 8 to 10 years.
What are the positive aspects of this water heater when compared to the other models?
If you’re looking to reduce your energy consumption, we advise you to get the “Tankless” water heater. The main reason people usually opt for this “tankless” model, is due to its on-demand feature, which gives you warm water in a flash when you need it.
And, if you get one of the large “Tankless” models for your home, you have the privilege of getting hot water throughout the day.
What are the negative aspects of the Tankless Water Heater?
The down payment for this model is much higher than the other conventional-style water heaters. Few of these models also require larger electricity capacity and gas lines that will be an additional cost for the entire renovation.
Traditional Storage Tank Water Heater
In most homes, you’ll find this conventional-style water heater, that makes you quite familiar with the model we’re about to describe. However, let’s look at the details of this product!
How does the conventional storage-tank water heater function?
In this style of water heater, you’ll get the storage tank feature, for storing water that needs to be heated. This indicates that the size of the water tank helps to determine the quantity of hot water available for you at once. The tanks come with proper insulation for keeping the water warm after you have turned on the heater.
The heater comes with a two-valve feature; one is for controlling the temperature while the other is for pressure control. The pressure control valve opens only when it needs to release heat and for moderating the temperature level after the water records 120 degrees Fahrenheit. And, the valve for pressure control opens for reducing the pressure after it reaches around 150 Psi.
This is the most popular type of water heater that is available in almost every household. But, it does have limitations for the amount of water that it can hold. You might face some challenges if you’re purchasing a small tank for a household that generally requires a large quantity of water. For instance, you’ll have to wait for another new tank to be heated each time you run out of hot water.
What kind of maintenance is required for the traditional storage-tank water heater?
This water heater tends to work continuously for storing water, which makes it essential for you to clean the tank quite often. It will not just prevent corrosion but also enhance the lifespan of the water heater. You need to ensure that the tank is cleaned at least twice a year to remove the mineral scale deposits and other sediments.
If you don’t focus on the maintenance aspects, then the water heater will not last for an extended period. However, the Traditional Storage Water Tank Heater usually comes with a lifespan of around 10 to 12 years.
What are the advantages of this type of water heater?
This traditional Storage Tank Water Heater is one of the most affordable styles that you can find along with a simple installation process.
What are the drawbacks to purchasing a Traditional Storage Tank Water Heater?
This model of water heater, it has a fixed amount of water that it can store. For instance, a tank with a 50-gallon water capacity will offer you the same quantity of constant water flow until the tank is empty. After you run out of hot water, it may take around an hour or more to refill the tank and to heat another 40 gallons of water.
Condensing Water Heater
This water heater has a smart solution, which makes it energy efficient. It utilizes the extra gas fumes in your home by capturing it for heating the water.
How does the Condensing Water Heater function?
This is also known as the condensing boiler. If you're using natural gas as a primary source of energy at home, then the Condensing Water Heater is one of the best options available. This water heater is energy efficient as it can extract energy out of the flue gas and then stores this heat for pre-heating the water which enters the boiler.
It has a tank just like other traditional storage-tank water heaters. But, it captures the hot exhaust gas that is generally expelled from the house through the flue. These gases are then blown from the coil which is placed at the base of the heater. It is located at the bottom, to heat the incoming cold water. This design of the water heater is suitable for a household that requires around 55 gallons of hot water or more.
This Condensing Water Heater requires quite a less amount of energy when compared to other styles of water heaters. But, you should purchase the appropriate size with a large capacity according to the needs of your family.
What are the types of maintenance required for this style of water heater?
This model also comes with a tank, just like the other water heaters. So, you should ensure that you get the tank cleaned at least once a year. And, the same goes for the gas import valves that should be maintained well.
What are the advantages of using this kind of water heater?
For households that use natural gas, this style of water heater is indeed the most energy-efficient option. You’ll get plenty of hot water as this model comes with a big tank, so there is no fear of the water running out anytime soon.
What are the disadvantages of this style of water heater?
You’ll not find a small-size tank for this model, but it works perfectly fine for families that require a quantity of 55 gallons of water or more. However, this style of water heater is not a great alternative when compared to the Conventional Style Storage Tank Water Heater. Especially for homes that don’t require natural gas for other purposes.
Heat Pump Water Heaters
Heat Pump Water Heaters are also known as Hybrid Electric Water Heaters. You’ll not be spending much money on your electricity bills since it doesn’t generate heat directly leading to lower consumption of power.
How does the Heat Pump Water Heater function?
This style of water heater comes with a unique mechanism. It captures heat from either the ground or air, and then gradually transfers the heat to the water. This shows that the electricity is in use only when the heat moves from the air or ground to the water tank. It's unlike the other models, where the machine depends entirely on electricity to operate.
It consumes around 60% less energy when compared to the conventional style of a water heater. However, the heat pump is placed on top of the water heater so you'll need around 8 feet of open space from the floor to your ceiling.
What kind of maintenance is involved in this water heater?
Just like the traditional storage tank water heaters, this model also comes with a tank, which means that it should be cleaned regularly. And, when you get the general inspection and cleaning done at least twice a year, it helps the water heater to function efficiently.
What are the positive aspects behind the usage of hybrid/pump water heaters?
This model of water heater is extremely energy efficient, which means you can expect a return on investment with lower utility bills.
What are the pitfalls of this type of water heater?
TheHybrid Electric Water Heater doesn’t function efficiently in places with extremely low temperatures. This is because it depends mainly on drawing heat from the air or ground that is around it. We don’t advise you to place this heater in your basement or in places where it’s freezing throughout the year. Finally, this model of water heater is one of the most expensive pieces available.
Solar Powered Water Heater
A water heater that is solar-powered draws its energy from the sun. If you’re considering adding solar panels, or you already have them installed at home then this style will be the absolute best option for you.
How does the Solar Powered Water Heater function?
If you’re looking for a highly energy-efficient model of water heater, the Solar Powered Water Heater will be suitable for you amongst all the other styles. It relies on solar panels for energy sources which are usually mounted on the roof.
The solar energy trapped in the cells of the solar panels is slowly transferred to the closed-loop system, which contains the heat-conductive material (antifreeze-like fluid). This antifreeze-like fluid then runs to heat the water in your tank.
The Solar Powered Water Heater works great for people who are living in warm, sunny climates, as it can save a ton of money on electricity bills. Overall, you’ll also require to have an alternative energy source, such as electricity or natural gas, to operate the water heater during the cold and rainy season.
What kind of maintenance is required?
This system also comes with a tank, that should be cleaned at least twice a year to remove the mineral deposits and for preventing corrosion. You also need to maintain the solar panels, which might require an annual professional inspection.
What are the benefits of using a Solar Powered Water Heater?
It is an environmentally friendly water heater as you’ll be reducing the hot water carbon footprint. This is an incredibly energy-efficient style of water heater that turns around 80% of the radiation into heat energy. And, by installing the solar-powered heater, you can save money on electricity bills every month. You can get an unlimited amount of hot water during the sunny days.
In some countries, the government also gives financial incentives if you start using solar-powered water heater which includes- federal and state tax credits, along with utility rebates.
What are the drawbacks to this style of water heater?
The entire set that comes along with this water heater can get pretty expensive in some regions. It might take around 20 to 30 years or more to yield a good return on your investment.
It is not suitable for all weather conditions as you need to depend on the sun to heat the water. However, when you have to get an alternative energy source, it just adds to the overall budget. Also, the annual maintenance of the various parts of the solar water heater can be a hassle.
Combined Space and Water Heating System
The Combined Space and Water Heating are appropriate for homes with lower heating requirements. This is due to lowered air leakage, more insulation, and efficient use of the space. With these systems, you need a single heating unit for your domestic water heating and space; this helps to save a significant amount of energy.
What is a Combined Space and Water Heating System?
It is also known as the “combi” system, which can easily replace the existing water heater and the forced-air furnace. This system consists of an optimized hydronic air handler and a high-efficiency boiler or water heater. The air handlers have been designed with large coils that help with heat transfer for an efficient method of space heating.
The fan coil is generally installed with ductwork, while the small pump helps to circulate water from your water heater along with the fan coil. If you want floor or radiant heating, you can distribute the hot water through the in-floor piping.
When you’re purchasing the water heater, you should be careful about the size to ensure that it can serve combined heating purposes. The functions of this system are different when it’s used for heating water in addition to space heating. Similarly, the performance rating of the space heater should not be used to measure its performance as a water heater.
How to maintain this heating system?
With preventive maintenance of the entire heating system, there are several benefits such as- longer equipment life, fewer repairs, lower energy bills, few chances of catastrophic breakdown, and safer equipment operation. You should hire a professional at least twice a year for general inspection and cleaning purposes.
What are the benefits of using a Combined Space and Water Heating System?
The “combi” system has the same gas consumption level when compared with separate high-efficiency water heaters and natural gas furnaces. It saves a good amount of energy and money by not having to purchase separate space and water heating devices. Moreover, this system eliminates spillage issues from the natural draft appliance with the use of a direct or powered combustion vent.
What are the negative aspects of this space-water heating system?
The initial investment for this product can get relatively expensive. And the installation process is quite challenging, as many installers are not familiar with this system. Therefore, we cannot compare this heating system with the standard installation methods for power vents or condensing furnace water heaters.
Combined Space and Water Heating System with a Hydronic Boiler
This combination space-water heating device has a hydronic boiler instead of a water heater. It’s a compact, energy-efficient option for a household that is aiming to save energy and reduce the number of necessary appliances. These systems come in different models for some, you can heat your space and water simultaneously, while for others heating space and water can be done one at a time.
What is a Combined Space-Water Heating System with a Hydronic Boiler?
This type of water heating device is also known as the segregated heating system or combi-boiler. It uses a hydronic boiler, from which the heat is generally transferred to the water through a heat exchanger. In some countries, there are rules which state the use of double-wall heat exchangers for such heating applications. It helps to avoid the contamination of potable water from your boiler heating loops.
You can find new combination boiler designs which have full-energy saving power along with a tankless feature. This helps to ensure that there isn’t any unnecessary water heating when you’re not around.
Moreover, it also comes with a flow control valve which ensures a constant temperature level irrespective of your incoming water temperature. You can, therefore, enjoy a good quantity of hot water flow with accurate water stability.
What maintenance is required for this heating system?
Again, you have to get annual cleaning and general inspection done for the boiler to work efficiently. The auxiliary pump connections and flow control valve should be maintained correctly to prevent it from mineral deposits and corrosion.
What are the benefits?
The life span for this heating system is around 10 to 15 years, depending on the maintenance and usage. It has a compact design with built-in parts for outdoor reset control, auxiliary pump connections, and recirculation capability. Therefore, it minimizes the number of products that you need to purchase separately for each function.
When you have this heating, the compact size also helps to free up the loft or roof space that is otherwise used for cold water storage in traditional heaters. This is because the combi-boilers get their water supply directly from the mains without the use of any tank. It’s a highly efficient heating system, and you’ll have around 90% savings from your monthly electricity bills.
Are there any negative aspects to this style?
It has a complicated installation procedure as it requires various electronic devices for its functions. You should ensure that a professional does the setup correctly because the repairing cost of a boiler is quite expensive.
This heating system might not be suitable for larger households with a high demand for hot water. As these boilers directly get their water supply from the mains, and it doesn’t have any backup of a water tank. Therefore, it requires more time to heat the water, and big families should instead opt for the traditional boiler that comes along with a water tank.
Features to Consider When Purchasing a Water Heater
Warranty
The general coverage for water heaters varies as per the cost and duration. But, the life span usually ranges from three to twelve years. You might have to pay a bit more if you want a longer-warranty period. However, we advise you to pay that extra amount to get a load off your shoulder without having to surprise yourself with more repair costs in the future.
You might also get a few models of water heaters that come with 13-15 years of warranty. And, they tend to have larger burners or other elements which can speed up the heating process. Also, it might have good insulation that prevents heat loss and saves up on energy.
Glass-Lined Tanks
Some water heaters are designed with a glass lining ( porcelain enamel ) inside them. Most of our water heaters are made up of steel, but with a coating of porcelain enamel, it helps to protect the interiors from corrosion. These days, ceramic enamel coating is also becoming widely popular. However, a glass lining is not a necessity in a water heater, but it helps to reduce the corrosion level that extends the life of the water heater in return.
Anti-Scale Devices
The buildup of mineral scale can damage the water heater to a great extent. Few brands have water heaters with anti-scale devices which swirl the water present at the bottom of the tank. This constant movement of water inside the tank helps to prevent mineral deposits. Even though this feature can enhance the lifespan of your water heater, you should focus on getting a model with a more extended warranty period.
Plastic vs. Brass Drain Valves
The drain valve is situated near the bottom of the water heater. It is used to drain the water before shifting the equipment or for other maintenance work.
These drain valves are usually made of plastic or brass. Unlike plastic material, brass is more durable and malleable, while it's also known for being less reactive to water temperature changes. It’s a small feature to consider but has a significant impact on the durability of the water heater.
Capacity
To determine the size of the water tank, you should first understand the amount of water that you’ll require for your household. For instance, a 40-50 gallon water tank for two to five people, while 55 gallons or more for six to seven members. And you’ll require two water heaters for a house with more than eight members.
Digital Displays
The water heaters that come with digital displays are more convenient for our personal needs as you can easily alter the settings. These modern digital displays can be used to adjust the water temperature and water output, and it also comes with a scheduling feature. You can input the duration/hours in which the house is occupied for added efficiency as it can turn off when you’re away.
Possible Reasons to Replace Your Water Heater
When you consider replacing the water heater, you should be sure about a few things, that have gone wrong with the older model. This will help you understand the features that you want to have in your new water heater. We’ve curated some of the common grounds that you should look into, while you opt for an upgrade!
Leakage problems with the water heater
If you notice any leakage in the water heater, you’ll need to call the plumber for helping you fix the problem. This can be a time-consuming chore as well as expensive, but a professional inspection will help you understand the gravity of the issue. And, whether a simple repair will be enough, or you need to replace the entire system.
The warranty period is over
If your warranty runs out by a few years, after the given 10-12 years life span, then this is the best time to get a new water heater. Especially if you’re spending a ton of money on constant repairs as the system keeps breaking down quite often. An older design also indicates that a higher amount of energy is being used to operate the water heater, as it loses its efficiency over time.
Getting a new heater can be expensive initially, but you can save energy and money from the electricity bills every month.
Your building codes have changed
The other reason to purchase a new water heater is when your older model doesn’t match the building codes of your community. It’s essential to keep updating yourself about the new building codes since your devices need to change accordingly. However, if you’re moving from one state to another, then you should get a new model that fits with the building codes of that area.
You keep running out of hot water
Have you been running out of water each time you start doing the dishes or are you taking lukewarm showers frequently? Well! This means that you need a storage tank with a larger water capacity, as your household has a higher demand for hot water.
Final words
As you have read through the variety of water heaters in the market, you should now carefully weigh out their pros and cons. This epic guide was created to help you find a suitable model as per your needs, so make the best use of it!
![What is Resin and How It’s Used [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/12/resin-1.jpg "What is Resin and How It’s Used [All You Need to Know]")
via statesmanjournal.com
![Weber Spirit vs. Spirit II [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/07/Weber-Spirit-II-E-210-And-Weber-Spirit-E-210.jpg "Weber Spirit vs. Spirit II [All You Need to Know]")
![Waterproof Epoxy 101 [Is Epoxy Waterproof?]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/09/Waterproof-Epoxy-101-01.jpg "Waterproof Epoxy 101 [Is Epoxy Waterproof?]")
![Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop [Reviewed]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/03/Waring-Pro-ICT400-Double-Induction-Cooktop-01.jpg "Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop [Reviewed]")
![Vitamix 5200 vs Vitamix 5300 [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/Vitamix-5200-vs-Vitamix-5300-01.jpg "Vitamix 5200 vs Vitamix 5300 [All You Need to Know]")
![11 Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/Best-Upholstery-Steam-Cleaners-1.jpg "11 Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners [Reviews & Buyer's Guide]")
